Organizational Research: Internal And External Consultants Report (Assessment) Argumentative Essay Help

Introduction Research has been widely used to generate knowledge and to solve problems. This paper will describe basic and applied research, internal and external research consultants and state the purpose of organizational research in using the PC software.

It will define research, state how to conduct research, state the research process and show how research is scientific. Definition of terms, explanation of their uses in research and the hypothesis testing procedure will be covered in this paper.

Basic and applied research Basic or pure research is conducted for the sake of increasing knowledge. Moreover, basic research investigates the topics that are scientific in nature. For instance, research has been conducted to find out how the universe began to exist.

Basic research has no commercial basis and does not seek to invent for commercial purpose. In most cases, basic research is supported by the state because today’s invention may be useful a decade later. Researchers believe that basic research leads to the growth of a certain field.

On the other hand, applied research is done to solve problems and to improve the conditions of a situation. An example of applied research is research conducted to establish the cause of slow movement of goods in the market.

Applied research builds on basic research. It can be done for commercial objectives. In simple terms, applied research can only be done in a situation where there is a problem while basic research is done in a situation where knowledge is needed for the sake of increasing information and quenching curiosity.

Internal and external consultants The internal and external research consultants are people capable of doing research and giving the best results. Internal researchers are agents within the organization while the external researchers work for the organization because of their experiences from previous consultations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The internal research department of a company has the advantage of knowing the company’s internal system. It is conversant with the history of the organization and is aware of the details of the organization’s goals and objectives. On the other hand, external research consultants bring new ideas and are believed to be objective.

The external consultants are timed, and expensive. Besides knowing the systems, the internal consultants also understand the culture, symbols and the language of the organization

Some of the challenges that can be faced when using internal research consultants include the challenge of conducting research to the same people they interact with everyday and have formed a relationship already. This may cause them to have preconceptions about some of the employees in the organization.

Hiring internal consultants also has financial implications to the organization as the cost of keeping an internal research consultant is higher than that of hiring an external consultant. This is because they take a long period of time before the final success is realized.

Despite the cost implications on the side of the organizations, it is still advisable for organizations to consider hiring internal consultants instead of external ones. This is because they have the advantage of being available all the time and they also understand the organization’s objectives better.

Purposes for which organizational research can progress with the currently available PC software An organization can conduct research using the currently available PC software for it to be able to deal with a problem within the organization. The available PC software can enable a person to analyze data that has been computed, obtain results and interpret them.

The computer, through a network, can enable the researcher to collect data by sending questionnaires to employees working in the company and receiving responses to the questions through email. This software allows progress in research because it makes collection of data easy and saves on the cost as well as time.

We will write a custom Assessment on Organizational Research: Internal and External Consultants specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When the problems are discovered, the PC software can allow for another survey to monitor progress and changes that occur by obtaining information and analyzing it. Since the software remains the property of the organization, it can be used for doing research for all the departments within the organization.

For this reason, repeated research can help the organization make discoveries that can help expand the company and obtain more revenue. For instance, it can lead to a discovery on how to motivate the employees. The motivated employees in turn become creative and contribute ways of dealing with problems. Fewer problems lead to the organizational success.

Defining research, how to conduct research, research process and how research is scientific Research is an organized way of conducting investigation with the aim of getting information or solving a problem. When conducting a research, the researcher chooses a topic and clearly outlines the scope. Then, the researcher reviews literature on the chosen topic to familiarize themselves with the latest publications on the topic and to ensure their research topic has not been covered.

The researcher then plans and executes the research and obtains findings. Thereafter, the findings are compared to existing knowledge so that they can come up with the conclusion. After the conclusion a report is written about the research and conclusion for different audiences, like the general public or the authorities or the other scholars. The researcher can then publicize the findings of the research.

A research process is a progression of steps that are taken by a researcher to conduct a comprehensive and accurate research. The major steps include: identifying and developing a topic, literature review, evaluation, analysis and reporting.

A research is considered scientific when it adheres to the steps and standards of scientific research. Scientific research is characterized by a set goal, interpretation of the results, replication, accumulation of knowledge and a conclusion. Scientific research is also verifiable and unbiased.

Explaining terms used in research Null hypothesis

A null hypothesis is a type of hypothesis, usually in statistics, that indicate a possible rejection of the statistical significance. It can also be argued that a null hypothesis is a hypothesis that a researcher attempts to disapprove.

Replicability

Replicability is a term used in research to refer to the potential of a research study to be repeated in diverse conditions and with different subjects to establish the accuracy of the original research. The aim is to determine if the conclusion or findings can be generalized to be true in similar circumstances and to subjects with the same characteristics.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Organizational Research: Internal and External Consultants by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moderator variable

A moderator variable has the capability of altering the other variables in the analysis of qualitative and quantitative research. It is independent on both the qualitative and quantitative variables. It affects the causal relationship between the two variables.

Cross-sectional study

A cross- sectional study is a type of research method where the entire population, or a section of the population, is observed at a specific time. The study gives the observation of the population rather than selected subjects with certain characteristics. This study can provide a lot of information about prevalence of a behavior or disease and give additional information about causes.

Comparing and contrasting terms Primary and Secondary Data

Primary data is information collected by the researcher himself from the field. An example of primary data is observations from an experiment. Secondary data is information that has been collected by someone else other than the researcher. It includes: census, records from a business organization and books. Primary data is not recorded and translated unlike secondary data which has to be recorded.

Field study versus Comparative study

A field study is a method where subjects are studied in their natural setting. The researcher avoids relocating the subjects and makes observation when they are in their own setting. On the other hand, comparative study involves studying subjects by comparing observations obtained from different research studies. Comparative study allows comparison of characteristics while field study gives characteristics for a specific setting.

Bibliography and References

Both bibliography and references are recorded at the end of a research. They are also written in alphabetical order. Bibliography is a list that indicates materials used in writing an essay or writing a book. On the other hand, references are the sources of information that have been referred to in the essay, article or even a book. A bibliography does not have to be in the referenced text.

Criterion and Predictor Variable

Criterion and predictor variables are both used to establish relationship of regression in statistics. Criterion variable is the variable that is measured in a regression. On the other hand, predictor variable is simply a variable that can be used to determine the value of a specific variable.

Short notes of terms Panel Studies

Panel studies are investigations done on the same subjects at different times. The study assists the researcher to note changes that occur after duration of time in a given population. It is important when a researcher wants to understand a cause and effect relationship between variables.

Open-ended vs. Closed questions

Open ended questions are questions that make the interviewee give more than one answer. The answer can be an explanation and the researcher does not limit the answers, hence it is called open ended. On the other hand closed questions are questions whose answers are finite. They can be yes, no, or no response depending on the structure of the questionnaire.

Participant Observation

Participant observation is a type of research where the researcher observes the subjects of research by being involved in their activities or by living with them. Besides direct observation, the researcher can interview, participate in discussion and analyze records of the subjects of study.

Social Desirability

Social desirability happens when respondents give a response that would be viewed as favorable by the interviewer. The respondents answer questions underestimating failures or bad actions and overestimating success or good activities in question. An example is when answering a question about the success of a company; employees will tend to talk of the positive side and overlook the negative side.

Operational Definition

Operational definition is used to give the exact measure of a term or variable in a research. It eradicates confusion by giving specific details of the term and its measure. It differentiates similar terms by stating what would make the observations be considered to belong to a certain term and not the other.

The hypothesis testing procedure The procedure for testing a hypothesis involves first stating the hypothesis. This is done by stating the null hypothesis which should be mutually exclusive to the alternative hypothesis. For instance if 0 is obtained then X is true. Then, the next step is the analysis plan which involves selecting the significance level. They may be ranging from 0- 0.5.

The testing method is also indicated and the sampling distributions together with the test statistic are put to test. The researcher can use the mean to establish the probability. If the probability range does not fall within the level of significance, then the null hypothesis is not accepted.

The next step is to analyze the data obtained from the sample. The statistics are then tested using the standard deviation if the null hypothesis involves a mean. If there are categories, then the chi- square is used to test statistic. Interpreting the result is the final step.

The researcher uses the stated hypothesis to interpret the answer. For instance, if the results show no likelihood of the null hypothesis becoming true, then the null hypothesis is rejected. This implies that the values do not fall within the level of significance, hence reject the null hypothesis.

Conclusion Research is scientific and can be used to obtain accurate information following scientific process. There are various methods that can be used to collect data like participant observation. After collecting the data the statistics can be tested by following the hypothesis testing procedure.

[supanova_question]

Social Sanctions’ Impacts on Individual Behavior Coursework essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Qualitative Statement of the Problem

Quantitative Statement of the Problem

Feedback summary

References

Qualitative Statement of the Problem In this case study, we would like to comprehend and illustrate the extent at which social sanctions influences individual behavior in an organization among employees. The objective at this stage in the study is to commonly define and establish the link between behavior control and production (Kuhn, 1996).

This is a very complex study as it involves human behavior and can be carried out by both qualitative and quantitative research methods.. After identifying the problem, the researcher identifies a sample population. The type of sampling employed will be convenience sampling because it is not possible to undertake a total random survey.

The researcher will therefore interview a few available respondents including friends, relatives working in various organizations as well as colleagues. Interviewing will be utilized as a data collection technique. The qualitative interviews are equipped with unrestricted questions, whose responses must capture the structure of a narrative by the respondent regarding his or her knowledge.

The research will commonly be much lesser in capacity because of the complete quantity of information, which must be evaluated by the canvasser. This provides researchers and ultimately readers an additionally inclusive image of the viewpoint of the themes of the study.

The canvasser commissioning qualitative study should set up a straightforward sketch of subject matters that he/she desires to cover in the interview. These themes are used as guidelines particularly when the respondent appears to be swerving from the subject or a concise set of queries that have to be inquired consecutively by the interview.

The study guide method permits the interviewer and respondent to figure a correlation within the interview and can enable the progression to encompass the experience of a dialogue as opposed to a prearranged intellectual process. The investigator should settle on how to document the interview (Leedy

[supanova_question]

Ways of differentiating the content, process, product or learning environment to meet the needs of a highly gifted or under-achieving student. Report argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Differentiation of the content, product or learning environment to meet the needs of a highly gifted or under-achieving student is of great importance in the learning process. This is because it helps in meeting the needs of every child in order to facilitate their learning process.

There are several ways that can be used in differentiating the content, process, product or learning environment to meet the needs of a highly gifted or under-achieving student. These should be designed in order to meet the interests, needs, abilities as well as the individual characteristics of a student (Berger, 2005).

One of the methods used in differentiation is through acceleration. Acceleration refers to the educational process where students meet the curricular goals at an earlier age than the normal age. This may also refer to the process where students meet the curricular at a faster rate than the normally applied pace. There are several ways through which acceleration can take place. One of these methods is through grade skipping.

This is where the exceptionally gifted students are allowed to skip some grades. This is because such students are able to satisfy the requirements of the next grades while still in lower grades. Another way through which this can be done is by early entrance to school, college or kindergarten. Gifted students can be allowed to enter into kindergarten or colleges at an early age because they can learn faster.

Acceleration can also be conducted through special class progress. This is where the students are allowed to cover the work that is scheduled for certain duration in less than the specified duration. For instance, the students may cover the work worth four years in just two years.

Through acceleration, it becomes possible to avoid boredom of the gifted student through repetition of same things. This exercise also enables the students to mix with other intellectual peers hence sharing knowledge and motivating each other (Feinstein, 2006). Finally, a student can be molded through mentorship. This is where a student is guided by an expert in a particular field who helps them in learning in a certain area.

The next method of differentiation is through modification. For instance, it is necessary to modify the content accordingly in order to meet the needs of each child. Through modification, the curricular can be shaped in such a way that it suits each group of the students.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another method of differentiation is through enrichment. Enrichment activities refer to those activities that are designed to broaden and develop children’s experiences without necessarily going into much depth enrichment activities (Berger, 2005).

The aspect of enrichment touches the issues relating to curriculum as well as the delivery of the program. Through enrichment, the curriculum is modified or has some additions in order to cater for the needs of the gifted students.

Extension is another method through which the content can be differentiated. According to Davies (2002), this involves the deepening of the curricular content.

Extension involves the incorporation of the activities that allows the students to stretch their understanding as well as their appreciation of a particular topic being taught by their teachers. The extension activities can range from provision of the learning centers, summer schools; problem solving and resource based learning (Feinstein, 2006).

Over the past, teachers have been using streaming in differentiating the curricular content. This takes place through a process where different groups in the same classroom worked on differing curriculum content based on the level of complexity (Davies, 2002).

These grouping divided students depending on their ability to get ideas. Through this process, students are divided into three groups. These include the slow group, the average group and the medium group. Each of these groups is then subjected to appropriate curriculum.

The teachers can also modify the curricular process for the gifted students through modification of the thought process required (Davies, 2002). Through these practices, teachers can help the students in using a higher order of thinking skills as well as low order of thinking accordingly. In the process, the gifted students are able to acquire the knowledge and use this knowledge effectively.

We will write a custom Report on Ways of differentiating the content, process, product or learning environment to meet the needs of a highly gifted or under-achieving student. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Another method of differentiation is by providing negotiation and choice for the student. Through negotiation, curriculum content can be easily enriched for the gifted students (Berger, 2005). This process also assists the teachers to understand their thoughts and their understanding of various aspects. Negotiation with the gifted students also helps them to think divergently in their efforts to plan and propose the necessary changes.

Motivation also plays a significant role in the education of a gifted student. According to Davies (2002), motivation can be viewed as the process by which the gifted students involve themselves and engage in the learning activities.

The level of student engagement is necessary as it can determine their success to some extent. In other words, those students who fully participated in the curriculum are mostly probably going to record a high level of performance.

In conclusion, this discussion has clearly described the ways of differentiating the content, process, product or learning environment to meet the needs of a highly gifted or under-achieving student. These practices enable different kinds of students in their learning process by achieving and using their knowledge effectively.

Reference List Berger, S. (2005). Differentiating Curriculum for Gifted Students. Davidson Institute for Talent Development. Web.

Davies, F. (2002). Practices Employed By Participating Teachers to Differentiate The Curriculum For The Gifted Students In Their Class. Web.

Feinstein, S. (2006). The Praeger Handbook of Learning and the Brain. U.S.A.: Greenwood Publishing Group.

[supanova_question]

Improving of the Skills and Knowledges in Mathematics Report college essay help near me

Overview and purpose This Unit plan is created to improve the skills and knowledge of Max in mathematics. To achieve this, the curriculum that Max will be going through has to be modified. These modifications will introduce new ideas and challenges to Max (Lorenzo et al, 2009).

As a result therefore, Max will be motivated and challenged while learning. At the same time, Max will get the chance to explore and implement his knowledge and capabilities by applying them in real life situations. All these have to be attained by through the implementation of this lesson plan.

Objectives To achieve the desired outcome for the project, this lesson plan is to be guided by a single goal that has several objectives which have to be achieved by the end of the exercise. The main goal for this lesson plan is that by August 2013, Max should be able to utilize numeric operations and concepts in solving mathematical problems. To ensure that this is achieved, Max is expected to score over 90% in a teacher-generated rubric.

For this goal, the following objectives have to be achieved:

The student has to apply numeric procedures and concepts to solve mathematical problems.

The student has to organize his information and present them before the class.

The student must give a thorough explanation of mathematical reasoning behind his work.

Information This lesson plan aims at improving the performance of Max by modifying his curriculum in mathematics. He is expected to get vigorous training, evaluations and assessments in mathematics that will enable him to use complex concepts and numeric procedures while solving mathematical problems.

This will motivate the student and create more challenges in his education. At the same time, the exercise will work on exploring on his strengths and improving his weaknesses.

Verification To ensure that the student understands the nature of the exercise, he should be briefed about the nature of the exercise and it requirements. The student should also be aware of the goals and objectives of the studies and the role he has to play to ensure that they are achieved.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Activity A mathematical supporting class will be used to train and increase the knowledge and skills of the student in the subject. During this time, the student will be introduced to higher level of mathematics, trained on the various techniques and concepts of approaching mathematical problems and the different methods of solving them. During this exercise, Max will introduced to higher levels of algebra, calculus and geometry.

Summary This exercise will improve the academic capabilities of Max by exposing him through various challenges.

Materials and other Resources Needed

A computer lab, stationeries and a library will be required for the exercise.

Career Exploration Lesson Plan Explanation

The exercise will take eight academic weeks to complete. This exercise will be conducted before and after normal classes and also during the weekends. The student will spend two hours a day working on the exercise; an hour before morning classes and an hour after the afternoon classes. This will provide a serine curriculum and learning environment for him.

During the first four weeks, Max will be on the theoretical part of the exercise. Here, he will learn the basic mathematical procedures of algebra, calculus and geometry. On the last three lesson, he will undertake a simple test for every topic. This will be done to show his level of improvement and the impact of the exercise (Orlich et al, 2009).

In the next two weeks, the student will be involved in intense training in the various fields of the exercise. He will be required to solve complex mathematical problems within a limited time. This will not only improve his performance but it will also improve his thinking capacity.

Towards the close of the exercise, the student will take a final test that will involve all the three fields of exercise. He has to score above 90% in a teachers generated rubric. After this has been completed, Max is required to organize a presentation about his problem solving techniques. He is expected to present this before the class.

We will write a custom Report on Improving of the Skills and Knowledges in Mathematics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References Lorenzo, B., Green, T.,

[supanova_question]

PepsiCo Inc. International Business Strategy Research Paper online essay help: online essay help

Introduction Increasing effects of globalization and the rising international business competition have prompted businessmen, organizations and corporations to rethink their global business strategy. International business strategies have become very important in the wake of increasing globalization, as well as, internationalization of established local companies as they attempt to increase their values in the market.

Corporations are adopting various strategies such as product standardization and differentiation, adaptation, as well as, product diversification to capture both the domestic and the international market. International business strategy refers to the business plans adopted by corporations and businesses in the global business environment to provide services and products consumers across the globe.

Corporations and businesses are therefore developing and adopting strategies which can meet their short and long-term goals. Most corporations have international partners at least at some levels of supply chain to help them overcome the complexities in the international business environment, and as a result, compete favorably in the international market.

PepsiCo Inc PepsiCo Inc is among such corporations that apply several global strategies to increase its value in the international market, and to expand its market share. PepsiCo Inc has its headquarters in Purchase, Harrison, New York in the US. The company deals in manufacturing, marketing, as well as, distribution of beverages and grain-based snack foods among other products.

The company was first established in the 1890s in the state of Delaware and has since expanded over the years to become a multinational corporation. Its expansion has majorly been through mergers and acquisition.

The biggest merger was undertaken in 1965 between Pepsi-Cola Company and Frito-Lay Inc. to form PepsiCo. Inc.; this has become its brand name to-date. After the merger, the company’s headquarters was transferred from Manhattan, Delaware to Purchase, New York five years later.

Since 1970s, PepsiCo has expanded through acquisition of businesses within and outside of its core focus which has mainly been in beverage, as well as, packaged food brands. It has also exited some of its non-core functions business lines especially in 1997. In 1998, the company bought Tropicana brand together with all the products going by the name.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 2001 Pepsi efforts to expand into the soft drink market saw it merge with Quaker Oats Company. Subsequently, in 2001, the company merged with to support the expansion of its sports drinks line and other brands, while also buying majority shares into Wimm-Bill-Dann Foods, a Russian dairy product company (Betsy, Dana

[supanova_question]

Diversity in Organizations Coursework college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

The culture of an organization is an inherent factor in determining its success; therefore, management should understand the cultural diversity in organizations in order to develop programs that promote unifying organizational values. Most organizations do not develop diversity programs until a problem arises in the organization. Factors that drive formulation of diversity programs include the law and business ethics.

An organization should eliminate cultural diversity to avoid negative publicity from legal suits arising from discrimination on cultural basis. This paper aims to develop a model that will help an organization to investigate and analyze cultural diversity. In addition, the paper will exemplify how to implement results from a cultural training diversity program.

To analyze diversity within an organization, the management should begin by understanding individual employee’s cultures. An individual’s culture comprises internal, external, and organizational dimensions. The internal dimension depends on the individual’s age, race, gender, ethnicity, physical ability, and sexual orientation. The internal dimensions of an individual exemplify through his or her personality.

On the other hand, external dimensions comprise of marital status, parental status, geographic location, personal habits, recreational habits, work experience, religion, educational background, and income. Socialization process and social groups that a person associates with, drive the external dimensions.

Organizational dimensions are subject to the position and roles of an individual an organization. The organizational dimension entails management status, functional level, work content, division or department within the organization that an individual belongs, work location, seniority and union affiliation.

Therefore, to understand the cultural diversity, an organization should classify individuals in groups with similar internal, external, and organization dimension. The dimensions help organizations to identify the values that each group values; therefore, the management can reconcile the values by developing an organization culture that caters for all cultural diversities.

When implementing diversity programs by developing a common vision that takes into account all the cultural groups in organizations, the management should begin in such a way that every employee feels like he or she is part of the organization. Diversity programs are all-inclusive programs that should begin with top management downwards. Cultural diversity audit is pertinent to the process of implementing cultural diversity programs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The audits help to establish attitudes and perceptions of employees towards minority groups in the organization and employees from a cultural background other their own (Singelis, 1998, p.75).

After the audits, diversity training by external experts should begin by management, then flow down the corporate ladder. Training management should focus on helping the involved parties to understand the legal and economic benefits of appreciating diversity in the organization.

Diversity training programs help employees to appreciate diversity in the organization by looking at the unique contribution that individuals bring to the table. Analysis of diversity should begin during recruitment. By bringing people with diverse cultural backgrounds together, an organization creates a corporate culture rich with diversity, which can be particularly beneficial, especially in businesses that do international clientele.

The training programs help an organization to understand the social and capital contribution that each employee can contribute to the organization. Social contribution refers to the ability by an individual to develop mutual, lasting, and beneficial relationships in the organization while capital contributions stem from an individual’s skills and abilities.

The diversity training programs should use social networking to encourage employee’s from different cultures to interact on a personal level thus creating an appreciation for a culture other than their own (Tierney, 2007, p.82). When employees begin to appreciate different cultures, they develop a positive attitude towards other employees from different cultural background thus reducing cases of discrimination in the organization.

Management should implement diversity programs from recruitment by initiating mentoring programs among people from different cultural backgrounds. Leadership roles should not be relegated to individuals from cultural backgrounds, which seem superior; the organization should take the initiative to give leadership positions to minority groups such as women and the disabled.

This helps other employees to appreciate the social and capital contribution a person can make to the organization in spite of their cultural backgrounds (Chryssochoou, 2004, p.67). Developing diversity groups is another crucial element in developing a rich corporate culture that embraces diversity.

We will write a custom Coursework on Diversity in Organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The diverse groups should have a team leader from a minority group in the organization. The diverse groups help employees to network on different platforms thus appreciating diversity.

After implementation of the diversity-training program, management should review the results of the initiative by assessing the rate of turn over among minority groups such as women and the disabled groups in the organization.

In conclusion, cultural diversity can be particularly beneficial in an organization that has diversity training initiative to help management understand benefits of cultural diversity, thus creating a corporate culture that is all-inclusive. Discrimination of minority groups because of religion or gender can cause the organization to get negative publicity due to lawsuits.

Organizations should not wait for a problem to crop up to initiate diversity training. The programs should begin during recruitment to build a rich cultural diversity that can be tremendously beneficial to the organization.

References Chryssochoou, X. (2004). Cultural diversity: its social psychology. UK: Blackwell Publishers.

Singelis, T. M. (1998). Teaching about culture, ethnicity

[supanova_question]

Leadership Qualities Essay a level english language essay help

The findings by Katz that the three skills possessed by effective leaders are interpersonal skills, technical skills and conceptual skills, hold true for the most part. Looking at them as a whole presents a formidable formula for effective leadership. However, when taken apart one by one, some deficiencies creep in. In my view, interpersonal skills hold the most sway in an individual’s leadership capacity.

All leadership is about people rallying around a person to pursue a vision. The ability to win and sustain the support of people speaks volumes of the leadership capacity of any person. This is the bare minimum in as far as leadership development goes. On this count, Katz was right.

We cannot say the same for the second quality identified by Katz. Technical skills play an important role in the development of a leader, but they are not essential in making the leader effective. The argument here is that it is not humanly possible to possess all the technical skills that accomplishing a particular vision will require.

The prominence of technical skills diminishes as a person climbs through the ranks until they do not matter anymore. For instance, a general in an army will have foot soldiers and cavalry, and in a modern army setting, an air force. While military prowess will influence promotion along the ranks, it ceases to be significant when he is in charge of the whole army.

It is impossible to have been a first rate foot soldier, an accomplished member of the cavalry and a decorated fighter pilot at the same time. In fact, a general does not think as an individual soldier, but thinks strategically. His technical skills as a soldier only inform his thinking and decision making as much as his advisors do.

We conclude that the demands of top-level leadership hinge more on interpersonal relationships and conceptual abilities, than on technical skill, unless it is in the lower ranks of leadership.

Conceptual skills are indeed crucial for a leader. What attracts people to follow someone is the vision that person present to them. The ability to define direction and to present it to others in a manner that they find it compelling speaks of a great beginning of a leader.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While conceptual skills are very crucial at the beginning, a leader must keep on motivating people and keeping them on course towards the attainment of the vision. Leaders constantly analyze their environment to determine the impact of changes in it in order to find ways of meeting emerging challenges and taking advantage of unforeseen opportunities.

In conclusion, I agree with Katz on the most part about the necessity of the three skills but they require qualification. The possession of these skills on their own predisposes someone to effective leadership, but is not a guarantee of ending up as an effective leader. There are other skills necessary to be an effective leader.

Future leaders will deal with global issues on a more regular basis that the current crop of leaders. The process of globalization has blurred the distinction between local issues and international ones. More uncertainty attends to the conduct of business because things happening in one country produce unforeseen effects such as losses and opportunities in other countries.

For future leaders, two skills will stand out. One of them is effective risk management and the other is global thinking. Risk taking is the order of the day in all manner of leadership undertakings. However, as the world opens up, there are many opportunities that will show up for leaders to take advantage of, but they will have to take significant risks to get them.

This one ability will separate great leaders from great losers. Plans will change too rapidly to allow them to hold on to a long-term operational plan. The need for rapid change will accost every leader.

As global thinkers, new leaders will have to integrate the consequences of events taking place across the world into their day-to-day operations. Cross-cultural interaction will be a normal part of business.

This is already becoming a significant element of business and organizational thinking but the full extent of this situation is still ahead. In conclusion, in addition to Katz qualities, leaders will require greater capacity for risk. This calls for leaders with improved risk management abilities, and a greater degree of appreciation of cross-cultural issues in an increasingly globalized world.

We will write a custom Essay on Leadership Qualities specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are several possible ways of including these two aspects of leadership into the Ed. D program. The key one is a requirement that the thesis includes a section dealing with the global trends in leadership and an evaluation of future risks and their possible management strategies.

This will make it necessary for the students to develop a global thinking mindset in the practice of leadership and will equip students with the capacity to evaluate risks as they move into practice. Other ways of including the areas in the program will be encouraging the students to take courses on risk management and to attend conferences dealing with various aspects of globalization.

[supanova_question]

Strategic Significance of HR Report (Assessment) essay help online: essay help online

The company’s overall performance is considerably determined by the approach and management of the employees. As such, strategic approach in human resource management is very important for a successful company.

Ranging from maintenance of performing employees to right staffing, Human Resource (HR) management is very critical in developing the employees and the entire organization in general. While monitoring the company’s long-term goals, mission and vision, improvement of performance standards is necessary to discover potential problems, performance of staff and observance to standards and tasks.

HR management should possess the right skills in leading, planning, establishing standards and organizing. Since HR managers are part of the team that is entrusted with development of the company as opposed to the technical and operation aspects, a better understanding of this role is critical. More so, this plays a significant role when competition is factored in ( Noe et al., 2007).

Mismanagement is one of the major reasons why companies fail. Problems emanating from human resources should be timely detected to avoiding future difficulties and potential harms to the clients which can be a threat to the whole company. Success and growth of most companies can also be attributed to their culture.

For instance, effective communication amongst the employees helps to ensure that organizational goals are achieved. For a company to consistently grow, it must stick to its culture of best practices while adjusting to changes accordingly (Legge, 1994).

HR professionals together with the management can team up to undertake such responsibilities. Similarly, HR professionals can act as the bridge in implementing what the management wants especially in regard to employees’ affairs so as to achieve common and long-term goals of the company (Jing and Huang, 2005).

Literature review Literature concerning human resource management has had a number of contributions within the last two decades. Significant attention to this field has especially resulted from the different approach in management in the recent past (Guest, 1997).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Surprisingly, even though many researchers have studied HRM on a wider scope, much of the studies have centered on a limited range of issues and has been condemn of being ‘micro analytic’(Delery and Doty, 1996).

In the recent pasts, however, many studies have managed to clearly show the relation between HRM and organizational performance, and it is precisely from this ground that strategic human resource management has been developed (Cappelli and Crocker-Hefter, 1996).

Globalization, rapid environmental change, changing investor and customer demands and innovations to present competitive products and services have become the standard setting for organizations with successful and development motive (Bird and Beecher, 1995).

To maintain a competitive edge, firms must relentlessly improve the quality of their products and services; improve their performance by cutting costs, and differentiating their products and services. To maintain a competitive edge and improve organizational performance, new set of priorities should the center of attention for HR professionals (Guest, 1997).

These new set of priorities focuses more on business and strategy and pays little attention on conventional HR functions such as training, staffing, compensation and appraisal. Strategic priorities comprises of job designs base on teams, quality improvement practices, flexible workforces, incentive compensation and employee empowerment (Jing and Huang 2005).

Strategic human resource management design tries to identify strategic requirements of organizations and planned talent progression which is essential for a competitive strategy implementation and achievement of operational goals (Huselid et al., 1997).

Reference Bird, A.

[supanova_question]

Leadership and Constitution Essay college admissions essay help

The process through which other people can be influenced in order to achieve certain targets, motivation, direction and purpose accounts for military leadership. It is imperative to note that the ability to accomplish certain government missions largely depends on how military leadership is well organized. Constitutionally, military leadership and the various roles performed by the latter are well enshrined.

In order to execute military leadership, a chain of command is paramount. This refers to an authoritative figure within military wing who is overly concerned with giving direction to subordinates. According to the United States constitution, the President is the Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces. Hence, position or rank enables a military commander to legally exercise leadership mandate as provided in the constitution.

Various sections of the United States constitution outline some of the basic unique responsibilities of a military leader. These include safeguarding the welfare of subordinates as well as mission accomplishment in terms of providing the much needed state security as directed in the country’s constitution.

Both written and unwritten constitutions have their own leadership challenges especially during execution. A case example can be derived from several clauses of the United States constitution whereby foreign policy calls for effective leadership style in ensuring that various needs of citizens are met.

Besides, the clause on foreign policy including military issues ensures that all important undertakings of national interest are adhered to all the time bearing in mind that sovereignty of the state is paramount and cannot be compromised.

To begin with, Article 2, section 2 of the U.S constitution has clear provisions on the role of president in matters related to foreign policies. For example, important decisions on foreign matters are constitutionally passed by the President in liaison with Congress.

Although, there is a vivid separation of powers between these two organs in the sense that each is mandated to perform specific constitutional functions to avoid duplication of roles. It is imperative to note that each of these organs has specific constitutional roles that are particularly embed in leadership ideals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Although the US constitution outlines specific leadership roles of each of the two entities, their functions sometimes overlap. This constitutional provision may pose some challenge in leadership since any wrong decision might have devastating effects to a nation.

For instance, the president must utilize high level of leadership skills while making decisions about deployment of troops either for peacekeeping or to arrest an established threat.

Although the constitution requires the president to consult with the Congress before he/she can deploy Army or Navy troops, this is not always the case as the president is sometimes required to undertake independent actions on certain urgent matters without involving the Congress.

For instance, incase there is an eminent threat at our borders, or when other states threaten to attack, the president may have no time to consult the Congress; instead, independent decisions are mandatory during such times.

The above action demands a high level of leadership and ethical conscience so as to make the right choices when such issues arise. Otherwise, if ideal and effective leadership skills are absent, whatever decision is made might have far reaching effects for the country.

On the same note, effective presidential leadership skill that has been informed through contextual intelligence is in high demand especially with the current shift on perception of America as an autonomous superpower. As stipulated in Article 2, section 2 of the U.S constitution, the president is recognized as the country’s Commander-in-Chief of the armed forces.

The latter constitutional provision is indeed instrumental in discharging important and more sensitive matters of national security since he has enormous control over the military. This jurisdiction is very crucial, for it exerts the president as the ultimate determiner of how the nation relates with other nations on a military basis.

We will write a custom Essay on Leadership and Constitution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Indeed, the role calls for super leadership skills for any president to understand the times are changing, and military power is no longer the main variable to measure the strength and limits of a particular nation.

It is imperative to mention that though Article II of the US constitution does not grant the president exclusive powers to declare war for he/she has to consult Congress; there are some instances when past presidents have defied this decree. Therefore, this only amplifies that the execution of some aspects of the constitution requires a leader who is out to protect the constitution, but not to violate it.

Throughout the history of US foreign policy, there have been some instances of failure mostly arising from incumbent presidents. To eliminate such instances, the incumbent presidents must rise above the challenge by making informed decisions while selecting advisors on foreign policy matters on security.

Article 1, section 2 of the US constitution stipulates that the president has the power to appoint and dismiss high-ranking officers in the military. History has shown that most of the presidents make such appointments or dismissals based on political influence. While the move might be fruitful, it would be disastrous if the appointee fails in his/her duty; thus, ruining the reputation of the country.

Therefore, any president willing to succeed must consider learning the rigorous bureaucracies embedded in US foreign policy, so as to make informed decisions that portray his/her leadership intelligence.

Though challenging, a good leader must be able stand up and fight for his decision amidst a contrasting view by those who brag about their experience on foreign military matters. Besides if anything was to go wrong, the first blame would be on him/her regardless of whether the mistake was self or caused by others.

To recap it all, it is worth observing that there are several clauses in the constitution that are attached to leadership. On the other hand, it largely requires both personal and political will in order to fully adhere to good leadership that is acceptable to both the rule of law and entire citizenry.

On the same note, implementation of different aspects of any constitution may be a strenuous and challenging task to many world leaders. However, proficient leadership skills are essential in solving myriad of socio-political and economic problems that are often eminent when various leadership clauses in any piece of constitutional document are not implemented to the letter.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Leadership and Constitution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As already mentioned a critical look at the US foreign policy and how leadership has been embraced in the constitution in streamlining operations is indeed a critical example on how leadership and constitution are related. It is also vital to note that leadership directions provided in a constitutional document may. There are quite a number of leadership roles that may not be necessarily enshrined in a constitution.

[supanova_question]

Examining a business failure: Tyco International Ltd. Essay cheap essay help

Tyco International was established in 1960 by Arthur Rosenberg, as a research laboratory that dealt with experiment for the United States government, later changing into manufacturing industrial products. However in 2002, Tyco was in crisis amid revelation of corruption mainly within top management, which led to the resignation of the then CEO, Dennis Kozlowiski. At that time, the conglomerate was at risk of bankruptcy.

Tyco had over 240,000 employees, thus being a major player in the economy. Despite Tyco registering large profit in the past years mainly through mergers and acquisitions, it was however revealed that its large earnings were because of fraud and accounting tricks. This proved that Tyco was led by fraud, greed, and criminal activities that camouflaged as hard work, allegedly leading to the company’s success.

In May 2002, a criminal investigation was opened to investigate the actions of the CEO, Kozlowiski, which included avoidance to pay income tax, and the transportation of $13million in terms of art in to the company’s headquarters, New Hampshire, as a means to escape over $1million sales tax.

Tyco absorbed many companies as it rose to a conglomerate, in which it would pay these companies; but, rather than indicating this cost as an expense, it would report it as a reduction in earnings. Therefore, the company absorbed massive amounts of goodwill to about $35billion. In addition, many companies were affected by the crisis of Tyco, since they had invested in the company’s shares, (Kay, 2002).

Organizational -behavior theories that could have predicted or explained the company’s failure

Culture of an organization determines the type of leadership involved within the organization, as it determines the degree of motivation present in a firm, which results to performance, satisfaction, and development of an employee. Organizational behavior involves people’s behavior in an organization and the way their behavior affects the organization’s performance.

According to Cole (2001, p.6), management theory involves goal setting, leadership, employee motivation, teamwork and coordination. An organization is made up of management and employees, with the management duty being to co-ordinate, direct and assign task to employees, who in return tackle the tasks to their best capability.

It is however evident that the management of Tyco used employees to perform unethical tasks, like altering financial records and engaging in fraud, actions that are clearly unethical for the organization. Indeed, management fraud can go unnoticed for a long time, as the management has the absolute control of the organization, hence it can engage in any activities as it pleases.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When management is irresponsible, there is a possibility for a calamity in the future, which could result to bankrupts; however, Tyco was lucky, as its case did not result to bankruptcy, despite the executive having stolen close to $600 for their personal gain.

According to Thoreen (2008, p.28), fraud is committed sometimes as a means of rewarding oneself due to their hard work, a similar case in Tyco where the top management rewarded themselves in term of bonuses without the stakeholders’ knowledge. Nevertheless, if the internal controls were keenly monitored, it could have been easier for auditors to discover malpractices in Tyco in earlier stages.

It is however evident that the top executive ordered their employees to commit fraud on their behalf by altering the financial records and offsetting imaginary costs. Sometimes, employees are left with no choice other than adhering to their seniors’ orders, in order to keep their jobs.

Compare and contrast how leadership, management, and organizational structures contributed to the failure

Management skills determine effective and ineffective managers, whereby, skills are the key to achieving goals. According to Proust (n.d, p.7), Mintzberg’s managerial roles include being a figurehead, whereby a manager is required to perform a number of legal duties, and he is responsible for motivating and directing employee.

However, the CEO of Tyco acted contrary to his role and led the company down the drain, as he led in overstating the company’s operating income. Kozlowiski and his management team failed to disclose millions of compensations to the senior management.

A manager’s duty is to direct his employees, however, Tyco management failed on this area when it encouraged its employees to engage in illicit payments to foreign individuals as a way of retaining business for the company.

The ineffective leadership at Tyco, led by Kozlowski, contributed greatly to the collapse of the once booming conglomerate. Kozlowiski was mainly concerned with his personal interest, as he applied million of dollars for personal interests.

We will write a custom Essay on Examining a business failure: Tyco International Ltd. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This act of greed inconvenienced approximately 240,000 employees who would lose their jobs incase the company was rendered bankrupt. Nevertheless, the millions used for his court cases were at the cost of the company; therefore, he acted contrary to his managerial and leadership ethics and put many shareholders and employees at risk of losing everything.

Kozlowiski portrayed characteristics of a selfish, greedy, and unethical leader, who tarnished his image for those who admired him as a role model over the years. Despite Kozlowski having big ambitions for Tyco, he preferred unethical practices in handling the activities, other that hard work, and determination.

Kozlowski, Swartz and Belnick, were accused of stealing from the company, in terms of unapproved bonuses and loans, whereby, they would give themselves low-interest loans or interest-free, which they would camouflage them as bonuses. Nevertheless, poor strategic decisions, overexpansion of acquisitions, dominant CEO, greed, and desire for more power were the key factors that led to the business failure at Tyco.

The poor leadership by Kozlowiski and his management team resulted in fraud practices at the expense of employees and stakeholders. The CEO managed to get away with his actions as he had backup of some members in the board of directors.

Kozlowski was a goal achiever in the way he led Tyco, however, he would go to any lengths to accomplish those goals, thus hurting the company in the end. Nevertheless, Kozlowski can be defined as a derailed leader who never gave anyone an opportunity to question him, thus decisions made were poor and final.

Conclusion Management of any firm should first concentrate on ethics and then profitability, since a company may be booming but on unethical practices, which when discovered lead a firm in to crisis and in the verge of loosing almost everything. However, if an organization is run on pure ethics, all its operations are genuine and free from fraud, therefore, all the profits it accumulates are based on hard work and integrity.

Nevertheless, in case of fraud concerning big entities like Tyco, the government uses a lot of tax money for investigations. In addition, if the firm has to close down, many families suffer, as the employees loose their jobs.

Secondly, potential foreign investors lose faith in countries whose companies are associated with fraud, thus affecting the country’s whole economy. Ethics starts from the management down to the employees, however, if the management entertains unethical practices, the employees eventually follow suit.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Examining a business failure: Tyco International Ltd. by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Cole, G. (2001). Organizational Behavior; Lets Higher Education List Series. OH: Cengage Learning EMEA Publisher.

Kay, J. (2002). Tyco: US conglomerate falls amid revelations of greed and corruption. World socialist website. ICFI publishers. Retrieved from https://www.wsws.org/en/articles/2002/06/tyco-j18.html

Proust, M. (N.d). What is organizational behavior? Chapter1. (Attached material).

Thoreen, T. and Jakobsen, A. (2008). Greed at the Top: Fraud and the Failure of Oversight at Adelphia Communications Corporation and Tyco International Ltd. Norwegian School of Economics and Business Administration. Web.

[supanova_question]

Local authorities are better placed to respond to crises and disasters Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Overview of the history and practice of civil defense

Local and central government Leadership and disasters response

The generic role of the central and local governments

Conclusion

References

Introduction Local and central governments have different roles to play in the response and management of disasters. In this context, disaster means a “sudden catastrophic event that brings any enormous destruction, damage, loss and/or devastation of property and life” (Taylor 1986, ‘Coordination for Disasters’ p.12).

The damages so referred are immeasurable and vary in magnitudes depending on the inflicted region’s geographical location, climatic conditions and earth’s surface degree of vulnerability. During the occurrence of disasters, the social systems of emergency responses remain more often than not rendered disrupted and malfunctioned.

Any hazard that causes immense human suffering amounts to a disaster if it is unpredictable occurring in a large enough speed to out power the response systems, characterized by uncertainty, urgency and the posing of intense threat. For any disaster to take place, people must be living in hazardous places for instance near volcanoes that are active, slopes susceptible to slides, or in regions likely to flood.

In addition, the hazardous phenomenon must take place, whether it is human or naturally instigated. Finally the occurrence of the “disastrous phenomenon must cause immeasurable extensive damages especially where preventive measures have not been taken” (Taylor 1986, ‘The Context of British Politics’ p.57).

Therefore, as the paper unveils, disasters do not include single incidents of human life losses such as a plane crush but rather entangle widespread human sufferings such as an intense earthquake, financial, outbreak of certain infectious diseases, flooding, or even human instigated disasters such as Chernobyl or sea express spill among others.

The essay will look at the roles of the central government in control and management of disasters as contrasted from the local government’s roles and finally evaluate the combined hands of both governance levels to draw a conclusion on which governance level is best placed to cope with disasters management. However, as is exposes, the reverse of the proposition is the case.

Overview of the history and practice of civil defense Various theoretical perspectives have been formulated by different nations to cope with disasters. For instance, in 1991 “…the UK government launched a review of disasters preparations in the nation” (Alexander 2000, p.71). A national aim geared towards enhancement of nationwide emergencies planning agendas was published in 2003.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The agenda focused on putting into place resilience measures for the nation to respond to aftermaths of disruptive challenges as opposed to measures of risks reduction via anticipation or alternatively redundancy measures. According to Comfort (1994, p 157), such an approach makes an assumption of “…a capacity to reorganize resources and action to respond to actual danger, after it occurs”.

Resilience here entangles specialized protections, which are standardized and centralized methodologies of hazards prediction. According to the civil contingencies bill, all the above mentioned resilient measure are all duties of local governments with an exception of centralization which is a mandate of central governments.

“The general requirement of the bill, as an embodiment of current government thinking, seem to make it clear that central government’s desire is to distance itself from response to local disasters whilst trying to ensure adequate local preparation” (Lupton 1999, p.83).

Crucial to note is that disasters idiosyncrasies are not ardently necessary addressed by putting in place formal ways of disasters preparations. According to Comfort (1994), some of the idiosyncrasies include “need to be flexible in response and to be prepared to innovate” (p.158).

Armed with these idiosyncrasies, any form of disaster response system can be sure to respond to the specific requirement of any new moment. As result “Central government desires to remain detached from local emergencies can be justified in the context and remains consistent with a theme of appropriate decentralization” (Taylor 1986, ‘The Context of British Politics’ p.56).

Historically, differences exist in the manner in which decentralized and centralized nations handle disasters. The centralized governments have “fewer decision takers and that they are placed at a higher level in the response hierarchy” (Alexander 2000, p.164).

The hierarchical and centralized models designed to handle disaster have received enormous critics since they have been perceived as having the capacity to hinder free information flow and consequently posing a tragedy in decision-making.

We will write a custom Essay on Local authorities are better placed to respond to crises and disasters specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Modern trends however, are based on coming up with remote structures that are adaptable to specific incidents and which posses amicable familiarity with appropriate responding services.

As Penning-Roswell (1996) observes, “…at least in the case of natural hazard, although there is tendency to focus disaster response at local level, because of the intimate knowledge of the environment in which the emergency is occurring” (p.123) a broader disciplinary and geographical perspectives makes better insights be realized.

Whether the disaster response is well established at local level as opposed to central level of governance is subject to essential requirements such the generic role of the government and the ability to have appropriate leadership during, before and after the occurrence of any disaster both at national and at local levels.

Local and central government Leadership and disasters response Leadership encompasses willingness and the availability of good will to act in an appropriate way. Leadership, Prior to occurrence of any disaster, is essential despite the fact that more often than not, it is not easily recognizable. Under normal circumstances, deferring traits are demanded from those occupying authority positions during times of emergencies.

Leave alone at local level, the capacity of the leaders at central government level to provide appropriate directive in times of disasters is subject to critics as for example during the hurricane Katrina disaster.

Penning-Roswell (1996) noted that “Mismanagement and lack of preparation in relief effort in response to hurricane Katrina and its aftermath: specifically delayed response by federal flood protection to the flooding of New Orleans, Louisiana was attributed to leadership gaps that occurred on occurrence of the disaster” (p.142).

This poses a big question on the credibility of the leaders to provide quick directions in times of emergency. Despite the fact that the state and local authorities have primarily responsibility to play in response to disasters with consequences of pointing the finger of blame on governor Blanco and Mayor Nagin, the central government slow response was particularly to be to be noted.

The central government has all the essential resources that can be mobilized for quick response to disasters but the beaurocracy to be followed such as the requirement of the financial and assessment of the damages caused before the actual release of state resources to deal with the disasters compounds the problem.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Local authorities are better placed to respond to crises and disasters by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even though the local authorities may be well familiar with the environmental conditions of their localities and hence well positioned to determine the rescue services required much quickly, some disasters exceed their financial allocations or rescue equipments wealth.

In most situations, those who are responsible for making urgent decisions on behave of a state are normally at the top hierarchical leadership levels. However, it takes some remarkable time before these leaders are acquainted with magnitude of damages due to the hierarchical established information flow channels with a repercussion of delayed rescue missions.

If the local governments were conferred with, the requisite ability to make quick decisions that can enable them to divert funds that were initially intended for other local government functions to the response of the disasters. It should be noted, “…if a consistently effective response to disasters is to be approved at the local level the realizable approach to the leadership role in time of crises is required” (Penning-Roswell 1996, p.151).

According to the work of De Waal (2005) “ rises tend to produce responses that require swift decisions to be made by relatively small groups of senior managers in order to deal with short term threats and that administrative and organizational centralization is a byproduct of this initial response” (Para 7). Small group of decision makers as a result has a capacity to make quick decisions In the event of crisis.

Such a scenario is typically to be found in the at local government level if at all they have all the necessary resources to mobilize. A critic to this line of view would argue that, an assumption that the leaders in the central government would assume their acquaintance with unfamiliar environment and release funds to cater for disasters is anticipated.

Another obstacle in arguing that the local governments are well positioned to deal with disasters than central governments is their skill-level of diversification required which in most cases not possible.

Alexander (2000) says that, “relying entirely on local lead in the response to a disaster requires that a very substantial number of seniors and middle management officers are appropriately selected and trained for the role, one that might never occur in their careers” (p.88).

With the increased pressure on resources allocation, issues confining the local authorities to particular mechanism of arriving at decisions raises questions about local governments ability to make rescue plans independently and if at all they are given this opportunity, would such plans be up to date and available at the time of disaster occurrence?

Research conducted by Pitt (2007, Para. 2) called upon the “government to show leadership and urgently set out the process and timescale for improving resilience in UK”. In his report, he identified the central government being at the best possible position to solve disastrous problems since it is the one, which has the capacity to make appropriate nationwide binding policies to help curb disasters.

Considering two alternatives, for disasters to be dealt with appropriately at local level, some randomness in training of staff is essential. The other way out is to deploy specialists of different disaster response skills management to all local authorities. This evidently is not possible since the nature of disasters is normally random and characterized by infrequent events.

An example of such an encounter is the Exxon Valdez oil spillage in Alaska disaster. The communities in Alaska have experienced distinctive historic disasters. As Browning and Shetler (1992) note, “three major disasters have occurred in this region during the twentieth century, each the largest of its kind in north America: Katmai eruption of 1912, the great Alaskan earthquake of 1964 and the Exxon Valdez oil spillage” (p.477).

With occurrence of disasters in the same region, local communities acquired noble skills in disaster management accompanied by organizational skills. Browning and Shetler noted in their study of Exxon Valdez oil spillage disaster that, “…creativity, knowledge, energy and organization of local communities are sources that are not adequately tapped under the current contingency planning process” (p.480).

However, were the skills reflected in the Exxon Valdez oil spillage, how much did local authorities contribute to the disaster management? From the rapid and swift movement of the central government to contain the Katmai eruption in 1912, it clearly indicates that the central government, through appropriate leadership has a better position to contain disasters.

This remains possible by provision of funds urgently to aid in the evacuation, resettlement and provision of essential humanitarian services to the victims: what the local governments despite having adequate local environmental knowledge lack.

The generic role of the central and local governments The central government has a historic generic responsibility to protect and manage its society to ensure maximum welfare and services delivery. Disaster management is one of such indigenous societal responsibilities that the central government must play. However, in an attempt to save money, it diverts the responsibility to the local authorities while not considering the effectiveness and efficiency of the response.

The generic responsibility of the central government to cope with big disasters within a nations surfaces evidently in Pitt’s work on the report of flooding disaster in the united kingdom. He pointed out that “the government should provide local resilience forums with the inundation maps of reservoirs to enable them to assess risks and plan for contingency, warning and evacuation” (Pitt 2007, Para. 5).

The local government thus functions under the directives of the central government. It can thus be argued that in case the central government does not respond sufficiently to provide the right and within the right time, the necessary strides that need to be taken by the local authorities to respond to certain disasters, then the whole response process may end up being slowed or unsuccessful altogether.

The government must act first in an attempt to lay out the foundation of the response process by ensuring that “critical infrastructure is as resilient as possible, whilst essential services providers should become considerably more active in local and national emergency preparedness and response” (Pitt 2007, Para. 6). Furthermore, the environmental agencies are more often than not under the control of the central government.

As a result according to Cabinet Office Strategy Unit (2002), the environment agencies responsibility to “ play their part by providing infrastructure operators with a specialized site-specific flood warning service, offering longer lead times to enable defenses to be set up in time”(p.79) depend on the central government willingness to take up its generic roles.

Foucault argues, “…the neo-liberalist tradition of developed western nations shies away from too much state intervention and instead champions individual freedom and rights” (Lupton 1999, p.86). It is now that the local governments should come in, despite their limited capacity to cope with certain disasters sufficiently to aid the central government.

According to Pitt (2007), the local governments should play a significant responsibility to facilitate management of risks of local flood by “taking the lead in tackling local problems of flooding and co-coordinating all relevant agencies” (Para. 7).

He further adds, “Upper tier authorities should establish oversight and scrutiny committees to review the work undertaken to reduce flood risks and publish annual updates on the work undertaken” (Pitt 2007, Para. 11). However, this is a single noble role of the local government as identified by Pitt, which for its success must depend to large extent on the central government’s responsibility to make and implement facilitating policies.

On the other hand, disasters do not just present danger moments but rather the danger process. Managing the entire process is a mandate of the central government as part of its generic roles. Comfort (1994) was to the opinion that “a good deal of political decision making is now about managing risks-risks which do not originate in the political sphere. Yet have to be politically managed” (p.161).

The largest political decisions with nationwide impacts are generally more affiliated to the central government than it is to the local governments. The central government via the established political systems has the noble role to ensure political decisions are arrived to such that they contribute to the overall welfare of the society nationally.

From a different perspective, politics evolution and the associated impacts on central government generic duties are in a manner that translates the task of risks management to a serious issue that deserves more of central government address than the local government.

The central government can be able to adjust certain provisions so that disasters can be managed in a humane way without interfering with the individuals’ stakes. Take for example, the flooding disaster.

The central government is capable of relocating flood victims to some certain selected land acquired through revocation of ownership of lands since in many countries; the central government is mandated to regulate and control use of public land by the constitution. On the other hand, the local government only utilizes the land as stipulated by the central government.

Responses by local government to disasters are normally received with critics. For instance, the response of sea express spill in UK resulted to the establishment of joint response centre (JRC) to address the problem.

As Alexander (2000) notes “ the conflict of normal services versus preparation for major incident manifested itself here in that the planning process that supported the JRC had not taken into account the effects of local government organizations…” (p.121).

Again, the express disaster resulted to existence of multiple cells of operation, which were clearly not integrated and lacked robust and clear coordination process. The ability of the local governments to go beyond local issues either at political or operational level remains questionable.

Conclusion The essay has made efforts to show that coordination, leadership and the generic responsibilities attributed to local and the central governments coupled with flexibility and innovation are essential elements of disaster management.

These elements draw much of their necessary inputs from the central government so that they become robust and evenly distributed within jurisdiction borders without attracting contrasting or parallelism ideologies and stands. A singly established national disaster response agency cannot pragmatically deal with multiple and widely spread disasters alone.

The local governments must thus take up, play ardently their anticipated roles, and support the local communities in times of disasters occurrence.

However, a question arises on how reconciliation of numerous established local disasters response agencies routine operational imperatives can be harmonized to ensure a common, efficient and effective effort designed to ensure central objectives of public, environment and society protection from escalation of harm emanating from disastrous occurrences.

As a result, central government stands up high being at a better position to respond to crisis and disasters than local governments.

References Alexander, C., 2000. Comforting Catastrophe. Harpenden: Terra publishing.

Browning, L.,

[supanova_question]

Marketing plan and segmentation Essay a level english language essay help

A marketing research plan for an international rental car company that will help it design the retention program

Featuring prominently in this plan should be the knowledge of the customer base. This helps in knowing the customers that have to be retained, the services they value, and the incentives they ought to be given that would help motivate them. For this company to learn and know its customers, it has to interview customers about their level of satisfaction. A feedback mechanism has to be initiated.

The car rental company has to invest in market research where customers are asked to give their views on services that they are offered. The company must ensure that their customers are made aware of the good services they offer by creating a profile of customers they have to win and keep. The business should be looked at in a customer perspective.

Issues touching on communication to the customers should be perfected. Problems that arise should be used as an opportunity for showcasing the services the company offers. Customers must always be shown that they are very special and they ought to be kept informed about the services that are offered.

The company should make it a practice to retain its customers. Loyalty and retention can be promoted either by frequency or loyalty marketing. In frequency marketing the company can seek permission from their customers to market to them overtime and return make them feel appreciated for their loyalty.

An incentive would be given to customers to make the company track their purchases (Performance Improvement Council, n.d.). Finally, it is important that this company does budgeting and measurement in order to determine return on investment.

Watch and Lock Manufacturer

A clock and watch manufacturer who realizes that he is operating in the market for machines that measure time who has a desire to segment the market should embark on identifying the customer’s needs within the segments. The manufacturer should also profile the resulting market segments. The segments that have been put in place should be identifiable.

The attributes of the segments that kind of differ should be measurable to enable for ease of identification. The segments should also be accessible in terms of communication and also through the channels that are used in distribution. The segments have to be sizeable not very large yet not very small. They ought to be sufficiently large to be economically viable.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The segments must accrue profit for it would be worthless for them to be in place if they are not profitable. The segments also need to respond to unique needs of the different market mixes in their area of operation. When market segments are initiated it is pertinent that the cost of frequent changes is brought into perspective hence the need for their durability.

For purposes of ascertaining the potential of these segments in terms of how they would impact specific market mix it is important for this watch and clock manufacturing company to come up with a market segment whose potential can be measured.

It is also crucial for this manufacturing company to factor in resources that they have and their capabilities before coming up a market segment. This underscores the importance of compatibility.

Maserati

The positioning strategy for North American Company that has just introduced Maserati, the latest model of a sports car that would be competing with other established brands like Porsche, Ferrari, Jaguar, and the BMW Z8 would include identifying the market segment that Maserati would appeal to. Maserati would hope to appeal to sports car enthusiasts in basically their entire market niche.

The major challenge would of course be those people who practically adore a specific brand and would not give a second thought to that. Credence will be given to sports car lovers who would want some unique features to be part of the package that Maserati comes with that other sports cars do not have. This category may have the first time buyers or those who have hard experience with other brands.

Positioning strategy would also integrate the engine capacity of Maserati in comparison to other sports cars. The question here would be ‘I Maserati powerful enough? People who would want to be unique must be cared for in Maserati positioning strategy as there are people, especially the young generation who hates hanging out in things that everybody else has.

These people look for personality (FIAT, 2007). To actualize the positioning strategy that Maserati manufacturers have put into place, there is need for coming up with a working marketing mix to reinforce its advantages over other sports car brands. The new Maserati core values and positioning ought to be carefully reflected upon.

We will write a custom Essay on Marketing plan and segmentation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is need for careful crafting of Maserati’s positioning statement that would convey its advantages over other brands to attract potential buyers in its target market.

Secondly, the manufactures of Maserati should contemplate taking the brand to the customer by first engaging in pre-publicity. Price that is set should reflect the company’s positioning strategy. Finally, intensive promotion like pre-publicity, test-driving, and holding open weekends should be initiated.

Role of the consumer in terms of freedom of choice in consumption situations

Consumers know what to consume and what not to consume or shy away from as witnessed among the money and brainers cluster (Twitchell, 2002). This is actually the basis of culture occasioned by liberal arts education.

The views expressed in the article are not consistent with traditional marketing idea that emphasizes personal decision because the article talks of people consuming certain commodities to conform with the popular culture and not because they have made a personal decision to purchase them. Buying certain commodities would make you to be associated with a specific group of people.

Reference List FIAT. (2007). Managing the Marketing Mix for the launch of new Fiat Panda. The Irish Times Business 7th Edition. Web.

Performance Improvement Council (n.d). Customer Retention: Keeping Your Best Customers for the Long Term. Executive white Paper.

Twitchell, J.B. (2002). Needing the Unnecessary: The democratization of luxury. Reason; Vol. 34 No. 4.

[supanova_question]

Marketing Communication Mix: Virgin Atlantic and British Airways Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Company Background Virgin Airlines was established in 1984 in the United Kingdom with its president being Sir Richard Branson. Over the years it has been in operation, the airline has managed to attain an optimal market position (Plunkett Research Limited, 2004, p.87). For example, the airline has increasingly become popular amongst travelers around the world. Currently, the airline is one of the leading firms within the United Kingdom airline industry.

By venturing into the industry, the objective of Virgin Atlantic was offer high quality travel services to its customers at a minimal cost. On the other hand, British Airways was established in 1935 in the UK. The airline operates on a global scale serving more than 300 destinations (Belliotti, 2008, p.66).

Marketing communication strategies Considering the fact that the firms intends to influence the consumers decision making process through their marketing communication, both Virgin Airlines and British Airways have integrated pull marketing communication strategies.

According to McCabe (2009, p.195), the pull strategy is mainly focused at the consumers. As a result, the message adopted during the communication is intended at informing, persuading, and reminding the customers regarding the existence of the product in the market (Rao, n.d, p.45). In order for the pull strategy to be effective, the two firms have incorporated diverse marketing communication techniques.

Marketing communication objectives In their operation, both Virgin Atlantic and British Airways are aimed at attaining a number of objectives as outlined below.

To increase the firm’s level of awareness regarding the firm and its products.

To create a preference amongst the customers to purchase the firms products over other competing products.

To increase the customer base by encouraging potential customers who have never travelled using the airline to try it out.

To reinforce desirable purchasing behavior amongst the customers.

To create a strong customer relationship.

Positioning strategy According to Longenecker (2010, p.34), positioning strategy contribute to a firm attaining an optimal market position and to also enhance its image in the customers’ minds. In its operation, Virgin Atlantic has adopted the gap positioning strategy. This enables the firm to communicate to its target customers the firm’s brand concept.

Some of the issues communicated using this positioning strategy include the firms innovativeness, the unique characteristics of its products, and high quality of its products.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, British Airways has positioned itself in the market through differentiation. The airline intends to portray itself as an airline that is caring, conscious of the consumers comfort and class

Virgin Atlantic -Integrated marketing communication mix In executing its marketing activities, Virgin Airlines has appreciated the importance of ensuring efficient marketing communication. To achieve this, the airline has formulated and implemented the concept of integrated marketing communication.

Integrated Marketing Communication refers to the process of adding value to a firm’s effort to create market awareness (Jain, 2008, p.3). The firm is able to achieve this through integration of both traditional and emerging marketing communication techniques.

Advertising In its advertising strategy, the firm utilizes different mediums which include both conventional and emerging methods. The conventional methods utilized by the firm include use of television, radio, newspaper and outdoor methods of advertising through use of billboards and outdoor posters and taxis side (Mouncey

[supanova_question]

Advantages and Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Advantages of sales force automation

Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction Over two decades ago, information technology was not well advanced as it is today. Companies employed salespersons who were responsible for customer care services in a given geographical representation. The salespersons as they were referred to had to work in the local offices acting as correspondents to the viable buyers. On other occasions, the salespersons were mandated to travel long distances to look for clients.

In order to meet the demands of large clientele, companies were forced to hire more salespersons with different knowledge on different products. However, advances in technology have necessitated the design of software that makes work easier for the sales team. The technological revolution has made marketing easier and quicker as sales are nowadays made through the use of the sales force automation.1

Sales force automation has become common in many companies for its ease and many advantages are associated with it.2 The sales force automation (SFA) is programmed software that is able to automate different business tasks.

Most of the companies acquire customized sales force automation that meets the company’s specifications and needs3. It is sometimes referred to as the sales automation software or the customer relations management. This has definitely changed the productivity in the workplace because of its strategic advantage4.

Sales force automation is the process of automating the various sales activities of a company. A detailed sales force automation system offers various applications and features, such as calendars, ‘to-do’ lists, product configurations, contact management, and information sharing5.

A sales force automation system records the various phases of a sales process automatically. It also consist of a contact management system that follows the different contact that the sales force has made to a specific customer, the purpose of such a contact, as well as the necessary follow up.6 As a result, chances of irritating customers are minimized because no sales efforts can be replicated.

The lead tracking system of a sales force automation system includes the phone lists of potential customers, order management, product knowledge, and sales forecasting features7. There are also developed SFA systems with sophisticated features that enable customers to customize their products to meet their desirable qualities, via online product building systems. SFA enables users to quickly retrieve and enter data.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the system allows business owners to streamline their sales workflow quickly. On the other hand, a company that has implemented a SFA system may be faced with a number of problems, such as the additional cost of purchasing and maintaining the necessary computer networks and the SFA software.

By use of laptops and internet communications and sales transactions can be easily carried out8.The research paper endeavors to examine the advantages and disadvantages of sales force automation. Also, the paper endeavors to explore whether it is worthwhile for companies to invest in the system.

Advantages of sales force automation If at all companies wish to successfully accomplish their sales and marketing functions today, it is important that they embrace technology. The effective and strategic implementation of technology offers a lot of potential benefits to companies. The Internet has proved to be a formidable platform for launching SFA.

SFA consist of user-friendly features that enable customers to use to easily tailor product to fulfill their requirements via online product building systems9. This is a trend that has increasingly gained popularity in the IT sector whereby customers are able to tailor different features. For instance, Dell computers provide consumers with alternative accessories and features.

The adoption of SFA has enabled the company to enhance its sales operations through increased efficiency, thereby minimizing operating costs10. This is because cost is reduced and each employee’s individual revenue is increased11.

SFA systems augment sales instructions. For this reason, it can be adopted by a company to facilitate handier and faster sales training. A company may also use SFA systems as a tool to inform the products sales personnel about various sales methods and products. Consequently, this automatically reduces the time spent in organizing and conducting long seminars and coaching sessions.

The automation also spares sales representatives the agony of having to manually fill out written orders. As such, this is a feasible method that saves the effort, time and resources of a company12.

We will write a custom Essay on Advantages and Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The method is also likely to inverse the success and efficiency of the sales force because they are now better able to dedicate most of their time and energy on sales generation. It helps in keeping the information and data of customers making it easy for the salesperson.13

The SFA systems also enables one to better associate and communicate with customers because it allows you to arrange and organizes consumer information and details. This way, one is able to generate more efficient leads effortlessly14. The systems also allow one to examine potential leads in line with consumer information and business products. Also, you are more likely to pursue the most profitable leads.

Using the SFA systems, sales managers are better able to access stock positions, order books, as well as other activity reports. Consequently, the sales manager is able to manage various sales process activities more effectively. Customer satisfaction is ensured since no time is wasted in explaining the commodities to customers15.

The SFA systems also enable the sales manager to automatically evaluate different forms of information. Such would include new competitors, new products, and market trends. In addition, the sales manager can also effectively categorize the most profitable or problematic customers.

Using more complex and innovative sales force automation model, it is easier for a sales manager to monitor the productivity level of his/her sales force16.SAF systems allow marketing managers to utilize the 4 Ps (price, product, distribution and promotion) in designing the most suitable marketing strategies.

To the management, the SAF systems results in increased revenue, increased market share, and the overall sales force productivity also increases. The sales and marketing staff continue to churn out valuable information with increased frequency and this increases the agility and alertness of the management.

Besides, it is also easier for management to project cash flows, revenues, and sales pipelines. Lastly in enables the management to identify bad and goods salespersons as all information is kept and availed to the management.

Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation There are also a number of disadvantages associated with the application of the sales force automation systems at the workplace. Sales force automation can lead to inadequate communication between departments. This occurs when the system is not well integrated and interconnected with the rest of the departments in the same company.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Advantages and Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This may lead to instances whereby the management contacts same customers unknowingly over the same period of the time. With the emergence of technology, many companies are forced and tempted to automate all their systems using the sales force automation. However, the more the number of the sales forces automation the more complex they become.

This makes it hard to operate especially when there is inadequate technologically able human resource17. This may become a drawback because they required experienced people who are well trained in operating them.

So as to ensure that they are well operated, the management may decide to hire fresh human resource that could be well versed with the operations. Hiring and training new employees is a cost that the company may experience.

SFA which is an excellent approach in the management of sales and the company-customer relations has some drawbacks. Although it makes work easier through automation, its implementation may proof to be difficult because of the initial cost required18. Installation of the software and the machines frames works used to support it may be costly during the inception stages.

The computer networks, internet connections, and cost of training staff is a disadvantage to a company had not been using the technology. Some of the SFA software are complex, expensive, and comprehensive and may deter small sized businesses from adopting the technology19. This can be articulated to the budget constraints that may be high for the medium sized companies.

Sales force automation systems are driven by continuous data and information. This means that a company has to engage in technological updating of the system. Information and data updating, upgrading of the systems and occasional maintenance is required to ensure that data and information flows freely and is made available to the organisation.

Sometimes an organisation may be faced with inadequate data on the clients. This may be due to slow input of data because of the challenges employees may face from the new technology. This may represent the company with less information that it ever had in the traditional way.

Updating the systems and the use of sales force automation can make part of the employees unhappy. 20 Normally, the SFA requires input of information and data into the system for the ease application. This makes the employees to identify customers with ease, be able to sell the products and services, as well as enjoying themselves as it save time and energy.

However, the need for employees to input data and information into the system can make them unease because input of data in the systems is an extra workload that the employee may not be used to. This may reduce the morale of the employee as well as making them unhappy. The system has the capability of rendering people jobless as their part of the job is taken by machines.

For example, if a company had 100 sales persons the number can be reduced to 10 with one individual at a different geographical representation. This means that 80 people may be displaced by the machines, because no more field agents may be required as communication can be done through the internet

Sales force automations leads to the dehumanization of the workforce as sales persons are replaced by computers and other related machines. Initially, the essence of using the sales force automation was to automate specific tasks and decisions existing in the customer and sales departments.

However, this has not been the case because the program has taken the whole department and made it automated. Although its inception has seen many companies enjoy a lot of benefits, it has led to dehumanization. Sales and marketing revolves around the interaction between the sales people and the clients21.

However, this has been placed by the sales force automation software that does all the work that was initially performed by the sales persons.

Not forgetting the efficiency, effectiveness and profits that are associated by the use of the SFA, some of the reliable clients and part of the employees may be offended by removal of the interaction that existed between them. This may result to resentment that leads to client base reduction as well as strikes and stoppages from some of the employees.

In conclusion, the advancement of technology has made it possible to maintain the relationship between sales and customer relations. The inception of sales force automation, a program that automates all the business activities, many organisations have been able to enjoy the benefits associated with the new technology. SFA encourages efficiency, effectiveness, and profitably in the company.

Customers are well served and communication and follow ups can be done well through the use of internet. It makes it possible for management to make research on some of the products based on the data and information available to them. Agility and alertness of the management team is improved as everything is automated. The system has the capability of ensuring competitive advantage as cost effective22.

This increases productivity that boosts the total returns. SFA encourages multitasking as different tasks can be carried at a go. However, there are numerous drawbacks associated with the SFA. Adoption of the technology requires startup capital that can be an impediment to medium sized companies.

SFA is known to replace human being in the workplace making it dehumanized. After replacing the employees, jobs are lost although efficiency and effectiveness are realised.SFA requires constant data and information update which may be cumbersome and new to the employee. This may require employing new staff members or training of the already existing ones.

Bibliography Agnihotri, Raj. Effective sales force automation and customer relationship. [S.l.]: Business Expert Press, 2010.

Banks, John. “Benefits of Sales Force Automation.” Web.

Bidgoli, Hossein. Electronic commerce: principles and practice. San Diego: Academic Press, 2002.

Buch, Trushit. “A Beginner’s Guide to the Advantages and Disadvantages of Sales Force Automation. Solutions”. Web.

Coker, Darlene M. High performance sales organizations achieving competitive advantage in the global marketplace. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2000.

Evans, Nicholas D. Business agility: strategies for gaining competitive advantage through mobile business solutions. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Financial Times/Prentice Hall, 2002.

Lamb, Charles W., Joseph F. Hair, and Carl D. McDaniel. MKTG4: student edition. Mason, OH: South-Western Cengage Learning, 2010.

Malik. Advesh, G. P. Management Information Systems India: Firewall Media, 2005.

Nath, Dhruv. The nuts and bolts of CRM (customer relationship management). New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.

Pride, William M., and Ferrell, O. C. Marketing. South-Western Pub, 2011.

Solomon, M. Launch! Advertising and Promotion in Real Time. New York: Flat World Knowledge, n.d.

Sales Force Automation. “The Major Advantages of Sales Force Automation.” Web.

Walker, Graham/ Goldberg, Evan. Netsuite for Dummies. John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Construction Projects Success Factors Report (Assessment) college essay help near me

Title Construction projects succeed as a result of interaction and interplay of factors such as understanding of client complexity, emergent requirements, and perceptions of different stakeholders in the construction industry.

Background Construction projects are regarded to be either ‘successful’ or ‘failed’ differently by different stakeholders in the construction industry. Perceptions among the key stakeholders in the industry, mostly the practitioners and the clients, continue to differ, a fact that affects many construction projects.

For instance, projects that have been considered failed by the practitioners have received positive response from clients where such projects are seen to be success by the clients (Thomson 2011).

This difference in perception has been captured in one major research work in the industry carried out by Derek Thomson who found out that construction practitioners tend to view a project to be successful when such project has the ability to meet the client’s requirements, largely formulated and outlined during the commencement of a project (Thomson 2011).

As a result, such projects lack stakeholders’ contribution and enrichment of the initial outlined requirements as the project progress, a situation that leads to many clients viewing such projects as failed (Rowlinson and Cheung 2008 cited in Thomson 2011).

What construction practitioners fail to understand or internalize by adopting this approach is that, by ignoring client dialogue, there is little under-utilization and appreciation of constructive and potential emerging solutions largely developed from the client’s socially constructed perception of the improved understanding of construction requirements.

On overall, the construction industry heavily relies on performance goals and metrics formulated as the project takes off (Chan 2003). However, in the modern world where there is increasing growth of stakeholders in the construction industry, there is rise of clash of perception, as the theory of social construct would postulate.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There is need to recognize that the emerging and increasing client judgments regarding the success or failure of construction projects is heavily impacting the construction industry and it cannot be ignored.

As a result, in the recent times there have been suggestions that construction practitioners need to change their long time perception on the success of projects and in turn incorporate the views of multiple stakeholders in the industry, specifically the views of the clients. This is not only important but necessary given that identifying and appreciating client awareness of projects improves as projects progress.

Given the above understanding this research will investigate the issue of changing perception of key stakeholders in the construction industry and how and how such perception change impact the construction projects.

Objectives of the research will premise on the need for the construction practitioners to identify new project success goals apart from the initials ones; formalized time cost and performance goals. Also, there will be effort to study and explain why the construction practitioners need to recognize the client awareness of requirements as past research work indicate that such requirements improves as projects progress (Thomson 2011).

Further, there will be need to show that existence of internal conflict involving multiple client stakeholders should form the basis upon which construction practitioners are able to identify ad implement emerging project solutions that fulfills clients needs requirements.

Purpose statement It has been identified that in the construction industry specifically for the construction practitioners, there has been huge reliance on performance metrics that initially are fixed during the onset of the project (Saqib, Farooqui, and Lodi 2008). As a result, there exists misunderstanding or divergent perception between the construction practitioners and the multiple key stakeholders.

Divergence in perception particularly arise from the fact that, majority of clients in construction industry consider a project that is perceived to have failed by practitioners in terms of formalized time, cost and performance goals as success if such project is able to satisfy emergent requirements that were not understood during the initial briefing (Chan 2003).

We will write a custom Assessment on Construction Projects Success Factors specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Arising from this scenario is the fact that many practitioners have failed or have ignored to recognize that client awareness of requirements improves as work on construction projects goes on.

Therefore, the purpose of this research is to employ both primary and secondary research tools in investigating how the understanding of client complexity, emergent requirements, and perceptions of different stakeholders by construction practitioners can result in the success of a construction project.

By understanding client complexity, emergent requirements, and perceptions of different stakeholders in the construction industry, this research will be proposing some of the policy requirements that can be adopted in the construction industry.

It is anticipated that the policy proposals will adequately capture the need requirements of client stakeholders while at the same time inform and equip construction practitioners with the necessary knowledge of the emerging changes in the construction industry.

Research Questions Research questions arise from the purpose and aim of the research paper as outlined and explained above. Therefore, below are research questions that will guide this research paper.

How do construction practitioners regard a project to be success or failure?

How do client stakeholders perceive a project to be successful or failed?

How adequate can internal conflict among client stakeholders and their reflection on projects help construction practitioners develop solutions that fulfill clients’ needs?

How appropriate is factors such as understanding client complexity, emergent requirements and perceptions help in project success?

Literature Review It has become apparent that defining project success in construction industry is posing problems to many people (Saqib, Farooqui, and Lodi, 2008). Numerous views in form of probable definitions have been provided by various researchers of what project success constitute.

For instance, in a research carried out by Lim and Mohamed in 1999, it was identified that construction success is linked to customer stakeholders (cited in Thomson 2011). According to this view, construction success in terms of customer stakeholder’s perspective is premised in macro evaluation of the building’s social acceptance together with the performance.

On their part, practitioner’s view of project success is captured through micro evaluation of key aspects of functional, physical, or sometimes financial objectives (Thomson 2011). Given these divergent perception and definition of project success, it should not be forgotten that in both scenarios of defining success by both stakeholders, success is defined with regard to project’s fulfillment of acceptable criteria.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Construction Projects Success Factors by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The above perspectives of defining or explaining project success within the construction industry have been regarded to exhibit shortcomings manifested with lack of explicit and measurable quality criteria and due to lack of objective and universal quality standards (Dewulf and Van Meel 2004 cited in Thomson 2011).

Another researcher, Nicholas (2004) suggested through field research that the traditional definition of project success in construction industry is limited since it only defines project success in terms of budget, schedule, and performance metrics (Chan 2003; Arslan and Kivrak 2008). This definition ignores or bypasses the client stakeholder’s needs that are largely manifested in attitudes, practices, and structures.

More perspectives on the definition of project success have been explored by other numerous researchers. Bryde and Robinson (2005) suggested that definition of project success should dwell much on tangible and cost success factors instead of other factors (cited in Thomson 2011).

At the same time, the researchers noted that this kind of definition should further be ingrained in defining project success by focusing more on satisfying the procuring stakeholder.

This definition was acknowledged and enriched by Murphy in 1974 where through research; it was noted that project success should be built on client satisfaction (cited in Thomson 2011). Moreover, clients appear satisfied when a project manifests characteristics of good coordination of collaborators, avoidance of initial over-optimism and clarity of success factors (Thomson 2011).

On his part, Alvesson et al. (2009) captured the issue of client pluralistic by suggesting that clients are pluralistic, that is to say, clients are “more or less heterogeneous assemblages of actors interests and inclinations whose identity must be constructed so that stakeholders can be identified by solution providers” (cited in Thomson 2011, p.70).

Given this position, it has become clear that solving client complexity is transferable specifically when client ambiguity and complexity s identified.

Nevertheless, other researchers have concluded that there is lack of general consensus as to what exactly can constitute project success in construction industry (Shenhar and Dvir 2001 cited in Thomson 2011). Rodriguez-Repiso et al. (2007) went ahead with research work to observe that emergent views in construction projects should surpass formal goals guiding the project (cited in Thomson 2011).

Overall lesson arising from the findings of the research work by the various researchers is that the success of construction projects is likely not to be realized if projects put more focus on performance and little directed towards people issues.

This can particularly be borrowed from the business perspective of defining project success where success is perceived to depend on the ability of actors to modify goals during the life-time of projects instead of sticking to the onset project goals (Arslan and Kivrak 2008; Thomson 2011).

As a fact project success in construction industry need to fulfill customer satisfaction, which in turn need to be evaluated largely by stakeholders’ value judgment. Such value judgment emanates from stakeholders’ values, experience, expectations, and not success factor targets (Thomson 2011).

Methodology The purpose of this research project is to investigate and study how the understanding of client complexity, emergent requirements, and perceptions of different stakeholders by construction practitioners can result in the success of construction projects.

This section will explain the research methodology that will be utilized. The methodology for this research project was chosen in correlation with the research questions and purpose of the research (Strauss and Corbin 1998). Target population for the study includes client stakeholders and practitioner stakeholders that are actively involved in construction industry.

Active involvement is defined as the stakeholders who are involved in construction projects and who are impacted by the results of the projects (Babbie 2010). However, the working population for this research project includes those stakeholders from the target population that are prepared to participate in the questionnaire process (Babbie 2010).

Data collection

Data will be collected from both primary and secondary sources, in the case of the primary data questionnaires will be formulated whereby they will be distributed among the target population. Secondary data will be collected from available researches done by various scholars in the topic as literature reviews.

Research design

The research methodology for the proposed research includes a combination of quantitative and qualitative analysis: the quantitative section will involve the analysis of the responses obtained from the questionnaire surveys and the qualitative section will be based on a critical analysis of the responses obtained from the direct interviews.

Sampling processes suggests that probability sampling is appropriate for the next step of the research (Babbie 2010). The sampling methodology includes a multistage sampling process that uses a stratified random sample of the firms’ identified in the working population during the research. The use of random sampling is important to avoid bias in the selection process.

The qualitative information obtained from the interview will be organized on a nominal scale and the respondents will be required to rate the extent of what project success or failure is within the construction industry. Moreover, the questionnaires will include an interval scale in an attempt to make the analysis more precise and the respondents will be required to choose between the categories included in the interval scale.

Data Analysis

Data will be analyzed using Microsoft Excel, 2010 version. Various pivot tables will be used for cross tabulation and other statistical data will be accomplished using different Function tools within Excel.

Conclusion Construction industry is expanding at a faster rate (Arslan and Kivrak 2008) and success in any construction project can no longer be defined from the practitioners’ stand of view.

To avoid conflicts from arising in the definition and perception of key stakeholders as to what constitute project success, there is need to carry out an informed and deep research as to what comprise project from the practitioners and clients stand point of view.

In this way this research project will employ both quantitative and qualitative research tools in investigating and studying how the understanding of client complexity, emergent requirements and perceptions of different stakeholders results in project success in the construction industry.

Given that scant research work exist in this area this particular research will be instrumental in formulation and implementation of key policies n the industry to realize flu satisfaction of clients needs.

Mind Map for construction project proposal

Reference List Arslan, G. and Kivrak, S., 2008. Critical factors to company success in the construction industry. World Academy of Science, Engineering and Technology. Web.

Babbie, E. R., 2010. The Practice of Social Research. OH: Cengage Learning. Web.

Chan, A. P., 2003. ‘Framework for measuring success of construction projects’. School of Construction Management and Property, Queensland University of Technology, Brisbane, Australia. Web.

Saqib, M., Farooqui R. U., and Lodi, S. H., 2008. ‘Assessment of critical success factors for construction projects in Pakistan’. Research Paper presented at the First International Conference on Construction in Developing Countries, Karachi, Pakistan. Web.

Strauss, A. L. and Corbin, J. M., 1998. Basics of qualitative research: techniques and procedures for developing grounded theory. NY: SAGE. Web.

Thomson, D., 2011. A pilot study of client complexity, emergent requirements and stakeholder perceptions of project success. Journal of Construction Management and Economics, Vol.29, No.1, pp.69-82. [Attached notes].

[supanova_question]

The Behavioral Approach of Studying Leadership Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Behavioral Approach

Conclusion

References

Introduction Over the centuries, leadership styles have been evolving due to development of organizations and the need to enhance efficiency and effectiveness of management procedures. Management experts have come up with several leadership approaches and theories that have helped managers to propel their organizations to achieve the stipulated goals.

Behavioral approach is one of the approaches of studying and implementing leadership policies and decisions and has proved to be an effective way of management as it is consistent with theory Y. According to McGinnis (2006), organizations are social institutions with a group of people that need mobilization to work interdependently for organizations to achieve their purposes (p.42).

Hence, given that an organization is a social institution, it means that organizational behavior reflects the capacity of management to offer leadership.

During early19th century, the theory of management emerged as a cooperative integration of various functions in an organization in order to achieve organizational goals; nevertheless, in early 20th century, management became an art of mobilizing people to perform specific tasks that translate into organizational goals.

Therefore, since organizational behavior is central in leadership study and management of organizations, this essay explores behavioral approach as one of the approaches of studying leadership.

Behavioral Approach Behavioral approach of leadership study focuses on abilities of leaders or managers to mobilize human resources to achieve organizational goals. Perspective of behavioral approach in leadership is that individual behaviors cumulatively determine organizational behaviors, which ultimately determine the organization’s capacity to meet its goals.

McGlone (2005) affirms that effective leadership depends on behavioral influence of leaders on individuals or groups in an organization (p.3). Hence, the ability of leaders or managers to influence employees through supervision and motivation shapes organizational behavior, which is essential in achieving desired goals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since organizations are social institutions and that human resources are very critical in the 21st century, study of human behavior becomes imperative as it gives an insight into management issues that play a critical role in organizational behavior.

Leaders who utilize behavioral approach in their management have effective communication and relationship skills, which are essential in engaging employees to work coordinately. The University of Michigan has employed behavioral approach of leadership and has proved to be quite effective in motivating and satisfying employees.

The strength of behavioral approach of leadership is that it is consistent with theory Y, which focuses on motivating employees. Theory Y elucidates participative style of management that is very effective in the management of modern mega organizations.

The assumptions of this theory deal with human behaviors by presuming that employees are invaluable resources, they effectively work concertedly, and that delegation of responsibilities is essential in achieving organizational goals. According to the first assumption, human resources are invaluable resources in an organization because such resources need development and motivation.

According to theory Y, proper motivation of the employees enhances their self-esteem and creates conducive environment where working becomes a leisure activity. In the second assumption, theory Y holds that cooperative working of workers needs effective leadership that can influence organizational behavior and direct workers towards a common objective.

Thus, coordination of activities and tasks in a manner that enhances concerted efforts significantly enable organizations to achieve their objectives expediently. The fourth assumption is that delegation of responsibilities by the top management to the lower management levels improves productivity in an organization.

Therefore, behavioral approach of leadership recognizes that employees are crucial resources that need mobilization as well as motivation of behavior to shape organizational behavior and consequently achieve organizational goals.

We will write a custom Essay on The Behavioral Approach of Studying Leadership specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The weakness of behavioral approach of leadership is that it focuses too much on general interests of employees while neglecting development of individual and infrastructural capacity of an organization. Behavioral approach of leadership assumes that organizational behavior and employee motivation are the only critical factors that are essential for an organization to achieve its objectives.

Furthermore, behavioral approach of leadership presumes that leadership skills emanate from organizational behavior and not inherent in individual abilities. In this perspective, the behavioral approach of leadership fails to recognize the inherent skills and talents that an individual can contribute towards an organization.

McGlone (2005) argues that, although organizational behavior can motivate employees, they still need technical skills and infrastructure to optimize their potential (p.9). Thus, for an organization to achieve its objectives comprehensively, it must consider both individual capacities and infrastructural needs.

Conclusion Leadership is a complex phenomenon that is gradually evolving as organizations develop and technology expands. Growth of organizations and technology has compelled managers to formulate effective leadership styles and strategies that have evolved with time due to development of more leadership and development theories.

Behavioral approach of leadership holds that an organization is a social institution that needs effective management and shaping of organizational behavior. Since behavioral approach of leadership aims at motivating behaviors of employees, it is consistent with theory Y, which postulates that employees are integral resources that organizations should always optimize through motivation.

Motivation entails satisfaction of highest human needs, self-esteem, and self-actualization as classified in the Maslow’s theory of hierarchy of needs. The behavioral approach of leadership and Y theory are relevant to the 21st century managers for these approaches are integral in assessing levels of management, predicting organization behavior, and forecasting performance of organizations.

References McGinnis, S. (2006). Organizational Behavior and Management Thinking. Organization Management Journal, 6(2), 37-57.

McGlone, J. (2005). Major Approaches to the Study of Leadership. Academic Exchange Quarterly, 1-12.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Behavioral Approach of Studying Leadership by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Comparison of Baptist confessions Essay a level english language essay help

Introduction Baptist confessions are documents that proclaim the faith of the Christian believers of the Baptist faith. They use the Bible and have similarities and differences in their translation of the Bible. They live according to their confessions as revealed by the Reformed Reader (1999b).

The different Baptist confessions include: Anabaptist confessions, English Baptist-Separatist confessions, English Baptist Associative confessions, and American Baptist confessions. They were written by different believers at different times.

They are in the form of teachings and instructions for righteous living. Thus, they are not inspired writings but are obtained from the Holy Scripture of the Bible. This paper will compare and contrast the English Baptist-separatist confessions with the American Baptist confessions.

Comparing and contrasting Brief history

In accordance with the Reformed Reader (1999a), the English Baptist-Separatist in the 16th and 17th century stayed out of sight from Elizabeth since they would receive capital punishment if they confessed the faith.

This is because, there were fundamental differences between the English Baptist-Separatist and the state concerning separation of church and state, conscience, baptism and doctrines of the church. Its followers and leaders were imprisoned and others fled. Those who fled managed to write the confessions, united and survived the faith.

On the other hand, the American Baptist confession originated around the 17th century and became established with the Philadelphia Baptist. They managed to spread the teaching in colleges despite the challenges of the changing world. In line with the Reformed Reader (1999b), the heritage declined as result of revolution and failure in the theological institutions among other reasons.

God

There is one and only true God in both confessions in the two confessions as indicated in the Baptist

[supanova_question]

Amazon.com: Vision, Mission and Strategy Research Paper college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Vision statement

Mission statement

Recommended implementation strategy

References

Introduction Amazon was started by Jeff Bezos as “the world’s biggest bookstore” but slowly changed from this single-product model to a multi-product enterprise which deals with a wide array of products satisfying an even broader base of consumers. Rosier (2002) concedes that Amazon.com has established itself as a household brand in the USA and is arguably the best-known online brand.

Since its birth, Amazon.com has moved from solely dealing with books to involving a myriad of other products. Kalakota and Robinson (2001) assert that an organization must continually strive to fulfill customer needs which include; convenience, consistency and reliability.

Amazon’s venturing into different products thus complements the customer’s needs as opposed to sidetracking the original customer by offering them more convenience in that they can get not only books but also other products from the same place.

Despite its diversification strategy, Amazon.com still engages in strong online branding so as to foster loyalty and a feeling of trust among its consumers (Arvidsson, 2006). In its book section, the company encourages people to write reviews on books thus offering a community-like interaction which generates emotional ties.

This move underscores the fact that the company still holds the book section as one of its core entities and care is taken to maintain and increase its consumer base. These qualities and strategies have enabled the company to attain its goals and vision of being the world biggest bookstore and satisfying its client needs.

Vision statement According to Hill and Jones (2009), a vision statement is a phrase that describes a desired outcome. The authors state that a vision statement should inspire, energize and help the reader develop a mental picture of the set target. As such, this is the proposed vision statement for Amazon.com:

Acts as a foundation from which every aspect of our business is developed. It guides our operations by highlighting what is needed to accomplish our goals and objectives of achieving sustainable and quality growth.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More People: provide a favorable working environment where people are inspired to realize their full potential.

Portfolio: bring to the global market a range of online services that foresee and satisfy our client’s needs and desires.

Partners: foster a successful network of clients and suppliers with whom quality and enduring value can be created.

Planet: influence positive change that will facilitate in building and supporting sustainable communities.

Profit: maximize long-term benefits to shareholders, all the while maintaining ethical practices in all our operations.

Productivity: be an effective and proactive organization.

Mission statement Hill and Jones (2009) define a mission statement as a written affirmation that outlines the core purpose of an organization and its focus. The authors state that in most cases, a mission statement remains unchanged over time. With this in mind, a satisfactory mission statement should be:

Our mission is to run the best online bookstore, irrespective of the products and services that we offer. Considering the nature of our business, our ambitions must coincide with the principles that govern the products that exist in our stores. To state that our mission does not depend on the products and services that we offer is to undermine the importance of being an online bookseller.

As online booksellers we aim to be the best in this line of business, no matter the size, nature and affiliations of our competitors. We will be at the forefront when it comes to innovating new and better styles and approaches to bookselling. Our strategy will be in line with the set and evolving aspirations.

Above all, we expect to be a benefit to the communities that we cater for, a useful resource to our clients, and an avenue through which different stakeholders can grow and prosper. Not only will we be a listening and caring partner to our clients and booksellers but also promote the idea that we are always at their service.

Recommended implementation strategy While offering of ” free shipping plans” and express shipping services is expensive and does cut into the profit margin of the company, Amazon.com should continue to offer these services to its clients.

Competition in the online retail market is every increasing and as such, a company needs to give itself a competitive advantage over its competitors. These “super saver shipping” scheme offers one such means since it proposes to offer the consumers value added services thus setting Amazon.com apart from its competitors.

Considering that Amazon’s marketing strategy is pegged on an increase in customer traffic so as to promote repeat purchases and strengthen the brand name, the free shipping plan appeals to customers thereby leading to an increase in the traffic on the site. Pasiuk (2006) confirms that Amazon considered its free shipping offer as a marketing expense whose primary objective is to attract and retain customers.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Amazon.com: Vision, Mission and Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While there is no doubt as to the increase in cost that Amazon.com incurs due to this schemes thus leading to decreased profitability, the increased traffic leads to increased turnover for the company. This leads to increased profits which compensate for the relative cost incurred in the provision of the services.

Membership plans lead to loyalty and a sense of affiliation to the company by the consumers. These plans involve increased customization which entails tailoring of services so as to suit the unique case of the customers (Hill and Jones, 2009).

While this does come at the cost of having to offer customized services which lead to rise in cost structure, it enables Amazon to respond to customer demands very quickly to the advantage of both the customer and the company.

By upholding these strategies, Amazon.com will be able to meet and fulfill its mission and vision statements all the while maintaining a stable competitive advantage against its aggressive and ever-increasing competitors.

References Arvidsson, A. (2006). Brands: Meaning and Value in Media Culture. USA: Routledge, 2006.

Hill, C.,

[supanova_question]

Harley-Davidson Motor Company Marketing Plan Research Paper essay help online free: essay help online free

Background Marketing is an important exercise in both services and goods industry; it ensures that target customers access goods and services a company manufactures. Marketing involves processes that determine the kind of products or/and services of interest to customer then the company knows exactly what to manufacture or trade in.

Other than advising a company on the kind of products to make, marketing goes further and establishes the right method, channels, strategies and systems to get the products/services to target market (Mullins, Walker, 2010).

The American motor cycle industry is one of the fast growing economic sectors where motor cycles are used for various functions like trade, transport, sporting, as security officials automobiles, and sometimes for leisure.

Harley is an international motor cycle manufacturing company based in the United States of America; the company is respected for making reliable heavyweight (over 750 cc) motorcycles and genuine motorcycle accessories.

The automobile industry has been ventured by cheap aftermarket sales that compete with original accessories; the market is favoured by the cost and the room for customizing once motor vehicles offered by the automobile. The challenge by the secondary industry offers a challenge to Harley-Davidson Motor Company; report is a marketing plan that the company can adopt to compete effectively in the market.

Company overview Harley-Davidson Motor Company was founded in 1903 by three childhood friends by the names William Harley, Arthur and Walter Davidson; the initial idea was to make racing bikes with engines however they advanced their idea to have the bikes used for transport.

In 1905, the company had started to be recognized and advertising its products in media in the United States; currently the company has its head quarters at Milwaukee, Wisconsin, United States and headed Keith E. Wendell, the company’s chief executive officer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 2010, the company recorded total sales of US$ 4.46 billion which translated to US$ 259.7 million; of the amount about thirty percent was derived from sale to foreign markets. As at December 2010, the company had 6302 members of staffs distributed in its outlets (Harley Official Website, 2011).

Executive Summary No single statement can explain what is marketing; briefly, it is a link between customers and a company, the feedback from either side is crucial in improving goods and services produced. Harley-Davidson Motor Company is facing an increasing competition from aftermarket accessories, thus the marketing team has found it important to develop a marketing plan to form the base of an aggressive marketing for the products.

The main target market that the plan will focus on are existing customers, which the plan will embrace customer relation management strategies to build, maintain and manage customer loyalty; the second fold will focus on automobile users where the company will aim at convincing buyers to use its genuine parts; this will embrace strategic marketing tools like communication marketing strategies (MARCOM).

The last target market that the company will focus is diversification of its market base, to use this approach; the company will make use of blue ocean marketing strategies. The report will also include the suggested marketing budget for the launch of the strategy.

Target Market The campaign strategy will be divided into three main target groups differentiated by their behaviour as far as use of Harley-Davidson Motor Company spare parts and those from after market sellers.

The first category encompasses customers of Harley-Davidson Motor Company spare parts; they can be seen as people who have loyal to the company and have the characteristic of using genuine products. The main focus on these customers involves enacting measures to maintain current market base and improve the relationship with the customers.

The main activities that will take place focusing on this target market are the following: measure approach; this is an approach where information from customers is collected; the information is on the level of satisfaction that customers are getting from the company.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Harley-Davidson Motor Company Marketing Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The second move will be to manage products and service delivery, what the customers are finding as correctly done should be reinforced and what they find as wanting should be rectified.

With the feedback from the customers, then the company can decide on ways to improve service delivery; by service delivery, the company should be interested on the level of service that aftermarket accessories suppliers are giving then aim at surpassing the level set.

The second target market segment that the company will be looking at is the “undecided customers”, they are people who buy either Harley-Davidson Motor Company genuine spare parts or sometimes buy after market products. The reason for their behaviour should be determined by a market research. It is likely that they buy the available product, thus policies that make genuine parts available should be made.

The third target market that the management should look into is the untapped market; this is market that is less competitive with the aftermarket products. To venture into this, it can be through robust marketing campaigns that sells both bikes and spare parts. The company can decide to open its own market where they sell bikes then later on reinforce the use of genuine spare parts.

Competitors The main competitors that the company will have to deal with are aftermarket sellers; they are people who sell spare parts or body and engine parts that can fit certain models of Harley-Davidson products. There are many reasons why some people prefer to use these products other than using the genuine parts.

One of the post quoted reason why some people prefer after market products is because they are made by specialists thus they are of high quality, other people prefer them because they are less costly than genuine parts. The above two reasons happens to be the strength of competitors; Harley-Davidson company should embrace the challenge and aim at countering the strengths of the companies.

To challenge the competitors, the company should venture in programs that improve the quality of their spare parts, in the case there is a certain modification that can breakeven when made as an accessory, and then the company should adopt such an accessory.

Price has always been an issue when marketing for commodities, there may come sometimes that Harley-Davidson products are expensive than those of the aftermarket, the management has two interventions to make; one ensure than the price of accessories represent value for money.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Harley-Davidson Motor Company Marketing Plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The second intervention that the company should ensure is that it has attained high quality products and efficiency in their products. The best weapon to counter competition rests in understanding customers, providing high quality products, aggressive marketing that educate users on differences, and products differentiation.

Product or Service The subject of the matter in this marketing plan is the sale of genuine motor cycle parts; the accessories involve engine parts, body parts, and other related accessories like bolts and nuts. When creating the products, the company should be aware of the model and the demand that the parts will have in a specific area.

The products aims at offering repair accessories owners of Harley-Davidson products, it aims at winning customer loyalty in the market filled with aftermarket products. Different model of bikes require different repairs parts, thus they need to be made available; one of the main characteristic that the product will be selling to the people is its originality, quality, guarantees, and genuineness.

When developing and improving the products, the sales book will of great use as it will help the company analysis the market, on where is a certain product or certain model of bike; with the clear understanding, and then campaigns will be focused on the particular area that has a certain machine (Vorhies, Morgan

[supanova_question]

The Changes in Regional Tourism Organizations Essay a level english language essay help

Table of Contents The Changes in Regional Tourism Organizations

Latest issues in Tourism

Sustainable Tourism

Tourism and governance

References

The Changes in Regional Tourism Organizations Both developed and developing organizations have a wide range of activities. However, details regarding the development of the tourism sector are not very outspoken especially in the tourism literature. Information on tourism organizations is often centered about organizational roles, structures and roles of tourism organizations.

Nonetheless, very little has been done regarding aspects such as the motivation behind power distribution and institutional structures. In Australia, various levels in government are influenced by tourism operations. Local governments are using tourism to create job opportunities and thus boosting the local economy. The government too, has a lot of interest in tourism.

This is because of the benefits that the sector has to the national political aspect as a whole. Such benefits include regional development, employment growth, multiplier effects and generation of income (Jenkins, 2000, p. 1-2).

The federal partitioning of roles has contributed to difficulties in the coordination of policies. This has affected many areas such as the urban affairs, transport and resource marketing. The tourism sector has not been left out either. Tourism has not been clearly captured in the Australian constitution.

The absence of specific governmental mandate to handle tourism has led to the duplication of the duties of the government, leading to lack of agreement between the States and the Commonwealth. The constitution of Australia does not really recognize the local government.

The local governments exist at the level of States and the local government Acts within the constitution empower them to handle development matters and particularly tourism. This is apart from being able to rate structures and control the health standards, in accordance to the frameworks of the state government. There is lack of clarity, poor coordination in the responsibilities that the local government should play in tourism.

There is some clash between the roles of local authorities and those of the State in tourism. This emanates from the nature of development and marketing in the tourism sector (Jenkins, 2000, p. 178-179). Recently, tourism featured in a Commonwealth policy in the economic development at the regional level.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When the working nation was introduced, two programs were introduced: Regional Development Organizations and Regional Development Strategy. As a ligament of these programs, the department of tourism in Commonwealth funded a tourism development program at the regional level.

Since the inception of the coalition government in 1996, there have been some changes, both economically and developmentally. Since then, the government has continued participating in tourism development programs, at the regional level.

Planning, policy making and development in tourism have been shaped by changes within the western political philosophy. The public sector has been involved in the promotion and marketing of tourism. This has been characterized by making tourism agencies and boards, both corporate and private.

On the other hand, governments have demonstrated their lack of support to the tourism industry in a couple of ways: doing away with all departments and corporations in the tourism sector and by either lowering or terminating their financial support.

What both the private and public operators are aware of is the fact that the marketing and development approaches in the tourism sector cannot be properly handled by the private operators unless there is intervention.

The local state has faced a lot of challenges emanating from the recent economic recession, dynamic global economy and the reduced financial support from the central government (Jenkins, 2000, p. 182-182). As a result, the local state has found it difficult to employ more people, draw investors and industries that can aid in income generation.

Latest issues in Tourism Being able to implement and formulate strategic plans has been challenging in New South Wales especially with regard to the where the tourism industry is inherently diverse both physically and structurally. The case may even be more challenging due to the influx of tourism development in some areas.

We will write a custom Essay on The Changes in Regional Tourism Organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sustainable Tourism Sustainable tourism and ecotourism are some of the terminologies that have not been easy to operationalize. Researchers have not been able to come to a consensus on the exact definition of sustainable tourism (Bottrill and Pearce, 1995). Nevertheless, the increasing curiosity in the area of sustainability has heightened the discussion in the integration of tourism into planning.

One of the key reasons why it has been difficult to attain sustainable tourism both locally and regionally is lack of the national vision on tourism (Page and Thorn, 1997, p. 59). Research has shown that there is need for more study to be done in tourism and also for increased investment in the sector.

New Zealand integrated sustainability into its planning program about ten years ago. It will therefore be appropriate to revisit this and check on the latest developments within this industry and evaluate the possibility of implementing sustainable tourism at the regional and local levels.

Management of tourism at the local level is the duty of both regional and local councils. However, the support from the national level that can enhance this management is not evident enough. This is happening at a time when there is an increased overflow of tourist in New Zealand and an awareness of the possibility of degradation of New Zealand’s environment.

At a period when the conservation of New Zealand’s environment is critical, it is ironical that the department in charge of conservation was invited a few months after initiation of the task. There are rising concerns from lack of communication especially between the tourism marketing department and tourism management. These concerns ought to be dealt with urgently.

Scholars have made comments of the effects of tourism growth and the possibility of severe environmental effects within diverse areas (PCE, 1997). Study also reveals that local authorities understand their duties with respect to tourism at the local level. There have been conflicts with respect to both other users and urban growth. These conflicts have attracted a lot of concerns from several councils.

Research reveals that those districts in which tourism activities were environmentally – based are the ones that identified tourism similar (Page and Thorn, 2002, p. 233; Dymond, 1997). Districts that did not encounter any tourism – based impact were either those that were rural based or those that were basically provincial regions within the urban setting.

New Zealand is marketed by the government, mainly through National Tourism Organization. This makes the country to continue receiving more tourists. On the other hand, after the arrival of the visitors, it is the local council that assesses their needs (Page and Thorn, 2002, p. 233).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Changes in Regional Tourism Organizations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tourism and governance For a long time, scholars have been interested in the role played by the government in tourism. However, recently, the shift tends towards the relationship between tourism and governance rather than the government (Beaumont and Dredge, 2010; Greenwood, 1993; Hall, 1999). “Government is the act of governing” (Hall, 2011, p. 439).

It has become very significant as researchers attempt to find out what the state can do in addressing political, economic, social and environmental aspects of tourism. Focus on the role of governance in tourism – related matters is a reflection of the increasing development and growth in the field of policy sciences.

There is increasing study with regard to the role played by supranational organizations within the governance of tourism. Examples of such organizations include the International Monetary Fund, The World Bank and the United Nations Environmental Programme, among others (Hall, 2011, p. 439).

It is important to understand the institutional structures in governance. This sheds light on how the state participates in the tourism policy thus pointing towards the parameters that can be utilized in attaining policy goals.

Most discussions with regard to the policy tools in tourism center mainly around the effects instead of the governance that led to the selection of such tools. There is limited information with respect to the association between diverse tourism policy processes and why specific instruments are selected.

Typologies are important in that they help in placing the policies into categories such that there is a clear understanding in the connection between the substance and the process. There is an influential paper by Lowi that shows the interrelationship between policies and politics. Different frames of governance can be understood using a number of elements.

These are: over arching concept, the matrix, and column and row variables. Besides, some frameworks can be utilized for concept formation in political science. These include semantic field, data containers and the hierarchical structure in concepts (Hall, 2011, p. 440 – 450).

References Beaumont, N.,

[supanova_question]

Digital and Physical Channels in Marketing Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Reference List

Abstract This paper entails an evaluation of how businesses incorporate digital and physical channels in their marketing processes. As a result of the high rate of technological innovation, firms within the retail sector are increasingly incorporating emerging technologies such as the internet in addition to physical channels in their marketing processes.

Growth in marketing practices has presented the customers with a wide range of channels to select from. As a result, consumers can move from one channel to another with minimal effort depending on their preferences. However, it is not all market segments which can incorporate digital channels.

This arises from the fact that some products are not digital. Additionally, physical channels are vital in that they enable the creation of a strong relationship with the customers. Physical channels also give the customer a unique customer experience.

Introduction Marketing has undergone significant transformation during the 21st century. One of the areas where this transformation has been experienced relates to marketing channels. Business firms have shifted from single-channel structure to multiple marketing channels.

One of the factors that have contributed to these changes relates to the high rate of technological innovation especially the growth in Information Communication Technology. In an effort to attain competitive advantage, businesses are integrating the internet in their marketing practices. The consumers have also embraced technology in their buying process.

Discussion By integrating digital and physical methods of accessing the market, there is a high probability of firms attaining a high competitive advantage relative to their competitors. For example, through digital marketing, businesses are able to access a large market. This arises from the fact that the firms become dimensionless with regard to geographical location and time (Huang

[supanova_question]

Balanced Scorecard (non financial performance measure) Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

When evaluating the value and performance of a business entity, stakeholders are more concerned on the monetary value that their management team has been able to attain. When using this notion, there is tendency that non-financial benefits or performance of a firm may be ignored.

The use financial data have limitations as a measure of company performance; they only focus on one area of the many aspects that needs to be considered. According to balanced scorecard (BSC) management theory, the performance of a company should involve more than the financial part of it, it should address both financial and non financial parameters (Armstrong, 2006).

The hospitality industry is one of the world’s most competitive industries, firms operating in the industry need to focus on their financial gain as well as their non financial part of performance. Stakeholders when deciding whether a certain manager in the industry is performing effectively, they need to have a balance scorecard policy in their systems.

With over 1500 outlets across 38 states, chic-fil-A Inc. is the United States’ second largest chicken-based restaurant chain with an estimated value of $1billion, to evaluate its performance, management have implemented a balance scorecard policy.

This paper discusses how balance scorecard has been adopted in the company; it will evaluate the management strategy approach and offer recommendations on how they would improve it further.

Brief information about the company The company’s success is built around the Chick-fil-A sandwich invented in the 1960s by the establishment’s founder Truett Cathy. It’s a private company based in Atlanta, incorporated in 1964 and currently employing over 57,000 people.

The 2009 sales revenue amounted to $ 3.2b representing an 8.6% rise over the previous year’s, with a 2.54% rise in same store sales. Chick-fil-A Inc. dates back to 1946, when two brothers Truett and Ben Cathy, opened a small restaurant called Dwarf House in Hapeville, southern Atlanta, at the cost of $10600.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1982, other restaurants begun branding and selling their own chicken sandwiches which took away a huge chunk of the company’s clientele, and in an effort to win back the customers, Chick-fil-A put out coupons in newspapers which drew more responses than had been anticipated leading into massive losses for the company, coupled with the delays in the construction industry, a crisis that led into the development of the company’s corporate purpose.

It recognized the importance of the Christian roots and faith to the organization which while not seeking to impose their faith on the team members and the clients but to influence them through their exemplary lifestyles, services and products.

According to its mission statement, Chick-fil-A endeavors to become ‘The Best’ among America’s fast foods restaurants. while their corporate purpose is “to glorify God by being faithful stewards of whatever is entrusted to them, and to positively influence all people that come in conduct with Chick-fil-A” (Chick-fil-A, 2011).

The company aims to “Become America’s Best Quick service Restaurant” (Chick-fil-A, 2011). It operates in the following operating guidelines and core values;

Product differentiation

Customer satisfaction

Integrity

Professionalism and innovation

Creativity and Corporate social responsibility (Chick-fil-A, 2011).

The purpose of balance scorecard/non financial measures in the company In general a balance scorecard aims at addressing four main pillars of a business; financial, internal businesses operations, learning and growth, and the customer; the main effect that the strategy aims at is to ensure all the four areas have been addressed when determining the performances and the efficiency of management.

When the areas are effectively addressed, managers are able to make strategic decisions that focus their organizations to a path of success.

When the system is used, it focuses on looking at the level at which customers are satisfied with the services and goods they are getting from a certain company; it is important to note that a customer is the most valuable thing in a business, it is through customers that businesses exist and prosper. In any firm, buyers are the end users of the products and services delivered by the company.

We will write a custom Essay on Balanced Scorecard (non financial performance measure) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Many a times, stakeholders that form up the distribution channels such as wholesalers and retailers are also categorized as buyers. Therefore, their influence to the firm can be an opportunity as well as a threat as evident from their demand for better services and price changes (Collis and Rukstad, 2008).

The next important area that balanced score card should look into are the internal business processes that a business have enacted; when looking at this area, focus is on ensuring that policies set give the firm a competitive edge.

When referring to internal structure management should ensure that the structure grows and nature’s development and product growth; the human resources and physical assets combinations should be the main factor that needs to be looked into. The advantage of using this focus is that is assists in gauging a company’s ability to organize and strategize for success.

Learning and growth is another area that non-financial measurement strategies looks into; under this title, the main focus is on the ability that the company has to change and adopt new operating systems and policies.

To have an effective change policy, the management should ensure that its human resources are well managed that they can make decisions, innovate and invent methods that facilitate the growth of business (Fred, 2008)

Current performance measures as adopted at Chick-fil-A’ The company measures it performance using the efficiency level that different management segments have been able to attain; in the case that a certain segment is not meeting the expectations of the company, then the area becomes subject to reviews and improvement. The company’s measures can be classified under the following main areas;

Quality assurance measures

To ensure that there is quality in produced products the company has an effective supply chain management; the management starts quality measure of products from the supplier’s point of view. Different suppliers offer different quality of goods; the available information about the value of goods from a certain customer are interpolated.

One of the major aims of Chick-fil-A supply chain management is to ensure that that goods used in manufacture are of the right quality and quantity; this goes ahead as it is reflected in the final products of the company.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Balanced Scorecard (non financial performance measure) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It has an integrated purchase system, where it aims at interpolating the demands for good that it has for a certain period of time; it is not always that a supply is constant throughout the year however it varies with time and season.

After understanding the amount required at a particular time Gantt charts are used to interpolate data and form the background of the case. Computers are used to give data analysis of the trend in supplies required (Wheelen, Hunger, 1998).

Chick-fil-A adopts a TQM management policy. This is a system where a company ensures that it vets all its processes and department for the betterment of the entire organization. It aims at ensuring that all stake holders in an organization benefit from the organization. The organizational culture adopted to ensure that an organization can adopt changes effectively.

Organizational structure should be made in such a way that all departments can integrate efficiently and enhance supervision. When departments communicate effectively, they create a level of efficiency in the entire organization.

An organization requires both human and physical resources for its operations. Management should ensure that these resources have been blend in the most productive manner. This will ensure that there is maximum resource utilization.

Industry (Product) Life Cycles

Firms in the fast food industry are always identifying ways that will help them to increase their competitive edge in the market as well as maximization their revenue generating potential. This means that a lot of resources are channeled into research and development, developing new products and other actions that are projected to increase the level of the work force.

Many firms in the industry start by introducing a new product campaign to the market to create a market niche for other successful products. Examples include chicken bucket from Kentucky Fried Chicken and Eat Mor Chikin from Chick-fill-A. As time goes, the product life cycle reduces and new products are introduced into the market.

Strategies used by firms to achieve such objectives include market differentiation and segmentation of the market. In summary, a new product in the industry will go through the introductory stage, then the growth stage, followed by the maturity stage and lastly the decline stage (Gurvis, 2007).

Strategic success factors

The US fast food industry is highly volatile in terms of competition and the management leadership of many firms is very careful in their choice of strategic management tools. Every decision made and action taken should be able to bring value to the firm.

Therefore, the management formulates and implements plan of actions that are aimed at enabling the organization to achieve the desired results. The strategic success factors include but are not limited to;

Changing the competitive position

Investing in the latest technological tools

New product development

Diversification and

Corporate growth strategy

Christian culture

Moral ethics and values

When the above parameters are measured, they are compared by the industries/companies expectations to gauge the company’s success (Porter, 2008)

Internal strength growth

Chick-fill-A Inc. has been able to distinguish itself from other fast food restaurants by developing unique and identifiable characteristics. Notable of them is its Closed-on-Sunday Policy tradition that reflects the company’s corporate purpose.

This is aimed at appreciating the spiritual way of life of its people and as well gives its employees’ quality time to rest and enjoy with family. It has enabled the company to attract high class clientele and honorable employees (Wheelen and Hunger, 1998).

Efficiency levels at the organization are high as compared to other fast food outlets. The company’s mission and vision statement is people centered thereby providing a solid ground to expand business operations. Technological innovations have seen the company automate many of its operations to increase service delivery.

Quality assurance is among the company’s objectives of becoming the leading fast food company in the delivery of products and services. Employees are highly trained to ensure that they maintain high levels of integrity in the delivery of services. Customer responsiveness is another key factor in ensuring that quality services and products are delivered.

The company is always developing new products to their existing portfolio of diversified food items. Personalized services are a new type of service delivery in the industry and the company has not been left behind because it ensures that it meets the customer’s demands. Additional services in the package include home delivery of products to the customer’s premises on order.

This has enabled Chick-fill-A to capture the high-class clientele and in the process the customer base has been improved. The drive through experience enables customers to be served at the comfort of their vehicles (Jack, 2001).

Level at which the adopted measures meets the level of Kaplan and Norton Balanced score card Although the company seems to have adopted a different route to gauge its rate of performance, to some extent it complies to Kaplan and Norton Balanced score card, the main area that the two systems seems to be different is that Kaplan and Norton Balanced score card has focus on how an organizations prepares for a change and adoption of new measures, innovation and inventions.

Chick-fill-A strategy seems to have more focus on improving their deliveries and forget on the need to consider the drivers of the performance; employees (Thomas, 2010). (please see the appendix for a sample format of Kaplan and Norton Balanced scorecard)

The strengths of the performance measure approach adopted by Chick-fill-A The main strength of the approach as adopted by Chick-fill-A is that the quality of products mades form part of the measures of management success; when the quality of products are used, then the management can know the areas to improve in the efforts of satisfying their customers (Niven, 2006).

The next strength of the method is the much focus that it places on its customers; the company when evaluating the level of performance seeks to get responses from customers on their level of satisfaction; when this happens, managerscan know the areas to intervene to improve customer satisfaction and probably build customer loyalty (Hall, Jones and Raffo, 2002).

Areas to impove/recommendations When evaluating the level of performance, the management should ensure that it looks into personnel issues; they should ensure that they evaluate the level at which their company can adopt to change and how prepared its human resources are.

To look into the above parameters, the management should evaluate the number of staffs’ trainings, mentoring, and coaching that it has been able to offer over a certain period of time and the effects that they have impacted on the company (Kaplan and Norton, 2001).

Chick-fill-A leadership team should be sensitive to organisational culture/behavior and ensure that when they are measuring the company’s performance, such parameters be included. Personel matters in performance measurements are qualitative in nature but when interpolated they lead to quality decisions that are reflected in a company’s financail management.

In the frameworks of lerning and growth within an organisation, Chick-fill-A should measure the rate at which its company has embraced divesity and culture intelligence parameters; divesity and culture intelligence parameters are new management startegies that seek to prepaire a company on changes brought about by globalization (Mohan, 2004).

References Armstrong. M. ,2006. A handbook of Human Resource Management Practice. London: Kogan Page.

Chick-fil-A Company Website, 2011. Home Page. Available at

Collis, D.J and Rukstad, M.G.,2008. Can you say what your strategy is? Harvard Business Review, 86(4), pp. 82-90.

Fred, D. ,2008. Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases. New Jersey: Pearson Education.

Gurvis, S. ,2007. Management Basics: A Practical Guide for Managers. London: Adams Media.

Hall, D., Jones R., and Raffo. C. ,2002. Business Studies (Second Edition). Ormskirk: Causeway Press Limited

Jack, E., 2001. Management Communication: the threat of group think: Corporate communications. International Journal, 2(3), p. 183-192.

Kaplan, S. Norton, D.,2001. The strategy-focused organization: how balanced scorecard companies thrive in the new business environment. Harvard: Harvard Business Press.

Mohan, N., 20004. Essentials of balanced scorecard. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Niven, J., 2006. Balanced scorecard step-by-step: maximizing performance and maintaining results. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Porter, M.E. ,2008 The Five Competitive Forces That Shape Strategy, Harvard business Review, January 2008.

Thomas, G.,2010. Managing Brand Performance: Alligning Positioning and Experience. Journal of Marketing management, 1(1), p. 68.

Wheelen, L. and Hunger, J.,1998. Strategic Management and Business Policy: Entering 21st Century Global Society, 5th edition. Reading, Massachusetts and Harlow: Addison Wesley

[supanova_question]

Art history Montreal city: Palais des Congres de Montreal Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Experience

Conclusion

References

Footnotes

Introduction It is one of the new architectural symbols in Montreal that have gained a worldwide-prolonged applause. Major travel guides the likes of Lonely Planet, Ullysse and Hachette have chosen the building’s multicolored glass as well as the pink-lipstick forest as covers for their recent issues.

Other tourism articles have recommended visiting the building for a personal experience of the major architectural wonders existing in the Montreal city. I can attest to the fact that the visit is actually worthwhile.

The Palais des congres de Montreal is an exhibition centre holding exhibition each year1, situated in Quartier international de Montreal towards the Northern end of Old Montreal in the district of Ville-Marie in Montreal. It seems the building was named after its principle owner whose name is Palais de congres de Montreal2.

It uses the design of the small number of stone buildings by using limestone that is laid in bands like them. The translucent glass allows the internal to absorb light inconspicuously. Its address is 159; rue Saint-Antoine Quest, 9th floor, Montreal (Quebec), QC H2Z 1H2. Its neighboring buildings are the Place Jean-Paul Riopelle, Victoria square and Place de la Cite international buildings.

The original work was done by a ‘neo-brutalist’ in the name of Victor Prus who built the Palais in 19803 and was inaugurated in May 19834. It underwent an expansion between 1999 and 2002 through which its capacity in doubled to 93,000 square meters.

The new architecture repaired the urban outlook to provide a ground level public for commercial purposes as well as a pedestrian and transportation link. However, the expansion used a similar design as its original 1980’s except that it has less concrete and more glasses.

The new design, to a great extent, integrated well with its surroundings. From its current location, Montreal-Pierre Elliott Trudeau International airport is just 20 kilometers away.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The building occupies an area of 200,000 square ft and it has 65 conference rooms as well as 18 loading docks, (fig. 1). The vertical panels are 1.5 meter by 3.6 meter. The expansion of the building was designed by a combination of architects i.e. Tetreault, Dubuc, Saiat and Hal Ingberg architects, whose design won the local design competition conducted for the same purpose.

Hal Ingberg has earned himself an enviable reputation as among Canadian’s best architects for designing buildings. His unique knowledge on the potential abilities of glass to bring out unimaginable examination of space, the tinge brought by multiple colors, transparency and reflection has been greatly lauded.

The modification resulted into Canada’s most remarkable work of art with very promising architectural statements. The total area of expansion is 110,000 square meters while the total area restoration is 100,000 square meters. The leading design architect was Mario Saia and the main project architect was Michael Languedoc.

The work was performed by a project group of about 20 project members. The structural engineer was Dessau-Soprin while the mechanical engineer was Pageu Morel et associes, Genivar. The landscape architect was Claude Cormier Architects Paysagistes and the contracting group was Gespro, BFC, Divco.

Experience The Palais unique design is characterized by a rainbow of colored glass panels in the exterior and transparent glass panels in the interior that fills it with an atmosphere that is both luminous and energizing. Its multifunctional design enables it to host large-scale conventions and stage exhibitions simultaneously and that makes it the most popular amongst event holders.

As opposed to other like buildings in North America, the Palais welcomes you with a warm and friendly atmosphere, which represents the city,’s Latin flavor as well as the nature of the inhabitants of the city themselves. It makes you feel that you are at the right place, where you should be.

When the sunrays strike the multicolored outer lay, it reflects a kaleidoscope of colors (fig. 2) which results into a memorable moment of an intense feeling. The space coloration is changed in a continuous pattern as the sun’s angle changes all day through creating a harmonious rhythm of mixture of colors and feelings. Looking through the chartreuse, pink and blue lenses, it instantly creates a lasting impression in your mind.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Art history Montreal city: Palais des Congres de Montreal specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When viewed from the outside, the wall looks carnivalesque resulting from the reflection of the brightly colored curtains but from the inside, the sunrays coming though the multicolored wall takes your breath away. The dramatic size and position of the wall causes the interior spaces; walls, staircases, floors as well as escalators to continuously swaddle in vibrant hues of red, green, yellow and blue.

The Palais design connection of the exterior and interior spaces with glass brings out a unique twist in it, not commonly found in modern architecture. The skins colorful membrane diminishes any sense of opacity by its failure to create a condition of continuity between each sphere and as a result produces parallel spatial worlds.

As you enter, what meets your eye is an L shaped design, which has been formed by the meeting of the pedestrian shopping centre and the Hall Bleury. This further has three divisions of conceptual rings, which forms the main structure and the central organization of the interiors.

The outer layer of the ring are used for commercial activity, while the resulting inward curves are used as loading docks, bus stations, trump ramps and other services.

Between the rings, there are two pedestrian passageways, which connects the Old city to the now modern Montreal, link that had previously been separated by the expressway. Inside is a beehive of activities with since it is occupied by many individuals some as staff and others as hotel visitors. Yet in all that, it does not show any signs of chaos and disorganization.

The side along the Rue de Bluery grabs your attention from the fineness of the glass walls. In this side, it is just a storey shorter in height than the other like buildings in the neighboring.

The doorways are covered with cantilevered translucent canopies of glass, (fig. 3). The insides of the glass walls are illuminated making them glow at night, (fig. 4). The Hall Bleury contains various conference rooms and exhibition halls and hosts major public forums.

The rue Viger escalator slowly hovers along the edge of the sidewalk, a passageway for the pedestrian. Above the passageway, there is a curtain wall that is horizontally marked by mullions emerging seamlessly from the existing building’s nose. Where the old and the new buildings meet, is a powerful urban maker which affords a beautiful view from rue Saint-Catherine.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Art history Montreal city: Palais des Congres de Montreal by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The elevation in rue Saint-Antoine is a transparent base of busy commercial space which supports an opaque middle of rafter slabs which are multi-tone grey. By using this kind of stone, it helps identify the new Montreal with the ancient one since this is where it was found in large quantity5.

While the elongated dimensions, textures and the deeper detailing gives it its look of contemporary construction. the corner at Saint-Antoine contains a translucent glass box illumination and encompasses the full round space of the conference rooms. This corner hangs over the angled wall that is the commercial space below.

On the interior, the yellow color is absorbed by the by the excessively shiny dark flooring. One gets a clear outlook of space along Viger Street at the upper level. A shiny finishing is evident supported by a framework made of steel. Escalators move up and down along this path, (fig. 5). The inside west façade portrays a clear yellow shiny area which gives it a serene feeling.

The winter garden in the building, occupying a service area of 700 square meters (0.2 acres), is nothing short of genius art by the Canadian Society of Landscape architects. It has a forest of concrete trees which are painted lipstick pink which was done to complement the city’s booming cosmetic industry and portray the city’s inexhaustible creativity and innovation.

It adopts the pattern of the hundred-year old maples lining the city’s avenues6, (fig. 6) and it is perfectly designed in such a manner that it will remain unaffected by future environmental changes. The well-carved trunks of tree hang between the concrete slabs of the ground floor and the ceiling. This is a symbol of real nature in the modern world.

The combination of the typically 1970’s architectural original work and the recent 2000-2002 expansion work of the building, the Palais is an acknowledgment of architectural cohesion, with a combination of the colorful luminescent glass and the permanence of stone. It integrates with brilliant success three centuries of historical design bringing in traces of the old city7.

Conclusion The Palais offers an exceptional venue for conventions. It is an authentic center where the city’s major attractions meet. It brings together the city’s business centre, arts and entertainment district, international district, Old Montreal as well as Chinatown. It provides a naturally lit environment that magically integrates form and functionality especially for event organizers.

This is coupled with the fact that its showrooms are of huge size to accommodate large number of people. With this, it is able to generate major economic spin-offs for the growth of Quebec and has fruitfully contributed to sharing of knowledge through the conferences not to mention enhancing the city’s international image as a first class destination.

Since it stated operating in 2003, the new building has been witnessing large number of visitors while enjoying enthusiastic comments from the architectural international community as well as the general public8.

The reason the design has been so successful is because it focused on one objective and it worked towards achieving it, which it did. It sends a message to all Montreal’s and international community alike that the city is dedicated to provide a center for exchange of knowledge and skills and ideas for developing international agreements and partnerships.

By September 2005, the project for the expansion of the building had received 22 awards from thirteen different spheres such as the 2005 PMI Project of the Year in Philadelphia. The success of the project played an important part in the making of the decision by the World Anti-Doping Agency as well as International Design Alliance to move their offices to Montreal.

The IATA and ICAO among other major international organizations also have their offices in this great city. Various major events are held in the convention centre such as the Montreal International Show that attracts around 200,000 people annually. It also hosted the United Nations Climate Change Conference in 2005 and in 2009, it hosted the 67th World Science Fiction Convention9.

The building was awarded BOMA Best environmental certificate10 for being the best in preserving the environment through its artificial pink-lipstick forest and choosing to ‘go green’. Inside the building, the staff is very attentive and offers personalized planning services with a very well developed technology and ecoresponsible options that makes people want to have their events there.

Despite its age, the Palais has continued to be the most magnificent architectural building of its kind. I have always seen it from outside without touring most of its interiors. After a thorough journey throughout the building, I have realized that its beautiful and colorful exteriors, do not even begin to describe the building.

A careful analysis of the interiors tells you all you want to know about architectural creativity and art. With the new improvements, it is almost like a dream that something so exquisite could exist in the physical world. The artificial pink-lipstick forest is a sight to behold. Everyone should make a point of making a stop at one of the city’s largest buildings.

References Ambassador’s Club. The Palais des Congres de Montreal: Architecture, 27th July 2011

Artifice. Inc. Unconventionally Colorful, Architecture Week, Design Department, April 2007

Architectural Glazing Project Profile, December 2003, Publication No. 24599944.

Boake, Terri Meyer. Image Gallery: Palais des Congres de Montreal, Quebec, February 2007

Carrier, S. Jean. Palais des Congres de Montreal: Nearby Images in Montreal, February, 2009

Cormier, Claude. Lipstick Forest: Winter Garden at the Palais des Congres de Montreal, Landscape Architecture and Urban Design, July 2011

Demelt, Annie. Aliens Have Invaded Montreal for the 67th Annual World Fiction Convention, August 2009, CTV.ca

Dona, Montreal: The Top 8 Reasons to Go – From Hippy Fest to Foodies, TravelsWithHeart, August 2011.

Flickr®. Palais des Congres de Montreal, October 2010

Ingberg. Hal, Expansion of the Palais des Congres de Montreal, Competition Laureate, 1999

Vanceva®. Laminated Glass Takes Centre Stage; At Palais Des Congres in Montreal,

Footnotes 1 Carrier, S. Jean, Palais des Congres de Montreal: Nearby Images in Montreal, February, 2009

2Boake, Terri Meyer, Image Gallery: Palais des Congres de Montreal, Quebec, February 2007

3 Artifice. Inc, Unconventionally Colorful, Architecture Week, Design Department, April 2007, Para. 3

4 Flickr®, Palais des Congres de Montreal, October 2010

5 Ingberg, Hal, Expansion of the Palais des Congres de Montreal, Competition Laureate, 1999

6 Cormier, Claude, Lipstick Forest: Winter Garden at the Palais des Congres de Montreal, Landscape Architecture and Urban Design, July 2011

7 Ambassador’s Club, The Palais des Congres de Montreal: Architecture, 27th July 2011

8 Vanceva®, Laminated Glass Takes Centre Stage; At Palais Des Congres in Montreal, Architectural Glazing Project Profile, Para. 7, December 2003, Publication No. 24599944.

9 Demelt, Annie, Aliens Have Invaded Montreal for the 67th Annual World Fiction Convention, August 2009, CTV.ca

10 Dona, Montreal: The Top 8 Reasons to Go – From Hippy Fest to Foodies, TravelsWithHeart, August 2011

[supanova_question]

Dissertation and Management Knowledge Report (Assessment) essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Qualities of a Good Dissertation

Differentiating the Different Types of Knowledge

Incorporating the Types of Knowledge

Reference List

Introduction A dissertation is an important piece of writing in the academic life of a scholar which demonstrates the ability to carry out individual and independent research on a certain topic. Apart from being an importance part of academic development of a learner, it is also very important in career development.

A successful completion of a dissertation gives a good evaluation of various competencies in an individual. Since it is not an easy task, an employee who is involved in writing a dissertation develops specialized skills and knowledge which is considered valuable by employers.

Qualities of a Good Dissertation A good dissertation takes into account a number of issues and exhibits good balance of various aspects . Complete research for a dissertation relies on materials from different sources among them class materials on a particular subject, practical knowledge gained from first- hand experience in a certain field, knowledge gained from literature review and knowledge gained from researched and analyzed data.

All these sources of information are different since every single source presents different information that should be handled individually. However, a good dissertation incorporates all these sources of information to strike a balance.

Differentiating the Different Types of Knowledge The knowledge acquired from management modules is important since it will broaden my scope of knowledge. By reading these modules I will get information on how other people attempted or attempt to do various things. Consequently, I can use this information to do what these people have done. I cancan also employ the experience of others after reading to secure success and avoid failure.

However, I will not learn everything from the management modules. There are certain skills that are learnt from practice. These skills are gained by having practical experience in the world of work. For example, having been a sales supervisor for a reasonable duration of time, I have learnt certain skills of dealing with the people I supervise. These skills cannot be developed by reading them in the management modules (White, 2002).

There is also knowledge gained from literature review. This is knowledge gained by reading, making analysis, evaluating and then summarizing information that has been researched and written on a particular subject. This knowledge is different from knowledge gained through reading modules since when reading modules no analysis is done (White, 2002).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Reading modules involves reading all the content while literature review eventually comes up with a summary of the most relevant data concerning a certain topic. Literature review is also different from knowledge gained from experience.

Knowledge from literature review is basically information that has been researched and presented by other people while a person who has knowledge from experience has a real picture of the situations because of experiencing them first hand.

Finally, new knowledge collected from the field and analyzed is different from all these other sources of knowledge. The difference is evident in that this source of knowledge presents the latest information collected first hand. Some of the knowledge from modules and literature review may be outdated but research presents the most recent data which is updated.

Incorporating the Types of Knowledge In my dissertation, I will incorporate all these sources of knowledge since they are all important and none of them can be underestimated. Before I go out to collect any data, I will first read the management modules to get a wide scope of knowledge on management.

Using this broad knowledge from class modules, I will conduct a comprehensive literature review because I have enough knowledge from the modules to analyze, evaluate and summarize information. As I undertake these procedures, the knowledge I have acquired from my work experience will be very crucial in guiding me.

I will relate real life situations from my work experience with the content I learn from books. Collecting my research data will also require broad knowledge on the topic acquired through reading modules and literature review. I will employ my knowledge gained from work experience to analyze the new information and make conclusions from an informed point of view.

Reference List Uwic. (2005). Dissertation Writing. Web.

We will write a custom Assessment on Dissertation and Management Knowledge specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More White, B. (2002). Dissertation Skills for Business and Management Students. London: Cengage Learning.

White, B. (2002). Writing Your MBA Dissertation. London: Cengage Learning.

[supanova_question]

Michael A. Smyth VS Pillsbury Company Coursework college essay help near me

Table of Contents Central legal Issue

The Pertinent facts

Issues and facts of the case

Decisions

HRM Implications

Response by the manager

Answers to case study questions

Reference List

Central legal Issue This particular case analysis looks into a case study involving the Michael A. Smyth VS Pillsbury Company. In this case, the court had sought to determine if the Pillsbury Company had violated the privacy of one of the employees (Michael A. Smith) after intercepting an email communication.

The central legal issue raised in the case was whether the Pillsbury Company had violated the public policy by intercepting an email of one of employee’s and terminating the employment contract.

The Pertinent facts After the installation of the electronic mail system to enhance communication with the company, the company promised that the communications made would be confidential (Weiner, 2009). The company also made it clear that it would not intercept the emails and in any case they would not be used by the company for the as a foundation for termination of the employment contract.

Contrary, to these assurances, the company went ahead and violated all by intercepting the emails, and using them as a ground for the termination of Smyth. However, the comments that were communicated to the supervisor according to the company were unprofessional and inappropriate.

According to the plaintiff, the termination was against the public policy that bars an employer from terminating the employee after it has violated “the employees’ right to privacy as embodied in the Pennsylvania common law” (Weiner, 2009, p. 717).

Issues and facts of the case The major issues were that the Pillsbury had violated the public policy by intruding the privacy of one of its employees through interception of a mail. The other issue was that the company had failed to keep the promise of ensuring privacy, confidentiality, and the termination of employees based on the intercepted emails. The facts of the case were that it had promised not to ensure privacy and confidentiality and it failed.

However, there was a loophole by stating that intercepted mails would not be used for termination purpose. This was important and advantageous to the company for it gave them the chance to intercept communications made in the workplace.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The claim by the Michael that privacy had been broken when the communication system belonged to Pillsbury was not important, because, the tort was only concerned with physical intrusion to property of an employee and privacy or private information was retrieved. However, in the case the intrusion by the company was appropriate because it enhanced the interception of unprofessional and inappropriate message.

The claims made by the plaintiff were not important as the offensive act of the company was not applicable based on the tort. The arguments made by the court were that plaintiff failed to produce the claims on which relief would be given. This was supported by the fact that the entire company used the same disqualifying any privacy expectation on reasonable basis.

When the email reached a second party, privacy was insignificant because the information had been disclosed voluntarily. Lastly, if reasonability was to be applied, then a reasonable person would not claim privacy violation if indeed the communication was authentic.

Decisions The court ruled in favour of the defendant the Pillsbury Company. The ruling was that public policy was not violated as the actions of the defendant did not invade the privacy of the plaintiff in regard to the tort. Based on court of Appeal decision in Borse v. Piece Goods Shop, Inc. the court was able to make its verdict by dismissing the case. Based on the tort law, intrusion involves physical or otherwise to matter of privacy.

The court stated that unlike in the other case, the plaintiff did not state claim that would guarantee a relief. It also stated that the email communication was used and open to all employees. Therefore, communicating on open system lost any expectations of privacy reasonability.

Lastly the communications were unprofessional and court found not privacy in this as the interests of the company on preventing illegality, inappropriate, and unprofessional communication were more than privacy of employee.

HRM Implications In the future the HRM would be obligated by the duty of ensuring that such incidences of lawsuits do not prevail. This can be ensured by creating guidelines and disbursing them to all the employees in the Pillsbury Company. This would ensure that the rules are well followed and future lawsuits minimized.

We will write a custom Coursework on Michael A. Smyth VS Pillsbury Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Response by the manager The manager should ensure that proper guidelines are put into place to ensure that future lawsuits are discouraged. This can be achieved by ensuring work conduct and ethical rules are well designed and explained. He/she can have the company lawyer draft the rules and make appropriate changes were possible in accordance to the torts provisions.

Answers to case study questions I agree with the rulings of the court that even if reasonable expectation of privacy was availed in the Smyth’s actions it would be right as the interception would not be offensive. This is because although the communications were made to be confidential and privacy guaranteed, the employee was not obligated to circulate mails that were against the ethical conduct in the workplace.

Also, as per the tort no premise (property) was intruded into, no personal effects were searched as the system belonged to Pillsbury Company, and communication to supervisor who is a part of management is not private. Thus intercepting the communication no privacy is intruded and public policy remains not violated. The employer’s reasons were to the best interest of the company thus no sympathy on its action.

The actions were for maintaining harmony in the work place so the reasons are feasible. It is not evident whether the promises were in writing or a verbal agreement on assurance of privacy and confidentiality.

If they were in writing then, the conclusion is vague as agreement in workplace has to be honored. However, if the agreement was verbally made, the conclusion is feasible as promises are bound to be broken if no legit proof to it.

Reference List Weiner J. (2009). The Employee’s Right to Privacy and Management of Personal Information: Michael A. Smyth VS Pillsbury Company. Boston, McGraw-Hill Irwin Publishers

[supanova_question]

Ethical Issues; Parole and Probation Program Evaluation Research Paper college admissions essay help

Introduction In every study, ethical issues are of great importance as they act as a guide in every research process. Every study is expected to adhere to the research ethics in every step of the evaluation. Therefore, before entering into the first stage in programs evaluation, it is always advisable to make the necessary ethical considerations. This will be of great importance in enhancing research integrity.

In other words, it is always advisable to integrate the rights and the respect for the individuals involved in the research while designing any study or research. It is also important to ensure that vulnerable participants for instance in the cases where the participants are children or from any other vulnerable group are taken care of.

In this case, the main participants will be crime victims who are either under probation or who have been released under parole. In this case, ethical issues become a critical issue. There are a number of associations which provides the framework under which such a program evaluation should be conducted.

These associations play a pivotal role in guiding the researchers in research operations. This includes methods of data collection and analysis, and reporting on program evaluation

Discussion. Key ethical issues in program evaluation Privacy or confidentiality

Confidentiality is one of important ethical issues involved in the current program evaluation. The participants should be guaranteed the privacy for the information given. In the current program, the participants may be required to give their names for instance when some information need to be clarified from the records. In every research, it is important to keep the confidentiality of the data retrieved.

The interviewer is supposed to observe the privacy of the people who provides the materials during the interview (Iltis 2006: 87). In order to maximize the privacy of the respondents in this study, the names of the respondents should not be written on the questionnaires.

However, the respondents will be free to give their names out of their own will. Similarly, quotations will only be included at the consent of the respondents. In order to ensure that the information given is not accessed by wrong individuals who may abuse it, it would be advisable to destroy all the questionnaires after entering the information retrieved in the system.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Benefits and Risk consideration

In some cases, an evaluation may consist of benefits or even risks to the participant. Participants may either benefit directly or indirectly from a research exercise. For instance, the participants may get some token for participating in the interview.

Some interviews may take a significant duration of time and therefore it could be better to give the participants some token in order to encourage them to participate in answering interview questions. An evaluation may also include the benefits of improving the performance of a program which may also be of great importance for individuals participating in such programs later.

Program evaluation may also include some risks. Before undertaking an evaluation, it is always advisable to consider any possible risk which can take place. It is always advisable to evaluate these risks and then take the necessary mitigation measures.

For instance, in the evaluation of the parole and probation; the participants are usually crime victims. Therefore, there is a high risk posed on the participants based on the information they give. It is therefore necessary to consider these risks while carrying out an evaluation on these two programs.

One of the main risks which the participants may be exposed to in this case is the safety concerns. For instance, some people may abuse the given information and then abuse such information to victimize the participants. In this case, the participant may suffer harm from participating in the program evaluation.

For instance, in the parole and probation program evaluation, a prisoner may be a participant in the interview. In this case, the prisoner may give information on the crimes they were involved in. In this case, another person may access the given information and abuse it by using it as evidence against the participant.

The participants may also be required to answer some questions in the interview which may be traumatizing. Such kind of questions may be distressing to the participant and may lead to complications. While interviewing a person, the process consumes their time and energy.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Ethical Issues; Parole and Probation Program Evaluation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is more so in the structured questionnaires where the participants need to explain the questions asked in details. This is one of the ways of interrupting individuals’ life. For instance, the person may have sacrificed some of their duties in order to participate in the interview.

The participants may also be exposed to social harm for their participation. This comes as a result of violation of their privacy. In this case, when the participants are exposed to the society that they were involved in a certain crime and that they were released under the parole, this may violate their confidentiality. The participants may not for instance be willing to be exposed about the crimes they were previously involved in.

Risk Mitigation and Benefit Maximization in Program Evaluation

The discussion above has clearly shown that there are a number of risks which are involved in program evaluation exercise. There is also some benefits associate with program evaluation process. Therefore, the major concern in this case will be obtaining the optimal results.

That is, maximizing the benefits and minimizing the risks. Although the risks cannot be eliminated completely, it is advisable to design the program evaluation process in such away that the risks are minimized (Bebeau et al. 1995: 50).

There are several measures which can be taken to mitigate risks in a parole and probation program evaluation. To start with, it will be necessary to ensure that all the process involved in the evaluation process is as short as possible. This will help in reducing the chances of intrusion.

As already observed, some questions may affect the participants emotionally. The interviewer must refrain from asking such questions because they pose harm to the participant. Such questions should be asked only in a situation where the information being retrieved through such question is of great importance. For instance, information may be important in improving certain services.

Another way through which benefits can be maximized in the current project evaluation is by rewarding the participants. This may involve giving the participants small token. This will encourage them and they will feel encouraged and confident that their time is not wasted. It will also be advisable for the researchers to explain the importance of participation in the program to the participant and the society in general.

Informed Consent

Another important ethical issue that is critical in the parole and probation program evaluation is informed consent. Informed consent implies that the participant will access all the information about the process and then make their decision to participate or not to participate based on this information.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethical Issues; Parole and Probation Program Evaluation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In the parole and probation program evaluation, every person involved must have the freedom to choose whether to participate or not. Therefore, there should not be any penalty for not participating in the process.

For instance, it would be wrong to have a situation where for instance the prisoners will be asked to participate in order to access certain services (Arrigo and Williams 2006: 124). In other words, people should be free to choose any course of action without any intimidation.

In some cases, the participants may not be willing to contribute to certain parts of the project for various reasons. In such a case, it is advisable to allow the participants an opportunity to avoid it without forcing them (Panel on Scientific Responsibility and the Conduct of Research 1993: 26).

In addition, the participants should have the freedom to leave the project at any point at their own consent. Again, the research should not make any effort to force them continue with the research.

Before the participants join the program, they should be provided with all the information about the program. For instance, they should be informed in advance about the kind of the questions they should expect. This should also include the genuine duration of an interview.

In case the participants have any question concerning the research, the research has the responsibility of giving them the correct answers (Bland

[supanova_question]

Teaching a musical instrument in school Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Music education is a study field that deals with training of individuals interested in music. It entails all spheres of learning including psychomotor, cognitive and the effective domain. Psychomotor domain deals with ability development while cognitive domain deals with knowledge achievement. Effective domain is the most significant and entails the positive reception of music and sensitivity.

The integration of music education has become common in almost all academic institutions since music has become a primary constituent of human culture. The drive towards musical achievement is of great inherent value to both the learner and the society. As an immense subject, music needs to be trained in schools in several ways (Golby 2004 p. 218).

In elementary learning institutions, children are trained to use music appliances. Musical instruments taught include string instruments such as guitar and violin, woodwind instruments such as the flute, brass instruments such as the trumpet, percussion instruments such as the drum, the key board, and finally voice instruments such as the jazz.

They are also taught how to perform in small singing groups and the essentials of musical sound. Even though music education in many countries has conventionally strained on western music, the contemporary learning institutions are trying to integrate the use of non-western music. Students in learning institutions are often given the chance to sing in musical ensembles. Extra music classes are also offered (Steiner

[supanova_question]

Fundamentals of Abnormal Psychology: Personality Disorder Essay cheap essay help

Antisocial personality disorder (ASP) has been linked to a history of child abuse. The DSM-IV-TR criteria lay out seven symptoms that indicate presence of antisocial personality disorder (APA, 2000). First, an individual will not conform to social norms. As a result of this, such a person is likely to break the law and get arrested. If a parent abuses a child, then the parent is basically breaking the rules.

He or she then teaches his child to do the same, and this may develop into ASP. Secondly, the individual tends to be deceitful. He or she may lie severally or may take it to the extreme by conning others off their money. Someone with a history of child abuse may have learnt from his or her parents that self gratification is all that counts.

Therefore, if one has to lie in order to achieve what one wants then one will go ahead and do so. Impulsivity is yet another key trait in the diagnosis of antisocial personality disorder. This kind of person fails to think about the consequences of his or her actions. If a person has a history of child abuse, then he or she may enter adulthood with emotional injuries.

Such a person has no strong bonds with others and thus ends up being self absorbed. He will act impulsively as a result of this emotional disconnect. Fourth, the person tends to be highly aggressive and irritable. He or she may get into fights easily and frequently. A patient with a history of child abuse tends to learn violent behavior from the abusive parent.

Eventually the person manifests the same negative behavior that had been experienced as a child. Fifth, there could be minimal regard for safety. Exposure to violence as a child may lead one to adopt a very high level of risk tolerance that may manifest as recklessness and disregard for safety (APA, 2004). Sixth, someone with the disorder tends to act irresponsibility.

He or she many not honor work obligations and can act inconsistently about such important matters. Child abuse often sends the message that rules are unimportant. A child who is subjected to these emotions may end up carrying forward these sentiments into his or her adult life. Seven, the person may feel no regret for mistreating or hurting other people.

One may rationalize social unacceptable behavior at every turn. Child abuse often leads to low emotional attachment between parents and the abused child. In adult life, such an individual will not form emotional attachments with other people and may not empathize with them if he or she hurts them.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Borderline personality disorder is associated with a history of abandonment or severe neglect. The Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders forth edition has nine symptoms that indicate presence of borderline personality disorder (APA, 2000). The first criterion is prevalence of abandonment avoidance. Sometimes the abandonment may be real or imagined.

It comes as a no surprise that a person with a history of childhood neglect would develop abandonment avoidance. He or she may be terrified of occurrence of the same condition in adulthood and will therefore avoid it as much as possible. Second, one is likely to have intense interpersonal relationships, which also happen to be unstable.

A person who went through severe neglect as a child is likely to think of relationships as possible causes of neglect in their adult life. Therefore, most of them tend to overindulge in a relationship and then withdraw after realization that the relationship maybe a threat to their psychological well being. Third, identity disturbance through an unstable sense of self can also be another indicator.

A neglected child will grow up without a sense of identity as he or she will lack family role models that he or she can identify with. Consequently, such children end up becoming confused about their sense of self. Fourth, such people have a tendency to be impulsive, or to engage in self damaging behavior. Anorexia, binge eating and promiscuity are some of the examples in this criterion.

As children continue to be neglected, most of them develop a negative self image that convinces them that they are essentially bad people. This leads to self hatred and destructive thoughts in adulthood (Weaver

[supanova_question]

Ryaniar Airlines Company Report scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction The airline industry faces tremendous threats from global economic performance, terrorism, airline merges, and prices of oil; despite the challenges, Ryaniar Airline Company has to come up with strategic management policies to ensure it grows its market base and remain competitive.

Best policies of the company entail exploiting its strength to take advantage of opportunities offered by fast globalizing world and control, reduce, or manage adverse industrial threats, politics, social dynamics, and economic instabilities1.

This paper, using strategic management tools and theoretical models analyses current business strategies as adopted by the Ryaniar; at the end the report will make recommendations on the best way forward for the company.

Brief History of the company Ryaniar Airlines was founded in 1985 as an alternative to Irish state airlines; the founders of the company are Tony Ryan family, the initial route operated by the company was that between Ireland and the United Kingdom. At incorporation, the company had leased three conventional types of airplanes with the aim of being a full conventional airline.

By 2009, the company had grown to have 199 Boeing 737-800 planes with an employment base of 7000 employees; in the same year, the company was believed to have had operation base in over 26 countries. The company’s head quarters are situated at Dublin Airport; the company has over 1,100 routes across Europe and Morocco and conducts its business from 45 bases.

In 2009, the company was the largest airline company in the entire Europe respected for its efficient low cost services. To remain competitive, Ryaniar Airlines needs to make strategic alliances moves that will assist collaboration of its service with other airline companies operating in areas that it does not have a licenses2.

Reasons that have made the company successful so far Ryaniar Airlines management recognizes the use of information available in the market and internal information; the information is used to drive the business in the company. To analyze the market and derive a competitive advantage, the company undertakes regular internal and external audits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 2009, the company’s management was recognized by an international award for the best managed airline (2009 FT _Arcelor Mittal Boldness in Business Award); the award also recognized efforts that the company has undertaken to diversify its business to North American market.

Diversification is another approach that it has adopted; other than focusing on domestic industry alone, the company has extended its services to Caribbean countries, African, European, and American markets. The reason behind diversification is to tap a large market and enjoy economies of scale one of attributes used by low cost airlines. Good customer service and technological development are other strategies implemented3.

The airline has put on measures that ensure that there is increased efficiency in its operations. It employs a Six Sigma management procedure where it aims at creating efficiency in its processes. It detects defects in various areas and addresses them before they paralyze the entire company. In freight industry fuel cost takes the highest proportion of costs, the company has bought fuel efficient jets with an average of four years.

Staff has also been taught how to multitask and still maintain a high customer service. The company has a freelance culture where staffs are given the freedom to express their feeling and make recommendations they would like done on the processes. After each fright an officer in charge is supposed to give an analysis of any issue that they may have encountered when in the freight.

These are the basis that is used for making decisions in the airline. Ryaniar Airlines has a reliable workforce where they pay them well that they are able to tape the best talents and recruits in the sector; with such a team, the company is able to operate effectively and make decisions that are effective4.

The strategy of Ryanair Corporate level strategy

The Company’s main vision and mission is to be leader in the airline industry in the world; it aims at being an innovative company that respects its human capital needs; the company can be applauded for its efforts to keep in touch with its mission and vision.

The company believes in corporate governance and ethical business and aims at doing ethical businesses; it has adopted current technology to endure that it offers high-class services with minimal pollution of the environment.

We will write a custom Report on Ryaniar Airlines Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the company’s corporate structure innovativeness was seen in 1990 when it emerged as the first low cost company in Europe with a style similar to that of Southwest Airlines; with the move lead by Michael O’Leary saw the company be registered on the Dublin Stock Exchange. The listing furthers the strategy of the company as it offers cheaper means that the company adopts to get finances for its various operations.

The company has a vision of caring for our employees and stakeholders as it grows its business to higher heights; the company understands that it can only remain competitive and profitable if it is sensitive of its employees needs and giving adequate returns to its shareholders.

When employee’s issues are looked into, the company attracts high caliber staffs that are innovative and highly motivated for the good of the company. the company has attained its employee mission agenda to the level that crews and other airline experts look forward to work in the company.

As far as attaining of its corporate goals are concerned, the company is doing relatively well; it has remained competitive and a choice of many people; it also has high wage rates above the industry rate a factor that has made the company competitive in attracting quality, talented and focused staffs. The company has a no-dividends policy where it uses the retained earnings as a cheap method of getting finances for its operations5.

Business-level strategy

Ryanair has a hub-and-spoke business strategy, where it takes advantage of the existing business environment to come up with policies that improve its global business. The company’s strategy is highly responsive to any changes in world economies and improves its services with the wave of change.

The company business strategy is built on hard-to-emulate mix of a well through geographic location, visional management, embedded in an ambitious and dedicated work force; the approach to business ensures that the company constantly develops new processes, ways of operations and products to fit the changing population needs.

The business strategy of the company can be seen in 2009 when the company was named as “world Favorite Airline” company and was ranked to have the highest number of customers in the international scenes.

The airline industry is having a number of competitors as well as consumers who have diverse needs; the customers can be classified as low cost customers, business class and executives.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ryaniar Airlines Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company business strategy has two approaches; there are planes that represent each class, and some jumbo planes that can accommodate the three classes of people in one plane. The approach helps the company have a wide range of customers who consume its service6.

The company has embarked on quality customer service and aims at improving the experience that customer gets every time he or she uses the services; some of the services include online checking, online booking, online gambling, and ancillary services like in-flight beverages, foods and merchandise sales.

Other than the freights, through its website it has recognized and recommended some travel insurances, car rentals and accommodations that its customers can use effectively; the approach improves the company’s business further. The part of ancillary services in 2009 used the company’s 20.3% revenue which was higher from 18% in 2008; the high expenditure shows how the company values its customers7.

Recommendations in the wave of changing business environmental To remain competitive in the changing business Ryaniar Airlines has some strategic moves that it can implement to improve its operations rate; the strategies can only be attained with the collaboration of management, staffs and other stakeholders; the following policies/strategic can assist the company improve its production further:

Adopting Blue-Ocean strategies/moving away from Red Ocean Strategy The airline industry has elements of “red Business” strategy, under the strategy, companies make policies in the efforts to outsmart their competitors and ensure they have a large command of the market. Such polices have to follow certain presumed set rules and regulations as well as some that have been documented.

With the rise in competition, Ryaniar Airlines should invest in strategies that make competition irrelevant to its business despite its existence; Blue Ocean strategy is a management tool that invests in attaining simultaneous achievements through service differentiation and establishing of new market.

Although Ryaniar Airlines management structure has assisted the company to attain great success, the role of research and development strategy should be more reinforced to offer the much needed quality information that can assist the management make strategic decisions.

Blue Ocean management approaches believes that a company can be able to command growing incomes, revenues and profits if it is able to tap uncontested market places or offer services that are high competitive compared with those offered by their competitors. The method takes the form of refocusing the direction of a company and move from strategies that move from head-to-head competition8.

With current globalization, there are some countries that have not been fully tapped; they include developing countries as well as some developed countries where demand for air transport is higher. Some of the countries that the countries should look into include Southern Sudan, Afghanistan, Kenya, and Rwanda; the above countries are restructuring their economies and have potential of growing the company’s business further.

To be able to attain success in the business environment, the company should learn the mechanisms of Blue Ocean strategy; the first strategy that the company should use is value innovation through service differentiation and low cost9.

Under the Blue Ocean policy, the company should ensure that its operations fall in the strategy canvas of Blue Ocean; the canvas has four main corners: elimination-reduction-rises- and creates.

Under the framework of elimination, the company should analyze the available routes and ensure that every route has been utilized maximally; in the case there are some areas that are not profitable, the company can as well stop operating in the areas. Some of the areas that Ryaniar Airlines should reduce business are in those areas that have head-to-head competition.

Under the framework of reduction, the company should undertake an analysis of the benefits it delivers from a certain area; the company should ensure that any additional business in the area does not lead to marginal cost to the company. Under this policy, the company should ensure it operates at it best in all routes10.

The Aer Lingus Bid According to Michael, the decision to buy shares of Aer Lingus and buy them at a large portion was unthought-of decision that took the form of aggressiveness. The facts of the matter were that the company bought the shares at the wave of global financial crisis so the business at the time was challenged by the economic situation of the world.

It only took less than one week for the management to settle down on a 25.2% stake at Aer Lingus which was further raised to 29.8% before the end of the flotation. The decision and the time framework that it took shows that it was not well researched thus the chances of failure were high.

Two years down the line, the company shareholding value in Aer Lingus had depreciated from 407.2 million dollars (the purchase cost) to 79.7 million dollars.

In current business environments, when making an acquisition or a merger, the management should undertake a cost benefit analysis to establish whether the intended merger would benefit the companies involved or not. This fact seems too had been ignored when the bid was made.

Despite the shortcoming that the company got from the bid, looking at the same from a different perspective, the Ryanair made strategic sense as it aimed at dominating the market for its own strategic benefit; the bid could probably lead to better pricing on freights which is in line with the company’s business approach.

The bid also could be seen as beneficial when cost effect of the contract is weighed; the bid could mean that the companies’ combines their efforts to cost minimize for their own good as they increase sales11.

The bid by Ryanair produced a lot of political and legal issues where some business executives termed the move as an unaccepted business practice; with this in mind, Ryanair should withhold any bids in the company but get other companies operation outside Europe to place their bids.

Should the company introduce long haul freights? The financial strength that Ryanair has attained is good enough to allow it venture into long haul freights; the move can be as a mean of diversification of business or can be an extension of its strong brand name. Other than in the western countries, there are other emerging economies that have high potential for airline business; the company should consider such routes.

If the company decides to have long haul freights, it should not change its low cost approach as the area in the long distance still remains untapped12.

When comparing the competition in the European market and other parts of the world, the European market is high concentrated with airline companies offering differentiated services; in the case that Ryanair venture into long haul business, then it should ensure that it chooses though countries that have potential and are not highly invested in by domestic and other international companies.

With the purchase of Boeing 737-800, which are planes that can carry large capacity of cargo and a large number of passengers, the company can be able to operate in long distances well and maintain its cost effectiveness approach.

The human resources maintained by the company come from different nationalities and are well educated and experienced in the sector. With the two combinations, the company can be able to handle long haul business13.

Leadership model adopted by Michael O’Leary Leadership is an important element in the success of a company; when Michael O’Leary was taken aboard the company there was transformation from a loss making company to one of the most profitable company in the airline industry within a span of ten years.

The immediate change of things was brought about by adoption of a low fare segment in the company. With the proved record, it would be important if the company was to retain Michael O’Leary as the chief executive officer but equip him with support from able human resources at different levels14.

In 2009, the management of the company received an award as the best managed company in the airlines industry; alongside the award, the company also saw as the second largest airline company in the entire world, the success so far can be attributed by the charismatic leadership adopted by the management lead by Michael O’Leary.

The management style adopted by Michael O’Leary is that of democratic nature spiced with enforced research and development team. The manager emphasizes that before making a decision, there is need to collect, interpolate, and analyze wide literature and make consultation. With such an approach to management, the company can be guaranteed of a prosperous future.

When making decisions, it is the norm of the manager to consult not only experts but also his junior employees; this creates an atmosphere of good relations and grows innovation, creativity, and invention.

When some decisions needs to be made fast, Michael O’Leary is respected for taking a stand and defending it for the good of the company, this is a strength that the company should keep. In conclusion, Michael O’Leary should be retained at the company but the management should offer him support to grow other talented manager/leaders and at the same time utilize his potential further15.

Conclusion Ryaniar Airline Company’s success can be attributed to its effective and experienced management team, who make timely strategic decisions and alliances to enable the company diversify to different parts of the world.

With over 45 operating bases and serving over 1100 destinations, the company needs to have effective management structures to maintain its fast growth rate and stand the fiercely competition in low cost airline industry.

Other than competition, the company’s global growth is affected by economic, political, and social ideologies; despite the challenges, the company should embark on service differentiation methods and adoption of Blue Ocean strategy to stand the challenges.

Bibliography Alessandro, Cento. 2008. The Airline Industry: Challenges in the 21st Century. New York: Springer.

Campbell, David, Edgar David, Stonehouse George. 2011. Business Strategy: An Introduction. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Fojt, Martin.2006. The airline industry. New York: Emerald Group Publishing.

Fred, David. 2008. Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases. New Jersey: Pearson Education.

Hooley, Graham, and Saunders John. 2003. Competitive Strategy: The Key to Marketing Strategy. New York: Prentice Hall.

Jashapara, Ashok. 2004. Knowledge management: an integrated approach. Washington: Financial Times Prentice Hall.

Johnson, Gerry, Scholes Kevan, and Whittington Richard. 2005. Exploring Corporate Strategy. Text And Cases. Essex: Prentice Hall.

Kim, Chan. 2005. Blue Ocean Strategy. Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

Kotabe, Masaki, and Helsen Kristiaan. 2004.Global Marketing Management. New York: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Turkey-European Union Relations Dissertation best essay help: best essay help

Influences, impact and paradox: Turkish attitude towards the European Union Turkey is a country which has long standing relationships with the European Union. The country has long been applying for the European Union membership (Togan, S. 1019). Turkey has continued to embrace western culture due to its geopolitical position and the friendliness of Ataturk towards western ideologies.

Thus, it has continued to westernize its system such that its effects have been felt throughout every sector of the Turkish society. The country also became a member of NATO thereby taking a position against the communism during the period of the iron curtain (Avrupa’ya Hayir Diyebilen Turkiye 157).

There have been a lot of passionate moves by the Turkish government to embrace the Middle Eastern culture. This has led the government to establish relationships with its eastern and North African neighbours. The country has also been involved in major peace initiatives in the Arab world.

It is important to note that its strong relationship with the US also made the country a strong Israeli ally. However, this relationship cooled down when Turkey supported the Palestinians in Gaza. This cooling came at the same time with the moving away of Turkey from the EU due to its foreign policies.

The country has therefore made several alterations to its domestic policies in order to comply with EU standards. For instance, the country abolished death penalty. Turkey also had a positive attitude towards the Annan Plan in the UN-led Referendum to unite Northern (Turkish) and the Southern (Greek) Cypriots. It opened the border with Armenia and improved its relations with Greece.

It is thus appropriate to state that Turkey’s attitude will only be enhanced by having it to solve different issues. Some of the issues involve the period in which Turkey reformed and reorganized its policies to synchronize with those of EU. This actually corresponds to the electoral victory of AKP.

This party single handily formed the next government that oversaw great steps towards the EU, among them a return to negotiations. AKP reduced the role of its military in the National Security Council. Also, the party abolished death penalty (Anderson 22). These changes depicted the party as one that was committed to integrate with EU and also as a solution to some of the country’s problems.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is important to note that all these changes took another turn in the year 2005. This is because the events that followed after this year made Turkey to move away from the EU. Thus, during the 2011 election agendas, the EU was not mentioned in most of the political parties’ election propaganda. Currently, there has been a government regulation to ban the use of internet and to infringe on the rights of the media houses.

The AKP has continued to grow in Islamic agenda thereby getting closer to the Arab world and consequently cooling of relations with Israel. Thus, the government has switched back to the previous nationalist stubborn attitude towards Cyprus (TUSIAD 4). The foreign minister, Ahmet Davutoglu has also led the Turkish foreign policy whereby the axis shift has actually become so hard to neglect (Barysch 48).

Since AKP has been affiliated with Islam, it has been forced to dance to the tune of its electorate (Cizre 118). The party still held certain reservations that come as a result of tensions that exist in the country. Thus, it claimed to be in support of human rights yet still held on to religious beliefs that undermine the same human rights (Onar 279).

This meant that it can contravene the EU legislation if it is pressured by the electorate. Also, Turkey, which is a powerful country, adhered to Pan-Islamic model with the ability to extend its influence far and wide into other countries such as the Middle East, Central Asia, the Caucasus, and Persia (Daloglu 4).

The bid for Turkey to join the European Union has been considered as one of the most controversial in the history of the European Union. When viewed through the lens of Turkey’s long struggle to adopt modernity, opponents at the EU seem to be only contributing to a national debate that has been ongoing for a long time (Meral 59).

In this case, the struggle has been between traditionalist Islamists and westernizing Kemalists, both competing for Turkey’s soul (Gulmez 427). The attitude of Turkey is in direct proportion with making progress in domestic and foreign policies to please the EU. Since the majority of the Turkish people are Muslims, Turks appear euro-sceptic for reasons such as the need for national protection of minorities (Levin, P. 12).

Turkey is still a highly segmented society whereby there has always been a clash between the societies. There has to be consensus regarding EU membership. Otherwise, it will be difficult for the government to continue pushing through the necessary changes in TBMM.

We will write a custom Dissertation on Turkey-European Union Relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From the European perspective, it is factual to exclaim that Turkey’s Islamic identity is the number one crash to Turkey’s Europeanness. Islamists believe that Turkey is more Eastern that European. Thus, approval of EU membership is only supported by those who do not support seriat (Carkoglu 173).

The concept of Turkish nationalism as defined in Kemalism remains a key factor in determining the extent of Islam’s influence (Nora Onar 171). In Kemalism, the Turkish people had to get used to deep-seated secularism whereby the mosque had to be separated from the state in an uncompromising manner. Aybar states that, this is because the vision of the modern Turkish republic is strongly embedded in it (341).

For those who support the Europeanization of Turkey, westernization forms a major argument in their opinion (Onis, 365). However, according to Oguzlu, at a time when the support for EU accession is declining abroad, the debate is no longer restricted to the advantages and disadvantages of the accession (98).

This sentiment is even echoed by French president when he said that he did not think that Turkey has any place in Europe (Arikan 28).

It is beyond doubt that the Islamic character influences Turkish politics, which later influences its EU membership. According to Flam, the Islam factor has really contributed to the great controversy (203). This is because Islamic nature is deeply rooted in Turkish politics (Tekin 292).

There has been a rise in Islamic character of Turkish domestic politics that have been considered as major setbacks in Turkish aspirations to join the EU, a fact that has been shared by Rahigh-Aghsan (44).

It is thus important for Turkey to calm down, take a step back, lay out all its cards on the table and say ‘wait a minute, let us see all the options and chances we have’. By doing this Turkey will certainly find the correct way (Erhan et al. 229). This will also help to understand more on how the citizens view the relationship between EU and Turkey.

Works Cited Arikan, Harun. Turkey and the EU: an awkward candidate for EU membership? London: Routledge, 2008.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Turkey-European Union Relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Aybar, Bulent. “Analysis of attitudes of Turkish citizens towards the effect of European Union membership on the economic, political, and cultural environment”, Turkish Studies, 8.3, (2007): 329-348.

Anderson, Perry. “After Kemal.” London Review of Books 30.18 (2008): 13-22

Barysch, Katinka, Can Turkey combine EU accession and regional leadership? Center for European Reform Policy Brief, 2010.

Carkoglu, Ali. “Who Wants Full Membership? Characteristics of Turkish Public Support for EU Membership.”Turkish Studies 4.1 (2003): 171-94.

Cizre, Umit. “Problems of democratic governance of civil-military relations in Turkey and the European Union enlargement zone”, European Journal of Political Research, 3.1, (2004): 107–125.

Daloglu, Eda. Turkey-EU and Islam: Is Islam a Factor of Negotiations?, London: Routledge, 2010.

Erhan, Cagri; Ozlem Genc and Zerrin Dagci Sakarya. Siyasi Partilerin Avrupa Birliği’ne Bakışı. Ankara 2011

Flam, Harry. “Turkey and the EU: Politics and Economics of Accession”, CESifo Economic Studies 50.1, (2004), 171-210.

Gulmez, Seck. “The EU policy of the Republican People’s Party: An Inquiry on the opposition party and euro-skepticism in Turkey.” Turkish Studies 9.3(2008): 423-436

Levin, Paul. Turkey and the European Union: Christian and Secular Images of Islam. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011

Meral. Ziya. Prospects for Turkey. Legatum Institute, 2 Sept., 2010. Web.

Oguzlu, Tarik. “The impact of ‘democratization in the context of the EU accession process’ on Turkish foreign policy”, Mediterranean Politics, 9.1, (2004): 94-113.

Onar, Nora. “Kemalists, Islamists and Liberals: Shifting Patterns of Confrontation and Consensus.” Turkish Studies 8.2 (2007)

Öniş, Ziya.“Contesting for Turkey’s Political Centre: Domestic Politics, Identity Conflicts and the Controversy over EU Membership.” Journal of Contemporary European Studies 18 (2010): 361-76.

Önis, Ziya. “The Turkey-EU-US Triangle in Perspective: Transformation or Continuity?” The Middle East Journal, 59.2, (2005): 265-284.

Rahigh-Aghsan, Ali. “Turkey’s EU Quest and Political Cleavages under AKP”, Review of European Studies, 3.1 (2011): 43-53.

Tekin, Ali. “Future of Turkey–EU relations: a civilisational discourse”, Futures, 37.4, (2005), 287-302.

Togan, Sübidey. “Turkey: Toward EU Accession”, The World Economy, 27.7, (2004): 1013–1045.

TUSIAD. Cyprus Issue should not harm Turkey’s membership process. Euractiv 21 Nov. 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Theoretical Orientations in Race, Class and Gender in Adult Learning Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Theoretical orientations

Conclusion

References

Introduction The adult education concept has become popular in the 21st century setting especially on the backdrop of increased importance in education. Adults who do not possess any formal learning experience have the chance to go through a specially designed curriculum that equips them with the literary skills necessary for communication and even employment.

Departments of adult education are now considered a necessity as many authorities implement strategies to combat illiteracy. Like the normal education curriculum, adult education has its trends and theoretical orientations that seek to define its place and role in society.

Throughout its development education has been plagued by issues such as race, gender and class. The education system has been characterized by official segregation where learners from different racial backgrounds could not freely use the common education facilities. Sadly the trend is still noticeable today in some learning institutions that the media refers to “Historically or dominantly black or white.

Class too has permeated the education system where some institutions are considered prestigious than others hence breeding such titles as “Ivy league” where learners thought to be from affluent backgrounds attend. Finally, gender issues also characterize education.

Though not as prevalent in the US like in other part of the world, women have historically been disadvantaged in accessing education because of some deeply rooted traditions that fronted the idea that they are inferior to men.

The above issues though not in the formal education proportions have found their way to adult education as well.

Theoretical orientations Adult educators have identified an overwhelming need to address glaring inequalities through fostering cultural diversity and inclusive approaches to adult education (Hayes

[supanova_question]

Sound and Space Essay essay help: essay help

Importance of sound Life is made meaningful through the five senses present in human beings. The experiences that people go through are facilitated through the senses that enable people to decipher the messages contained in the sounds that they hear. Seeing and hearing are touted as the most fundamental and can only be compared to food and water, the most basic human need.

The sonic impressions created by hearing do to a greater extent help in determining visual impressions that are created by sight. Sounds, together with images have been developed and they form the basis of the creative arts sector in many countries1.

Just as hearing comes top among the senses, music is ranked above all other arts. Art uses both visual and sound impressions. However, sound has proven to be more powerful over visual images in the world of art.

From birth, human beings use sound qualities and later on during gradual maturity use the expressive qualities found in speech and music to familiarize themselves with the qualities of life. The invaluable experiences offered by music and other sound qualities help in human development and self-discovery through communication2.

In the long history of human development, one of the most important factors that have characterized that development is the concept of sound. Is has been one of the crucial deciding factors in the development and advancement of society as well as its sustenance in the dynamic world. Many cultures including Indian and Vedic have myths that seek to explain the mysterious nature of sound.

These myths explore the existence of the soul before the existence of the earth and how sound developed after the universe came to exists. In Indian culture, for instance sound was regarded highly that it is classified as one of the characteristics of ether, one of the elements of nature. They ancient Indians believed that sound pervaded everything3.

The existence of sound in the world is crucial to the creation of perception and presence that determine the shape of the world. Sound according to Thompson creates perception, emotional, spiritual, and psychological spaces (50). Through the above elements, understanding within ourselves, the environment and between human beings is enhanced. Communication too is enhanced through sound and space.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the same note, the importance of sonic space and the experience that it creates in everyday human life comes to the fore. In the middle of the sonic experience is the space and human beings. This presents a complicated relationship that intensely involves the audible domain and the visceral involvement with architects of sonics that work on structures to transform space to a sonic experience4.

There is a unique articulation of space and place in the interactive sound environment that are helpful to human brings in their efforts in engaging with the immediate environment.

In the experiment for instance, a subtly performative medium done in an immersive environment will help transform the space to a sonic experience effectively casting the listener as a creator and performative agent5.

An important point to note is the characterization of interactive environments like walled rooms by an interface that aids in triggering sonic material from the axial coordinate location of an interactive agent within an architectural space. The triggering may be done by direct triggers like objects including wall boxes, floor pads and light beams.

The sound is generated and recorded and plays itself out regardless of the morphology of the person interacting with them6. This is possible because the sonic content of objects installed with fixed morphological structures that are acquired when samples of the sound are generated and recorded.

There is a variance on interactive input because of the collage of objects that are used in the experiment and they provide a direct relationship between the qualities of the interactive gestures and the sonic outcomes.

Perhaps the most important role that sound plays in the development of human beings as well as the day-to-day lives is the nurturing of emotion. Through sound, human beings are able to learn and feel emotions while attaching meaning to them.

We will write a custom Essay on Sound and Space specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Emotions help transform human beings to social beings capable of feeling. After learning emotions, human beings use the sonic arts to communicate the emotions to fellow human beings in their quest to have corresponding real life experiences7.

An emotional being through socialization is transformed to a social being. The preservation of quality sounds reinforces sound integrity to ensure human beings get the best of the sounds that we use and those that we get through music and other sonic arts. The social being is developed through the sounds he/ she hears.

It’s important to note that there exists a wide variety of sounds that help human beings to develop full social beings. It’s also important to add that it helps when human beings are exposed to various sounds because it helps the above said development.

To ensure that quality sound is made and is available for human social development, recording was introduced. Recording was a big step in the development and storage of music and quality sounds that help human beings develop. Through recording relationship between sound and space and there are numerous sonic transformations that can be achieved8.

There is more to the projection of sound into space than meets the eye. Space is more than a container for sound. Sound has the ability to define space through the creation of metaphorical walls. When sound happens in space, there is a regular process that helps waves traverse the distance between the source and the ear.

An important element in this relationship between sound and space is the existence of a common structural design that can be referred to as architectonics9. This experiment will address the behavior of sonic qualities of space as well as the spatial characteristics of sound. It’s helped that through the experiment, the important role that sound and/ or silence plays in giving space its sonic qualities will be brought out.

Throughout time, there have been sonic and spatial constructions that have been useful in defining places in time. They will also be looked at albeit briefly to underscore the importance they played in the transformation of space to a sonic experience. The literature and experiment will be dedicated to the explanation of sound and space applications that include architectural creation of sonic spaces, landscapes and sculptures.

Sonic space The acoustic coloration can be described as the sonic space. The sonic space is crucial in how people hear and perceive interact with sound in their environment. Particularly important especially in the experiment is the human interaction aspect with sonic space.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sound and Space by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Human interaction with space can be primitive or cultural and emotional. Human beings primitively gather raw sonic data for instance reverberation and echo. Additionally, cultural and emotional sonic interaction with space evokes higher cognitive processes in human beings10.

It’s important to recognize the importance of sonic space in the virtual worlds. In games, for instance there is realistic sound simulation that brings the foley effects, atmospheric sound and sound effects. Additionally, sonic space enhances the emotional aspects of a scene through narration and music.

Sonic space in games brings out the realistic sound simulation that includes dialogue. The experiment’s main objective of transforming space to a sonic experience can be used to enhance information communication and education.

According to Wade, the interaction between human beings and sonic space is more than just a primitive reaction to the environment.

The process involves the use of raw data gathering abilities which are largely primitive, perception which are also primitive characteristics of higher cognition and high impact listening that are also part of higher cognition. The illustrations that follow will demonstrate this in a room environment that will form the wider context of the experiment (46).

Source: Landy, Leigh. What’s the Matter with Today’s Experimental Music?: Organized Sound too Rarely Heard. Chur, Reading: Harwood Academic Press, 1991. Print.

This is primitive raw data gathering in a room environment.

There is also perception which is primitive raw data gathering and higher cognition in a room environment as illustrated below.

Source: Landy, Leigh. What’s the Matter with Today’s Experimental Music?: Organized Sound too Rarely Heard. Chur, Reading: Harwood Academic Press, 1991. Print.

Finally there is high impact listening that involves higher cognition in a room environment.

Sonification mainly deals with the use of non-speech sound. It’s important to look at some of the difficulties that are experienced in the use of non-speech sound to convey information. Interference between different dimensions of sonic space and the cognitive overload are some of them.

Some of these problems can be alleviated incorporating some of the background functions into sonic space11. For instance, the problem may be solved through association of data size with sonic space instead of dimensions like pitch or loudness12. A particular importance of the experiment will be a demonstration of the potential that exists in using sonic space to help in the learning processes in visually impaired learners13.

Sound and space According to LaBelle and Roden sound cannot exists on its own without space (34). Additionally for sound to exist, it needs architecture and sight. The examination of the relationship between sound and space was first mooted by the ancient Greeks. The experiments conducted by the Greeks sought to investigate the behaviors of sound in different space settings.

The unique behaviors that sound exhibited in these different space settings was the main content of the investigations they carried. These early researchers came up with the premise that the relationship between sound and space was utterly dependent on architecture.

This relationship was vividly captured in the ideas and works of Vitruvius when he sought to control sound in theatres. A concrete conclusion that was reached by these researchers was that sound and music had an explicit linkage to architecture underlain through the harmony of the universe.

Of special importance however was the relationship that exists between sound space and place and their linkage to transforming space to a sonic experience. Presence of bodies and movement aids in the realization of the existence of space14. In the experiment, one will discover that sound is a temporary medium that needs careful analysis to uncover its properties.

Through the use of psychoacoustics, reverberation is analyzed to bring out the information on size of the sonic environment15. The presence and active participation of the human mind in this experiment brings to the fore the ability to envision and discover the source of excitation while determining the fine qualities of the materials used in case boxes.

The above is possible when one considers reverberation together with timbre and attack. The concept of morphology is brought back through its entrenchment in the sonic recording of the audio sample.

It’s important to note that the recording that will be involved in the sonic transformation of a space is interactive in nature and does little to condition the response hence the exact nature of the interaction is produced at the external reference16.

It therefore does not reflect the participants’ experience and cognition rather that of natural rules of sonics. The need to mould the environment therefore through the use of architecture in order to condition the interactive experience arises17.

Sound and space could not be understood without the use of architecture that was crucial in developing harmonic properties of sound as well as the mathematical impressions of sound and music.

The ancient researchers also did conclude that site and sound existed simultaneously and that the relationship could be examined through the listening experience. Their joint existence can fall within the social presence context or private experience context.

In terms of acoustics and resonance, site and sound do determine their development where one of them is characterized as a receiver while the other is characterized as a transmitter18. The above explanation by the Greek researchers of sound and space concluded that space is crucial in the controlling, deadening, reflection, and destruction of sound.

There is a lot of architecture that goes to designing and developing areas where people live for instance in cities and quiet parks. That therefore means there can be a deliberate generation of sound to alter space. Similarly, one can shape space to manipulate sound to a negative or positive effect instead of reducing or deadening or eliminating it19.

Besides the perception capabilities that human beings display toward sound, they can also create and destroy both sound and space. When designing space, architects are mostly concerned about the acoustic factors that will affect the spaces they design.

Acoustics One of the concepts that come out prominently in the relationship between sound and space and sonic is acoustics. According to Ripley et al, every room has a sound. In any room, sound waves experience reflection, absorption, and dispersion (45).

This is done by the boundaries the physical contents like furniture and the people present. It’s important to note that different rooms have different sounding formats. The sounding is determined by the size, geometry and the materials that are used. More importantly, their acoustic behavior is more critical to the sounding of the room.

A connection between acoustics and sonic transformation will be necessary in the experiment in its quest to transform space to a sonic experience. No doubt there is a lot of architecture and other fine details that go into transforming space to fit acoustics. While this experiment has little to do with acoustics, the sonic gestalt that is involved considers sound as a unique media that is an internal artifact.

According to Thompson sound penetrates the body and it’s very difficult for anyone to use it in a concrete way to come up with anything far from appeasing emotional experiences20. According to Smalley, this “slippery” nature of sound is referred to as surrogacy.

The sonic transformation of space in this experiment is will operate on the principle of remote surrogacy with the assumption that when the listeners will be hearing the sound from the materials on the wall, they will involve their cultural and environmental experiences to find meaning. In other words the experiment will mainly concentrate on the production of sound in a room space with different materials.

The materials in a room or space will be crucial in the transformation of space to a sonic experience and a good understanding of the dynamics involved in acoustics will help shed some light on the concept and help in explaining the effect of space and sound21.

Size, geometry, diffusion, and absorption describe acoustics in the most basic terms. Acoustics is all about eliminating resonances by ensuring reflections of sound disappear through absorption and diffusion.

In their quest to improve sound quality, acousticians try to modify rooms through architectural designs that greatly alter sound in rooms especially theatres to fit the purpose. However, it is imperative to highlight that the sound source is also a factor in determining the quality of the sound experiences in a room22.

More often than not, acoustic engineers and architects try to dampen the rooms in order to improve the sound of the reflection. Sometimes it is successful while at times it flops badly. Sound quality in a room is mainly determined by the material used. Every material possesses a vibration character. This is more critical in the reflection of sound waves, perhaps more critical than the absorption and dispersion coefficients.

To achieve the best reflection, engineers struggle to match the mother of tone to the character of the reflecting material. The mother of tone is ideal because it is the same benchmark that is used by the human body in its regulation of vibration of ears and generally, bodies. It’s against these that all sounds that are meant for any human beings are evaluated.

Size Resonant frequencies are mainly affected by the size of the room. These cavity models of the room signify that a few of frequencies will be higher or louder than all other frequencies available. For instance a sub hoofer that normally has low frequencies is designed to activate and excite the cavity modes present in rooms.

The cavity modes or frequencies of a room can only be changed through alteration of the size or its volume that is more or less the size23. The objects that will be used in the experiment will be of different sizes to fulfill the intentional purpose of producing several sounds.

Geometry Direction of sound reflections in a room is determined by the geometry of the room. On the other hand, the geometry of the room is determined by the angles and the positioning of the walls as well as the floor, ceiling, furniture and any other physical object in the room.

Any new entry into a room changes the acoustics of that particular room. It is important to note that the commonest reflection happens between parallel rather than perpendicular walls24.

Materials The materials that make up the walls, ceiling, and floor of the room as well as the materials of the furniture and any other physical objects greatly determine the acoustics. Understanding into these individual material properties will need a macro understanding of the individual materials on the physical features of a room.

Concisely, the acoustic properties of a material in a room are determined through the amount of sound that is reflected by that particular object. The amount of sound is determined by the absorption coefficient. Also determining the acoustic properties of a material is the direction the reflection takes which is determined by the dispersion or diffusion coefficient25.

The physical objects that are capable of creating and sometimes destroying sound and the acoustic energy that fills the air are some of the major aspects of sound. Both scientific and aesthetic ways, the relationship with the environment and the circumstances that surround someone determine who gets to hear what.

Perhaps the relationship between space and sound is better captured through the demonstration of an empty house and that is already furnished26. An empty house demonstrates acoustic harshness that is not pleasant to the ear at all. Sound in occupied houses is more soft and accommodating than the former.

The different surfaces from different objects that are present in the house help in the refraction and softening of the sound giving a soothing acoustic. According to Pallasmaa, different spaces and buildings display varied characteristics of attractiveness, feelings, intimacy, monumentality, harshness, invitation, or rejection (58). The above characteristics signify either hospitality

The features described above come in hand in the achievement of acoustics of a room. They are also important in the transformation of space to a sonic experience. The different objects that will be used in the experiment will spot various measurements of the features that will directly impact on the sound they will produce.

Of importance is the morphology and timbre of the objects that will be placed to act as the sources of the sounds that will aid in the transformation of the space to a sonic experience.

Sound and space Given the importance of space in this transformation, it’s only important to understand how the human element through architecture influences electro-acoustics that are directly linked to the space-sonic transformation experience.

The human effect on sound and space is mainly captured through the architectural element that is directly related to sound and space. People have come up with designs that manipulate sound to achieve the sound qualities that they want. The creation of Symphony Hall marked the beginning of an acoustic era dominated by technology.

This technology enabled architects and acousticians to have greater control of over sound. The Symphony hall is still regarded as the first ever, modern science inspired creation that clearly captured the effect of human beings and space on sound. It’s important to note that there are many symphony halls and their workings are basically the same.

One critical factor that comes up in the human effect on sound on space and the incorporation of architecture into the study and understanding of sound is the materiality of the objects used.

Reverberation is determined by the frequency dependency of the powers of sound absorbing by the materials used in architecture. Within the materiality concept, the barriers that aid in minimizing noise pollution in building and construction came up27.

According to Wade, human beings have largely been responsible for the manipulation of architecture and space in the cities to introduce a completely new concept of soundscape (56). The use of space has ensured the resonation of the cities, echoing, muffling, and the isolation of all the urban sounds creating a new dimension of soundscape.

Urban designers and planners have responded by planning every building in the cities in specialized and differentiated ways. Determination of the openness of the streets, planting of trees and the specification of materials for different surfaces has been carefully considered in the use of space to control sound.

Due to the relative easiness through which architects can make predictions on the reverberations, the acoustics of the inside of buildings have been easily controlled and their spaces only reflect the acoustic qualities that their owners prefer28.

Wade says that human beings are perceptive creatures as well as active creators of sound and space. The acoustic space that is designed by architects is the primary concern when designing structures. Human beings are increasingly capable of manipulating the soundscapes of buildings through advanced architectural designs.

In this advanced manipulation of sound contexts, architects have sought to understand the effect of spatial sound. With the advancement in technology brought about by the industrial revolution, people started modifying and measuring sound.

Scientific study of sound enabled acoustic engineers and acousticians to manipulate microphones and amplifiers and loudspeakers together with the electrical signals that sound devices used. The discovery of sound production through electronics redefined acoustical phenomena using electronics rather than architecture. Acousticians could easily study and understand the behaviors of sound thanks to the advanced technology29.

According to Labelle and Roden, the sounds that are present today are because of technological mediation that is as a direct result of the manipulation by engineers and architects. Control of the behaviors of sound is no longer the mystery it used to be (132).

Many more materials used in the generation of sound have been developed together with numerous electro-acoustic devices that have helped greatly in the understanding of acoustics.

The development of the electro-acoustic and other techniques of manipulating sound have led to the production of both intended and unintended consequences. These noises include radio broadcasts, music concepts, and motion pictures with soundtracks that have become popular with people30.

It’s important to note that it is the need to control sound behavior and a culture for listening that have driven both the architectural and technological developments in acoustics.

New worries about noise that is as a direct result of human being manipulation of the sound space led to the desire by acousticians to control the sound in specific rooms where performances were held and that were important in producing acoustically correct music. Furthermore, the desire to eliminate all unnecessary sound was informed by the need to achieve efficiency in acoustics.

According to Ripley et al control of acoustics by architects and engineers was seen as a way of enabling these musicians exercise choice in a world filled with all kind of aural commodities (89). This developments helped producers and other acoustically interested people to determine what constitutes good and acceptable sound and to determine how and what it took to achieve it.

The gradual development of the relationship between sound and space led to the reformation of the principles that define it. There was gradual dissociation of sound from space to an extent that the relationship became non-existent31. The development of sound absorbing structures and the instruments that produced their own authentic acoustic sounds diminished the relationship between sound and space.

It is safe to conclude that the architectural bit has became a little differentiated and now concentrated on the development of either good structures or instruments that produce acoustic sounds according to the preference of the listeners. Reverberation was a direct creation of architecture that necessitated its creation. It was always a function of the room size, geometry and the materials of the surfaces of the objects in the room.

These factors together controlled the production of acoustic sound for long periods. It is therefore with relief that products that can produce acoustic sounds can be made and reverberation is just a form of noise that does not need to be controlled to produce acoustic sound32.

Directly related to architecture and human effect is the phenomenon of the sound transformation. The experiment on the transformation of space to a sonic experience can be said to be a miniature of electro acoustics that has been necessitated through architecture. Through the objects in a room is the creation of timbre development from basic one basic sound texture to another.

The fundamental concept here is the timbral metamorphosis which is more or less the transformation that space goes through to become a sonic experience. Though there may be numerous transformations that take place to form one sonorous gesture, an analysis of one is enough to illustrate the point since the process is repetitive.

Its important to note that there is considerable manipulation of the sound source which in this case will be the objects placed in the room to generate the morphology of the source to create a sound transformation to a sonic experience33.

Conclusion Throughout the paper both direct and indirect literature and details of transforming space to a sonic experience have been dealt with. The explanations have sought to explain the settings that this particular experiment will use to transform space to a sonic experience and how concepts like acoustics relate to the sonic concept.

In so doing the paper has in significant proportions concentrated on architecture and the role it plays in acoustics and sonic transformation. Additionally, there is substantial information relating to the projection of sound into a space and the cognitive characteristics of human beings that are necessary for a sonic transformation to be complete.

In so doing, a number of scholars and their works on sonic transformation and the metamorphic process involved in the process have been used and cited. The process and the finer aspects involving transformation of space to a sonic experience have been explicitly examined. It’s therefore hoped that the information presented in the paper adequately explains the experiment that seeks to transform space to a sonic experience.

Works Cited Alec, Nisbett. The Sound Studio: Audio Techniques for Radio, Television, Film and Recording. Focal Press, 2003. pp. 50

Bregman. Auditory Scene Analysis. The perceptual organization of sound. London: MIT Press, 1994.

Campbell, Murray. The Musicians Guide To Acoustics. London: Sage Publications, 1987. Print.

Cox and D’Antonio. Acoustic Absorbers and Diffusors – Theory, Design and Application. London: Spon press. Print.

Emmerson, Simon. The Language of Electro acoustic Music. London: Macmillan Press, 1986. Print.

Erickson, Robert. Sound Structure in Music. Berkeley: University of California Press 1975. Print.

Hayles, Katherine. Embodied Virtuality: Or How To Put Bodies Back Into The Picture. In Immersed In Technology: Art and Virtual Environments, Massachusetts: The MIT Press, 1996, Print.

Kahn, Douglas. Noise Water Meat — A History Of Sound In The Arts. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1999.

LaBelle, Brandon and Roden, Steve. Site of sound: of architecture and the ear, Volume 1. London: Errant Bodies Press, 1999. Print.

Landy, Leigh. What’s the Matter with Today’s Experimental Music?: Organized Sound too Rarely Heard. Chur, Reading: Harwood Academic Press, 1991. Print.

Moravec, Hans. Mind Children: The Future of Robot and Human Intelligence. Cambridge: Harvard University Press. 1988. Print.

Paine, Garth. Gesture and Musical Interaction: Interactive Engagement through Dynamic Morphology. Paper presented at NIME, at Hamamatsu, Japan, 2004. Print.

Pallasmaa, Juhani. The eyes of the skin: architecture and the senses. New York: Wiley- Academy, 2005. Print.

Paynter, John,et al. A Companion to Contemporary Musical Thought. London: Routledge Publishers, 1992. Print.

Ripley et al. In the place of sound: architecture, music, and acoustics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Print.

Sallie, Westwood; John, Williams. Imagining Cities: Scripts, Signs, Memory. Routledge, 1997. Print.

Scott, Jill. The Body as Interface. In Reframing Consciousness, UK: Intellect, 1999. Print.

Schiphorst, Thecla. Body, Interface, Navigation Sense and the State Space. Paper presented at: The Art of programming: Sonic Acts, at Amsterdam, 2001. Print.

Smalley, Spectro-morphology and Structuring Processes. In The Language of Electroacoustic Music. New York: Macmillan, 1986. Print.

Smalley, Dennis. Spectromorphology: Explaining sound-shapes. Organized Sound 2 (2):107-26. Wiener, N. 1948. Cybernetics: MIT Press, 1997.

Thompson, Emily. The Soundscape of Modernity. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2004. Print.

Taylor, Charles. Reflections, Reverberations, and Recitals”. Exploring Music: The Science and Technology of Tones and Tunes. CRC Press, 1999. pp. 232–4

Wishart. On Sonic Art. Ed. Simon Emmerson. UK: Harwood Academic Publishers, 1996. Print.

Wishart. Audible Design. A Plain and Easy Introduction to Practical Sound Composition. York, UK: Orpheus the Pantomime Ltd, 1994.

Wade, Bonnie. Imaging sound: an ethno musicological study of music, art. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. Print.

Yost, William. Fundamentals Of Hearing. NY: Academic Press, Inc., USA, 1994

Footnotes 1 LaBelle, Brandon and Roden, Steve. Site of sound: of architecture and the ear, Volume 1. London: Errant Bodies Press, 1999. Print. P.67

2 Hayles, Katherine. 1996. Embodied Virtuality: Or How To Put Bodies Back Into The Picture. In

Immersed In Technology: Art and Virtual Environments, Massachusetts: The MIT Press, 1996, Print. P.88

3 Paine, Garth. Gesture and Musical Interaction: Interactive Engagement Through Dynamic Morphology. Paper presented at NIME, at Hamamatsu, Japan, 2004. Print. Pp 23-30.

4 Moravec, Hans. Mind Children: The Future of Robot and Human Intelligence. Cambridge: Harvard University Press. 1988. Print. pp 90

5 Schiphorst, Thecla. Body, Interface, Navigation Sense and the State Space. Paper presented at The Art of programming : Sonic Acts, at Amsterdam, 2001. Print. Pp 21-26

6 Smalley. Spectro-morphology and Structuring Processes. In The Language of Electroacoustic Music. New York: Macmillan, 1986. Print. P.78

7 Pallasmaa, Juhani. The eyes of the skin: architecture and the senses. New York: Wiley-Academy, 2005. Print. p.65

8 Thompson, Emily. The Soundscape of Modernity. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2004. Print. P.54

9 Wade, Bonnie. Imaging sound: an ethno musicological study of music, art. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. Print. P. 45-46

10 Pallasmaa, Juhani. The eyes of the skin: architecture and the senses. New York: Wiley-Academy, 2005. Print. P. 66

11 Taylor, Charles. Reflections, Reverberations, and Recitals”. Exploring Music: The Science and Technology of Tones and Tunes. CRC Press, 1999. pp. 232–4

12 Scott, Jill. The Body as Interface. In Reframing Consciousness, UK: Intellect, 1999. Print. P. 23.

13 Smalley, Dennis. Spectromorphology: Explaining sound-shapes. Organised Sound 2 (2):107-26. Wiener, N. 1948. Cybernetics: MIT Press, 1997. Pp107-126

14 Sallie, Westwood; John, Williams. Imagining Cities: Scripts, Signs, Memory. Routledge, 1997. Print.

15 Paynter, John,et al. A Companion to Contemporary Musical Thought. London: Routledge Publishers, 1992. Print. Pp.89

16 Kahn, Douglas. Noise Water Meat — A History Of Sound In The Arts. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1999.pp.78

17 Alec, Nisbett. The Sound Studio: Audio Techniques for Radio, Television, Film and Recording. Focal Press, 2003. pp. 50

18 Thompson, Emily. The Soundscape of Modernity. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2004. Print.pp.48

19 Yost, William. Fundamentals Of Hearing. NY: Academic Press, Inc., USA, 1994.pp. 190

20 Thompson, Emily. The Soundscape of Modernity. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2004. Print. Pp 58-60

21 Smalley, Dennis. Spectromorphology: Explaining sound-shapes. Organised Sound 2 (2):107-26.

Wiener, N. 1948. Cybernetics: MIT Press, 1997. Pp107-126

22 Campbell, Murray. The Musicians Guide to Acoustics. London: Sage Publications, 1987. Print. pp. 123-125.

23 Emmerson, Simon. The Language of Electroacoustic Music. London: Macmillan Press, 1986. Print. pp.98-105

24 Cox and D’Antonio. Acoustic Absorbers and Diffusors – Theory, Design and Application. London: Spon press.Print. pp. 48-54.

25 Ripley et al. In the place of sound: architecture, music, and acoustics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Print. Pp108-110.

26 Erickson, Robert. Sound Structure in Music. Berkeley: University of California Press 1975. Print. pp. 154

27 Bregman. Auditory Scene Analysis. The perceptual organisation of sound. London: MIT Press, 1994.pp. 78-79.

28 Wade, Bonnie. Imaging sound: an ethno musicological study of music, art. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. Print.p.56

29 Wishart. Audible Design. A Plain and Easy Introduction to Practical Sound Composition. York, UK: Orpheus the Pantomime Ltd, 1994.

30 LaBelle, Brandon and Roden, Steve. Site of sound: of architecture and the ear, Volume 1. London: Errant Bodies Press, 1999. Print. Pp132-134.

31 Wishart. On Sonic Art. Ed. Simon Emmerson. UK: Harwood Academic Publishers, 1996. Print. pp 90-101.

32 Ripley et al. In the place of sound: architecture, music, and acoustics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Print.p.89

33 Thompson, Emily. The Soundscape of Modernity. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2004. Print.p.79.

[supanova_question]

Television and violence Report essay help online

The Tidusville population associates television with violence according to the statistics results. The KTDS management had earlier on received complaints over the high level of violence in the programs aired.

Nevertheless, they associated this claims with political influence, however, they did not seem genuine. Moreover, according to the statistic test results, the number of hours one spends watching the television contribute to their perception on violence.

The respondents, who watched television for about 23hours considered the programs as “not very violent”; however, from those who watched television for less than 13 hours in general, they gauged television programs from too violent to violent. In this case, violence tendencies are aroused by the time spent watching programs with violence, but 1 to 2 hours per day are ideal (Centerwall Para. 2).

However, Cline, Croft, and Courier (363) claim that children with less exposure to television programs tend to get more aroused to violence than those with high exposure.

From this claim, it can be concluded that although everybody is likely to get violent, the length that such arousal to violence lasts depends on the level of exposure to television programs. The results further showed that marital status and age had nothing to do with one’s perception on violence in television.

Therefore, it is clear that violence in the programs aired has increased, and it has little to do with political influence, despite the fact that politicians will use this factor to lure people into voting for them.

The KTDS management should react to the problem, not for the benefit of the politicians but for the whole population, since a successful business caters for the needs of all customers. The Tidusville population should be enlightened on the importance of some programs aired. Such programs may involve violence but have valuable lessons towards the end.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Recommendation Having viewed the statistical results, it is clear that the level of violence has increased in relation to television programs. Additionally, prior Chris’s assumption that these complaints could be politically mobilized is also a fact. However, for the sake of customers, the management should act fast.

First, they should reduce the programs that are related to violence during the day, since most children are present especially when schools close. These programs should be aired at night when children are asleep, since most adults understand that programs are only fictional and they can be hardly influenced by them.

The main aim of starting a business is to make profits and attract customers; therefore, the KTDS management should ensure that all its customers’ needs are catered for. Therefore, they should consider reallocating the programs to different timelines to fit the viewers.

Another strategy that the management should put in place is advertising the upcoming programs before they are aired, and insert the suitable age recommended for viewing.

The management would go an extra step by airing such programs after 9pm, as most people are asleep, and only the a few interested people will watch the programs. Since the results showed that women considered television programs more violent than men did, the management can lure women with soap operas before they air other programs.

Limitation The Pearson’s chi-square technique that was used in determining one’s perception of violence in regards to gender is favorable, as it concluded that women viewed television program more violent that men. This techniques tests goodness of fit and independence. The wilcoson rank test provides assumptions such as independence; this technique can be used as an alternative when population cannot be assumed.

However, this technique is not effective when an assumption violated. The CI on a proportion technique works well, as it indicates that a degree of confidence cannot be less than 92%, hence containing an exact proportion. In spite of working with a small number of respondents than expected, the study proved fruitful. The above techniques used vary; however, they have provided a quality rationale for this study.

We will write a custom Report on Television and violence specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Centerwall, Brandon. Television and Violence: The Scale of the Problem and Where to Go From Here. JAMA, 267(22). 1992. 09 August 2011. https://www.cursor.org/

Cline, Victor, Croft, Roger and Courier, Steven. Desensitization of Children to Television Violence. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 27(3); 360-365. 1973. 09 August 2011. https://psych.utah.edu/

[supanova_question]

Methods of Conducting Exploratory Marketing Research Report writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

The Online Focus Groups

Online Market Research Communities

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Marketing research is a very important concept. It is an element that has been utilized by many organizations in an effort to succeed in their day to day operations. Marketing research can be defined as a systematic process of gathering data that is associated with issues concerning marketing products and services, recording it and finally analyzing it for effective decision making.

Marketing research entails a process or function that brings together various components of a market for instance the consumers, the public as well as the customers to the marketer. This is made possible through appropriate information.

Information is therefore considered to be a very pivotal tool in the marketing research process since it allows for making of appropriate decisions in an organization with respect to how it ought to carry out its practices in order to satisfy its customers and hence achieve maximum productivity and profitability (McDaniel and Gates 1998).

This piece of work gives a discussion of the concept of marketing research with much emphasis being given to social media research. The main focus of this report is an examination of methods of conducting exploratory marketing research specifically using social media.

The methods of marketing research that will be discussed in details are; online focus groups and online market research communities. Case examples will also be given to enhance our understanding of the concept of social media marketing research through showing how organizations can utilize social media as market intelligence.

Discussion Marketing research is a complex process that involves more than just promotional activities. In the contemporary business world, the need for marketing research has significantly increased with increased level of competition. It is therefore necessary to have a clearly designed marketing plan in order to have a successful organization. It is always necessary to understand the customer’s needs while conducting a marketing plan.

This is however only possible through carrying out of effective marketing research, which ensures that all the market attributes are put into consideration in the process of producing products and services. This allows for customer satisfaction, an aspect that is very crucial in the growth and development of any organization. This is because customer satisfaction does not only attract new customers but also help in retaining the existing ones.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The public is a very essential element when it comes to the business world. This is because it keeps businesses on the move through providing a source of consumption of the products and services produced by the businesses. For this reason, there is need for business enterprises to be more concerned about the needs and preferences of the customers to ensure that they satisfy them.

This allows for formation of a good organization-customer relationship and loyalty, an element that is very crucial for business sustainability. Marketing research is a tool that has enabled various organizations to attain competitive advantage through the understanding of the different characteristics of customers and hence coming up with ways of appropriate means of serving them to satisfaction (Zikmund and Babin 2006).

There are various marketing research methods, each with its advantages and disadvantages. The methods are also suited for use in different situations.

This therefore necessitates that there is critical decision making in the determination of the method of marketing research to be utilized in a certain circumstance to allow for attainment of the best results possible. The basic and commonly used marketing research methods include personal interviews, observation, surveys, field trials as well as focus groups among others (Westwood 2005).

Personal interviews entail confronting the participants. Open-ended and unstructured questions are usually used to probe information from the interviewee. When personal interview are used as methods of carrying out marketing research, helpful insights into customer attitudes are attained which in turn assist in uncovering different issues that are associated with new products and service development.

A drawback that is associated with personal interviews is the fact that they are usually more subjective especially in relation to surveys and hence the results got after the analysis of the data is not statistically reliable since they do not depict a fully representative sample of the total population.

Observation on the other hand is a method that offers very accurate results in regard to customer behavior. This is because unlike other methods like personal interview and focus groups there is no interference of the customers but rather the marketer or researcher take the data in a natural setting which could not cause the customers to change behavior on realization that they are under observation.

We will write a custom Report on Methods of Conducting Exploratory Marketing Research specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This could be achieved through video taping/recording. The other method is the field trials. This involves placing new products in strategic locations or stores with an aim of testing customer response under normal selling conditions. This method is deemed to be very effective in making appropriate changes for instance enhancing the packaging of products, making modifications on products as well as adjusting prices accordingly.

Another commonly used marketing research method is focus groups. This involves a moderator leading a discussion among a group of individuals using a set of queries or topics. To allow for achievement of better results, the focus group sessions take place at neutral places to avoid any form of influence.

Each group session takes a maximum of two hours. To get significant outcomes, results from at least three groups are required (Byers and Wilcox 1991). Surveys also get a lot of utilization as marketing research method. It entails use of questionnaires to analyze a sample group from a population.

The sample should be as representative as possible to yield good results and hence the larger the sample, the more appropriate and reliable the results attained. There are various ways through which surveys are carried out for instance in-person surveys where face to face interviews are used, telephone surveys, mail surveys as well as online surveys.

All these methods are aimed at gaining insights into customers’ behavior in an effort to make the necessary adjustments in regard to development of products and services and hence increasing productivity and profitability through increased sales (Calder 1977).

Social media involves the social sites or networks where the users or members usually participate for various reasons (Brogan 2010). The realization that social media attract a significant pool of members of the public has made different companies including business organization to target them with the aim of improving their business operations.

Social media research is a technique that has gained a lot of recognition and utilization by a majority of organizations. It has received both positive as well as negative criticism. One reaction is that the marketers usually gain insights from consumers without their consent or knowledge for instance through observation.

All in all, social media type of marketing research has been deemed to be very fruitful since the ability to collect, evaluate and analyze the information gathered from this research allows business organizations to be in a good position to develop consumer insights as well as allowing better monitoring of the performance of their products in the market (Evans 2008).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Methods of Conducting Exploratory Marketing Research by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In a nut shell, social media marketing research is a kind of qualitative research. It entails a marketer engaging with online communities and having conversations. It delivers knowledge and insights through the act of listening to what different people say or perceive different brands of products.

It is concerned with being keen to small details which make up customer behavior for instance their perceptions, opinions, attitude as well as beliefs in respects to products and services offered by a given organization. It is after the gathered information is effectively analyzed that brands and products are influenced and optimized including participating in media marketing campaigns (WebProNews 2011).

Although most of the marketing research methods could be conducted using social media, there are some which are more effective and commonly used in social media research.

Some of the marketing research methods used in social media marketing research include the following: Online communities which could take the form of private and public blogs and social networks, search engine optimization (SEO) and linking research, online focus groups which take the nature of depth interviews, keyword search analysis as well as content monitoring services and text analysis software.

All these methods are aimed at coming up with as exhaustive information about the customers as possible in an effort to optimizing the products development for the sake of allowing for maximum customer satisfaction (Gillin and Schwartzman 2011).

For the sake of this assignment, I will look at two methods in details. They are; online focus groups and online market research communities.

The Online Focus Groups Online focus groups could be defined as methods of qualitative marketing research which is more inclined to internet technology as well as extensive computer connectivity. Secure web sites are the meeting points of observers, respondents and the moderators. Commonly, an online focus group consists of about 10 to 30 respondents, a number of observers and one moderator.

In these groups, the moderator is charged with the responsibility of posting questions after which the respondents are expected to post their comments and opinions on the posted questions. The observers on the other hand take note of the proceedings.

Online focus groups are divided into real-time and bulletin boards. In bulletin board group, the moderator, observers and respondents are not required to meet at the same time as it is the case for real-time online groups. A secure web site is the meeting point. The moderator sets rules and regulations and posts the queries. The respondents do not see the observers hence the probability of sincere responses, away from pretence.

Online focus groups have been deemed to be very effective when it comes to concept testing. The respondents are shown concepts (advertising or new products concepts) online, after which they give their reactions.

This way, a lot of issues could be gathered for instance product awareness and preferences, their purchase as well as use. Online depth interviews are also tools used in online focus groups and are most appropriate when getting views and opinions from busy experts.

There are various benefits associated with online focus groups. They are able to probe information on sensitive and personal issue that could be useful in decision making. They are also used to supplement other marketing research methods for achievement of better results.

Another advantage is that online focus groups method provides written qualitative data since the respondents post their opinions, perceptions, and attitudes online.

There is also the aspect of posting images on online blogs for easy interpretation and understanding. Facial expressions of the respondents can also be viewed via web-cam. The online focus groups are also fast and convenient as the participants do not need to travel but are rather connected via computers and the internet.

Online focus groups also have some drawbacks. They are only appropriate for respondents who are well vast with computer and internet use. They also require a reliable internet connection and they are therefore not ideal in areas where internet connection is limited.

Another problem is the verification of the identity of the respondents. The online focus groups should only be used when the moderator can easily verify the respondent’s identity so as to ensure that the responses come from the expected and targeted respondents (Morgan 1988).

Online Market Research Communities This is the second method of discussion. It involves a setting where a targeted group of participants come together to discuss research related topics on a regular basis from the discussions, reports and recommendations, which are attained and they help in decision making.

Market research online communities are a product of social networking and community tools and online qualitative capabilities. The market research online communities provide relatively cheap, fast and up to date insights on customers’ needs and products performance. This is because communities can cut the time cycle and the participants are observed on an ongoing basis (Sterne 2010)

One identifies a targeted audience over some time, get ideas from prospective customers, evaluate customer experiences, carry out qualitative tracking of a brand alongside competitive brands, undertake exploratory research and finally refine product concepts on a continuous basis. They help in gaining insights on products, services, advertising, promotion, positioning, and branding and customer experiences among others.

When comparing and contrasting market research online communities and online focus groups, the former are better in terms of cost and speed. Market research online communities are also more objective than online focuses groups. However, market research online communities require a lot of skills and coordination to gather appropriate data (Stewart and Williams 2005).

Case examples of the application of social media marketing research include the use of market research online communities in the Communispace Corporation which develops, administers and facilitates private online communities for organizations in the United States and other parts of the world. Groundswell is another organization in the UK that utilizes market research online communities.

Peanut Lab, Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center and E-Rewards companies are other examples of companies that have utilized social media as a marketing research tool. Social media has been used by organizations to gain a competitive advantage through marketing intelligence.

Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center was for instance able to gather important information through its community in regard to why patients prefer some facilities to others hence refuting the conclusion that was made about choice of a facility based on reputation of the center (DeVault 2011).

Conclusion From the above discussion, it is evident that marketing research is one of the most important activities in an organization. This is more so in the contemporary world where the market has been characterized by a very high level of competition. The main goal of any organization is to maximize its sales. This is because the level of sales is the major criteria which determine the profitability of an organization.

Therefore, marketing is of great importance to an organization. There are various marketing research methods each suited for some situations. The different marketing research methods are also associated with some benefits as well as drawbacks and hence the need to choose the most appropriate method for a given situation.

Marketing research that is conducted through social media has been associated with some notable advantages over other means. For instance, it allows the researchers/marketers to have exhaustive data for analysis, from a vast number of media users who would otherwise not be available via other means.

The fact that social media research can be attained through interacting with the social media users as well as through listening to the social media research chatter or else a combination of both means is also advantageous. It also facilitates achievement of a variety of research project goals with ease.

However, social media research is mostly suited for usage studies, attitudinal studies, custom research as well as media tracking studies whose main focus is on the distinctive attributes or characteristics of a given social media platform. This does not however disqualify it from use in other areas in any way.

Reference List Brogan, C. 2010. Social Media 101: Tactics and Tips to Develop Your Business Online. New Jersey, John Wiley and Sons.

Byers, Y. P. and Wilcox, R.J. 1991. Focus Groups: A Qualitative Opportunity for Researchers. The Journal of Business communication. 28:1.

Calder, B.J. 1977. Focus Groups and the Nature of Qualitative Marketing Research. Journal of Marketing Research, 14, 353-364.

DeVault, G. 2011. Social Media Research. Web.

Evans, D. 2008. Social Media Marketing: An Hour A Day. New York, John Wiley and Sons.

Gillin, P. and Schwartzman, W. 2011. Social Marketing to the Business Customer: Listen to Your B2B Market, Generate Major Account Leads, and Build Client Relationships. New York, John Wiley and Sons.

McDaniel, D.C and Gates, H.R. 1998. Marketing Research Essentials. 2nd Ed. New York, Taylor

[supanova_question]

Why Study Public Administration? Research Paper college essay help: college essay help

Public administration is an academic discipline that deals with the implementation of public policy by government workers. It also involves management of programs in the public framework. It operates by managing every arm of public service in the central government, states and regional levels.

Therefore, it contributes to shaping the future of a state. Kettl and Fessler (2009, pp. 53), note that public administration is a secondary field branching from the discipline of political science

One of the major reasons for creating a separate discipline of public administration and graduate schools of public policy was that public administration had methodologically given poor records. Although public administration has made forceful efforts within the field of study, it has purely specialized to public governance.

The problems that public administrators can address today categorically differ from the earlier theory problems addressed by public administration. Public administration as a discipline narrows the student’s scope of learning to public management study only.

Graduate schools of public policy enable students internationally to pursue foundation courses and research in public policy research, international trade and management in public sector. The public policy program covers a wide range of elements including economics, statistics, political science, international developments, sociology and public finance.

While public administration applies within a single disciple, graduate schools of public policy apply a wide scope of other disciples to the public domain. These disciplines may include management information systems, project management, organization behavior, operations research and quantitative analysis.

Public administrators should enroll for this program since masters in public administration equips government employees with the required managerial skills. The managerial skills recruit them to serve in higher rank positions within governmental and non-governmental organizations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The program equips public administrators with the knowledge for defining roles, principles and growth of public administration. It also helps in defining the implementation and management strategies in the public sector, together with the connection between legislators and organization management. The program also provides the civil servants with the expertise to carry out budgetary and financial management processes.

Masters in public administration equips public administrators with knowledge in political science, strategic managerial skills and policy analysis methods. Although this program has been of equal help to the civil servants, it has a drawback since it focuses majorly on the study of international affairs instead of constitutional affairs, which is more important in governance (Kettl

[supanova_question]

A Plan for Positive Influence Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Attitudes and Emotions

Personality and Values

Plan for Positive Influence

Conclusion

References

Introduction Organization is a collection of diverse people with varied attitudes, emotions, personalities, values, religious, and political orientations, who share a common working environment and pursue similar organizational objectives. Diversity among organizational members and management strategies shapes organizational culture and behavior, which subsequently determines the realization of the stipulated objectives.

The prime objective, of an organization or a team, is to achieve certain goals by effectively mobilizing diverse individuals with different attitudes, emotions, personalities, and values. Thus, diversity amongst members within an organization compels the management to build organizational culture and behavior, which are imperative in achieving desired goals and objectives.

Smith (2009) argues that, organizational culture or behavior is its lifeblood for it determines both short-term and long-term development goals in an organization (p.1). Therefore, management has to recognize the diversity of organizational members and devise a plan that influences the development of organizational culture and behavior positively.

Since organizational members have diverse attributes, how do emotions, personalities, and values influence behavior, and how can managers plan to utilize these attributes effectively in influencing motivation, satisfaction, and performance of a team?

Attitudes and Emotions Attitudes and emotions are underlying attributes among team members since each member has unique preferences of working environment and form of tasks. Fundamentally, the nature of attitudes and emotions that team members have determine relationships within a team and subsequently influence team’s culture and behavior, which are critical factors in enhancing the effectiveness of performance.

According to Harris (2005), effectiveness of a team depends on social processes that enhance positive attitudes and emotions, and improve capacity of team members to perform tasks cooperatively (p.2). This means that social processes are integral in defining relationships among team members, which constitute team behavior.

A team consists of members with diverse attitudes and emotions that need harmonization through social processes, which recognize and integrate these attributes into team’s culture and behavior.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since social processes determine the harmonization of varied attitudes and emotions among team members, poor management strategies that do not consider social integration influence development of team’s culture and behavior negatively.

Team’s behavior intricately links with individual attitudes and emotions. Relationships among team members reflect how managers have integrated diverse attitudes and emotions in shaping a team’s behavior or culture. Ashraf (2010) argues that, attitudes and emotions are some of the factors that influence groups’ dynamics and eventually determine organizational behavior (p.158).

Organizational behavior is a product of varied attitudes and emotions of organizational members, who interact cooperatively, while pursing common objectives. For an organization to perform effectively and efficiently, it must consider integrating varied attitudes and emotions of its members in development of organizational behavior.

In this case, a team’s behavior is a product of diverse attitudes and emotions of the different team members. Thus, individual attitudes and emotions considerably determine a team’s behavior through the complex social interactions that occur within a team.

Personality and Values Individual members of a team have different personalities and values, which determine their contribution in a team. Given that an organization or a team has common objectives to achieve, different personalities and values of members hamper the cooperative achievement of the desired objectives.

According to Smith (2009), personalities and values, that individual members of an organization possess, reflect the overall behavior in an organization (p.4). Since members of a team have varied personalities and values, the management teams have a considerable responsibility of ensuring that appropriate personality attributes dominate organizational behavior.

Personalities and values shape a team’s behavior significantly because attributes that managers uphold form the basis of an organization’s behavior. Managers need to act in accordance to policies stipulated in vision and mission strategic plan to achieve organizational goals.

We will write a custom Essay on A Plan for Positive Influence specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Since managers are leaders in shaping organizational behavior, they act as role models. A leader should have leadership personality; moreover, s/he should set out essential values for subordinate members to follow, hence building organizational behavior. Harris (2005) explains that, organizational behavior consists of values, beliefs, experiences, and norms that determine how organizational members interact (p.4).

Therefore, leadership personality and organizational values have significant impacts on shaping diverse personalities and values of organizational members, and ultimately determine development of organizational behavior.

Plan for Positive Influence Team members have different motivational needs as reflected in varied satisfaction and performance under different management styles. According to theory Y of management, human resources are invaluable resources that an organization can optimize through motivation. Application of theory Y in the management of the team will create an enabling working environment, where team members feel motivated and satisfied.

Ashraf (2010) argues that, management has considerable effects on the working environment and in shaping organizational behavior (p.162). As a leader of a team, it is imperative to ensure that management style motivates and enhances satisfaction and performance of the team members throughout.

In addition to motivating employees through application of theory Y, team leader can also enhance cooperative performance of project tasks. For team members to cooperate while performing various tasks of the project, they should share common values, attitudes, emotions and beliefs, which are central in building a team’s behavior.

According Harris (2005), vigorous relationship among organizational members is integral in leadership development and cooperative participation (p.8). Leadership development, among team members, enhances delegation of responsibilities thus alleviates management burden of the team leader.

Therefore, to enhance concerted efforts of team members, a team leader needs to ensure the harmonization of attitudes, emotions, values, and beliefs as factors of team’s behavior. Hence, vigorous relationship is a fundamental requirement in enhancing the effectiveness of the team.

When a team has appropriate leadership that creates a contributive working environment and vigorous relationship among team members, the rewarding of individuals is particularly beneficial. Rewarding of individuals is motivating because gifts are specific to roles played by individuals. Naturally, individuals, who have broad responsibilities, need more rewards as compared those who have fewer responsibilities.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Plan for Positive Influence by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Smith (2009) argues that, managers need to identify employees’ needs, interests, and values so that they can customize ways of rewarding their performance (p.5).

Rewarding team members in this manner motivates them and enhances their satisfaction and performance. If compliments and rewards become part of a team’s behavior of recognizing roles of its members, the team will exceptionally meet its objectives at the end of the year.

Conclusion Given that organizations or teams comprise of members with varied attitudes, emotions, personalities, and values, management teams have a challenging role in the harmonization of these attributes in building organizational behavior.

Likewise, team leaders are facing a similar challenge in ensuring that different attributes of team members harmoniously fit into a team’s behavior and motivate individual members leading to enhanced satisfaction and performance. Central to enhancing motivation, satisfaction, and performance of team members is the development of a team’s behavior.

Therefore, to increase the team’s motivation, satisfaction and performance in the project, team leaders need to consider using effective management styles according to theory Y, encourage cooperative performance of tasks, and reward team members accordingly.

References Ashraf, T. (2010). Organizational Behavior. Journal of Business Management, 6(9), 155-168.

Harris, C. (2005). An Overview of Team Effectiveness. Organizational Dynamics, 1-11.

Smith, T. (2009). Culture, Teams and Safety Management: Preparing for the New Management Model. Business Management, 3, 1-7.

[supanova_question]

Operant Conditioning Report essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Positive Reinforcement

Positive Punishment

Negative reinforcement

Negative Punishment

Work Cited

Introduction Skinner brought about the concept of operant conditioning to elaborate the influence of the environment in determining an individual’s behavior. Skinner asserts that a particular behavior is a product of the expected consequence. Most of the time the behavior is a voluntary one but in some instances, operant conditioning can be used to modify involuntary behavior.

Positive Reinforcement In the context of drivers slowing down once they see a police vehicle doing radar in their vicinity to avoid a speeding ticket, Skinners principle of operant conditioning applies. In this scenario, the police car acts as a positive reinforcement to the behavior of driving within the speed limit. Every time the speeding drivers see a police car they are forced to reduce their speed so as to avoid getting a speeding ticket.

The police car doing radar ahead is the condition that acts in modifying the voluntary behavior of reducing the speed limit by the drivers. Every time the drivers come in the vicinity of a police car doing radar, their behavior is influenced and as such reduces their speed to avoid a speeding ticket.

The overall reward comes in when the driver’s license is due and they are not required to undertake a driving test due to having received a speeding ticket. This reward reinforces good behavior among drivers and as such they will always drive within the speed limit to avoid a speeding ticket. The police in this case act as the positive reinforcement.

Positive Punishment The issuance of a speeding ticket to those drivers found driving above the speeding limit acts as a positive punisher to reduce the tendency of drivers over speeding. According to Skinner’s principle of operant conditioning, positive punishment decreases the performance of an undesired behavior.

Every time an unwanted behavior occurs, one receives a punishment and as such the punishment deters a repeat of the same behavior (Coon and Mitterer 234).

In this scenario, once a driver receives a speeding ticket (positive punisher), he/she will be reluctant to drive over the speed limit (condition). The act of slowing down in the presence of a police car doing radar reduces the anticipated punishment and encourages driving within the speed limit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Negative reinforcement Negative reinforcement is observed when an unpleasant condition is abolished or extinguished so as to augment the occurrence of a particular desired behavior. In this context, whenever there is no police car doing radar in the vicinity, there is an increased chance that the drivers will drive above the speeding limit.

The absence of the police car is the negative reinforce for driving above the speed limit. In addition, the drivers will not be afraid of receiving any speeding ticket since the police will not be around to issue them. The absence of the police car will reinforce the behavior of driving above the speed limit.

Negative Punishment Negative punishment is a concept of operant conditioning brought about by Skinner to explain the reduction in particular behaviors as a result of removal or denial of a particular condition. In this context, the withdrawal of ones driving license by the police and being banned to drive acts as a negative punishment to deter drivers from driving above the speed limit.

Work Cited Coon, Dennis, and Mitterer, John. Psychology: A Journey. Stamford: Cengage Learning, 2010.

[supanova_question]

Medical Ethics: Case of Jane and Phyllis Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

The Philosophical Approach to Be Used For the Case The philosophical approach that seems to be appropriate for this case is Consequentialism/utilitarianism theory. This philosophical approach is concerned mainly with the outcomes of a particular action as the basis for judging whether the action is right or wrong. The consequentialist theory holds that the moral judgment about a given action can be determined from the consequences of the action (Consequentialism, n.d).

It has relation to utilitarianism, a theory that was popularized in the eighteenth and the nineteenth centuries by Jeremy Bentham (Mill, 2002, p.4). It emphasized on the resulting happiness of a given course of action. In respect of utilitarianism and consequentialism, a moral action will be one that produces the maximum good for all the subjects involved.

The given case involves a scenario in which different medical practitioners are in a state of dilemma on the best action to take following a medical conditions of two of their clients. An analysis of the possible consequences of the alternative actions to be taken by the practitioners can enable them make the appropriate decision.

In this particular case, there are two main concerns to be considered. There is need to preserve the privacy or confidentiality of an individual by not revealing her medical condition to the relatives. On the other hand, the revelation of this medical condition may be of help to another relative who suspects to have a similar problem. If the first medical condition is not revealed, the other victim is likely to undergo an operation.

The controversy here is that in the event that the operation is performed while the victim was not affected, then it would have been a waste. Besides, it is not guaranteed the operation will completely prevent the occurrences of the medical condition in the victim’s lifetime. The analysis of all these outcomes can provide the practitioners with the best approach to resolve the dilemma.

The Narrator of the Case The narrator of this case is Anneke Lucassen, a clinical geneticist. The case comprises different stories that the clinical geneticist encountered in his profession while providing clinical services to different families. Anneke provides a collection of stories by different people all of which revolve around the same subject of breast cancer. There is a story by Jane, her other family members have suffered and died of breast cancer.

Jane is worried that the condition could be related to the genes in their lineage and that she may as well suffer the same. Her husband suggests that she seeks a medical intervention now that such thought disturbs her emotions. There is also the story by Phyllis, an aunt to Jane who apparently is suffering the same problem.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Phyllis is worried about the odds that she would encounter in the event that her condition is revealed to the other family members. In particular, she does not have good relation with Jane following a row with the latter’s mother before her death.

Phyllis laments that she is fed up of being blamed for anything that is not in order in their family. She detaches herself completely from the family members and holds that the other family members have no business knowing her test results.

The story by the general practitioner reveals Phyllis’s stance on her confidentiality. Coincidentally, Jane and Phyllis are attended to by close practitioners who can share ideas. The GP attending to Phyllis support her need for confidentiality even though this information can be of help to Jane.

The oncologist’s story provides the developments that are being registered on genetics and oncology, and illustrates how the advances will prevent future similar dilemmas. The author also gives a story by a geneticist from whom Jane sought for genetic test for breast cancer. The geneticist provides more details on such kinds of test and the information that Jane did not have concerning the test.

The narrator then provides his own evaluation of the case. Anneke observes that this particular case is typical of the different scenarios encountered in medical ethics. Situations of dilemma often occur in the field whereby the confidentiality of a victim is to be considered against the benefits of disclosing this information.

However, for this case, Anneke is submissive to the possible claim that the dilemma here results from lack of proper mechanisms for genetic tests. He admits that the problem arises because the technicalities of the genetic tests are still in their preliminary stages.

The narrator hopes that in the event that these mechanisms are developed properly, there will be no need to seek information from the relatives of a particular an individual in order to carry out a test for breast or ovarian cancer.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Medical Ethics: Case of Jane and Phyllis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A moral subject in any given setting refers to an individual who is to receive ethical consideration (Peter, 2004). In such a case, the individual has his or her rights and duties. The individuals are also to be held responsible for the actions that they take in the event that the actions are conflicting with the rights of the others. In this respect, Jane, Phyllis and all the professionals involved here can be regarded as moral subjects in some sense.

All the moral subjects in this case are represented fairly. There is a concern to have Jane receive proper medical attention. The health specialists do not want to her to undergo unnecessary operation until the effectiveness of such operation is established. The right to privacy of Phyllis is also presented in the case.

She narrates how she feels about her family members and that she would not want to share her test results with the family members. The practitioners are, of course, in the central position for the ethical consideration as the ultimate decision-makers. They will be held responsible for the actions that they take. The case presents the views of the different practitioners as to the course of action that would be appropriate.

At the first encounter with this case, an instinct in us tells as that something needs to be done in order to help Jane in her situation. We tend to develop an assumption that life has meaning for some individuals more than it does for the others. The adverse health consequences that Phyllis may experience do not seem to appeal to our intuitions.

This is contrary to the natural perception that all individuals derive equal meaning out of life. The assumptions are supported by the emphasis put on the situation as involving a lot of dilemma. The position of the oncologist is that it is inappropriate to consider the effects that the tests will have on all the family members before performing them.

The Relationships Developed In This Case Power relationship occurs where an individual has authority over the decisions that another individual can make. The latter is to be submissive to the requirements of the authority even if he were in a capacity to do otherwise. In the given case, Phyllis appears to have power over the general practitioners and subsequently to Jane.

The respect that the practitioners have for her confidentiality has presented them from proceeding with any tests on Jane even though they have very relevant information. The geneticist feels that Jane should be told the medical condition of Phyllis and then Phyllis be informed of this disclosure. However, they are still barred from this and they now wish for a restructure of the guidelines.

On the other hand, caring relationship often occur between healthcare specialist (nurse) and the clients. It involves provision of care to some ailing of individual by the nurses or by other family members in the case of home-based care. Individuals who have some ill health and are in dire need of help tend to develop this relationship quite rapidly (Bevis, p.127).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Medical Ethics: Case of Jane and Phyllis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In this case, caring relationships are seen between Jane and Phyllis, and their respective general practitioners. Such a relationship is also seen when Phyllis cares for her mother and sister until the two die of breast cancer.

In the normal setting, the members of a given family may easily share information about a genetic situation. The members of the family have the mutual understanding sharing this information can be of help to all the members, whether they have been affected in some way or not. The situation is different when the members of a family are in conflict as provided in this case.

It should be noted that the proper predictive tests for this particular medical condition is effective if information is available about the genetic changes that have been observed in that family. Thus, there is need to seek other details from family members who are willing to reveal their conditions. The medical case does not focus on the lineage of Jane’s uncle.

Great Uncle Stan is still alive and he does not have bad relations with Jane. His side of the story is completely ignored and attention is focused onto Phyllis who proves to be of no help to Jane. Information from the medical condition of his daughters could be helpful in deciding whether Jane should undergo the predictive tests as well as the operation.

The Counter-Arguments and Ethical Principles Applicable In the Case This case invokes a series of counter-arguments that involve ethical considerations. It would be argued that the practitioners had the ability to perform the tests and operations regardless of the effects that such move would have on the given subjects. To come to a better decision, the practitioners are to be guided by certain ethical principles. These include consequentialism and utilitarianism, approaches which have some relation.

Consequentialism involves examining the overall outcomes of a given action and asserts that the action with highest positive outcomes is the most ethical one. However, those opposed to this theory argue that it “undermines the integrity of the agent’s life” (Mulgan, 2005, p.15).

On their part, utilitarian hold that an action will be considered right if it produces more of pleasure and happiness while reducing pain and suffering (utilitarian.org, n.d; Scarre, 1996, p.2). It is seen as a form of consequentialism as it involves maximization of utility.

It does not discriminate against persons on whatever bases. Utilitarianism requires that the agents should be impartial as to whether the resulting happiness is for himself or for the others (Mill, 2006, p.28). In this case, utilitarianism is evidenced when the practitioners cannot deny Phyllis pleasure and happiness for Jane’s happiness, hence the dilemma.

Other philosophers also believed that consequentialism is not distinct from the deontological approach that emphasized on duty. They considered duty as the actions that produced overall good (Tully, 2006, p.13). The consequentialist approach can help resolve the dilemma through a cross-sectional analysis of the possible outcomes in this case.

There have been ethical codes that given the operations of medical practitioners for several centuries (Breen et al, 1997, p.3). The practitioners need to follow these codes. The general medical council (GMC) guidelines require that the practitioners break the confidentiality of their clients only in an event that it is very necessary.

The GP observes that there is no enough evidence to show that the prophylactic bilateral mastectomies will reduce Jane’s chance of dying form breast cancer (Case Study). Besides, the practitioner also observes that operation involves a kind of surgery that can be very harmful to the subject.

It would then be against the professional ethics to break this confidentiality. The possible outcomes would be that the medical practitioners face charges for violating the rights of their clients and breaching the provisions of the GMC. Perhaps, they would lose their jobs because of such a move. The client might also suffer the adverse consequences of unnecessary operations.

In order for Jane, to undergo the operation, it is necessary that the test results of Phyllis be revealed. Even if Jane were not informed of her aunt’s condition, carrying out the operations in her would enable her to conclude that her aunt suffers the disease.

She had been informed of the need to know health history of her affected relatives in order to have an effective operation. On her part, Phyllis is worried that in the event that her condition is revealed, more blames would be vested on her by her family members. This would give her more stress and negatively affect her poor health status.

The only possible positive consequence of performing the operation lies in the probability that this operation will prevent Jane from suffering the disease. However, there is lack of certainty for this possibility. Besides, the general practitioner suggests regular screening as a possible means of managing Jane’s case. Perhaps this would help until her ailing aunt succumbs to the disease, after which the condition might be revealed.

On the other had, the move has adverse negative effects to Phyllis and the medical practitioners. It threatens Phyllis’s life as well the professional careers of the practitioners.

Thus, the possible negative results seem to overweigh the positive outcomes should the test be carried out on Jane. The utilitarian economic justification is also evident since such a move may bring pain and suffering that are more pronounced than the associated pleasure and happiness.

Other Stakeholders The narrator has touched on other important individuals who will be affected in one way or the other by the actions to be taken in this case. Jane’s husband is more concerned on the emotional state of his wife. The decisions to be taken by the practitioners will also affect him due to this concern.

Jane’s daughters are significant stakeholders since their mother’s condition may reflect on their condition as well in the event she might test positive for the disease. However, none of these stakeholders can be advocated for in preference to the others. The stated principles will call for an equal consideration of their needs as long as they all amount to overall positive outcomes.

This final position tends to shift from an initial perception that attempted to advocate for one subject while breaching the rights of the other. This position, which is usually held by the majority at the first instinct, suffices to be challenged.

Reference List Bevis, E., 1989. Curriculum Building in Nursing: A Process. Third edition. Sudbury: Jones

[supanova_question]

Motivation and Performance Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Why Motivation is Needed

Motivational Methods

Discussion and Conclusion

References

Introduction Workers are a fundamental component of every organization. These people are the primary machinery of the business and they are indispensible since they carry out the tasks necessary for the business or company. For this reason, people can be categorized as a crucial asset in every organization. They give the business a competitive edge over its rivals in the market and enable it to succeed in any given field.

Without the workforce, the business or organization would not exist to begin with. From this realization of the importance of the human factor, all organizations have a Human Resource (HR) department that is charged with handling issuing concerning the members of the organizations.

Personnel in the HR field assert that there are a number of factors which affect the performance of the individual in the organization.

This assertion is backed by research by many experts in psychology. One factor which stands out is motivation. It is therefore of great importance for the organization to know how to motivate its workforce. This paper will discuss the importance of motivation in the workplace and give various ways that can be used to motivate workers.

Why Motivation is Needed One fact about human beings is that they cannot be counted on to work on the same task consistently over a period of time and give uniform good results. This may be attributed to the fact that humans tend to tire after some time which is the difference between humans and machines. People experience a “burn out” from working for long periods especially if it is work that the individual finds routine or is unenthusiastic about. Because of this, every worker needs to be motivated in order to perform his/her work effectively.

By definition, motivation is the process of stimulating people to action to accomplish desired goals. Motivation entails providing a person with reasons or incentives to carry out the required tasks. A motivated person is one who is inspired to achieve the desired goal. The value of motivation cannot be overstated and motivation is of core value in all aspects of life.

Two main kinds of motivation exist namely: intrinsic and extrinsic motivation. In intrinsic motivation, the person is internally motivated and they perform the desired tasks out of their own pleasure or desire. On the other hand, extrinsic motivation occurs as a result of external factors such as promise of reward or need to avoid punishment by the individual (Pan 2010).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a process, motivation involves engaging a person such that they show desirable behavior or perform certain required action. Motivation is an interdisciplinary issue and it is studied in: psychology, economics, political science, education and sociology. Denhardt et al. (2008, p.146) asserts that motivation acts on the knowledge of “what causes people to behave as they do”.

Interestingly, motivation is an internal state which is responsible for making people to behave in specific ways so as to achieve certain goals and purposes. The outward manifestations are observable to people but motivation itself remains internal (Denhardt et al. 2008, p.147).

The work place is one of the places where motivation is highly desirable. Coming up with effective ways to motivate the employees mostly poses as a major challenge for the employers. This is in spite of the fact that highly motivated employees are key to the success of the business. Highly motivated workers exhibit greater work satisfaction and as such, their work performance is higher (North 2010).

People in the work place therefore need to be constantly motivated to ensure that work is done efficiently. However, the people making up the workforce differ greatly from each other and as such; any one single motivational tactic may not work universally. Every person has varying reasons for working and their desires differ to a large extent.

Even so, it can be universally claimed that we all work because we need to achieve something that can only be obtained through working. These needs may include: salary, personal fulfillment, professional growth (Heathfield 2010). These needs can be used as the basis for motivating the employee to perform good work.

Pan (2010) states that things such as salary, favorable work conditions, safety and security, benefits and policies can be used to motivate the employee. While it is generally agreed that the employee must be satisfied with the remunerations they are receiving from the company, there are many other facts that affect the performance of the employees and therefore cause unsatisfactory performance (Igalens

[supanova_question]

Primal Leadership Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Summary of the content The book ‘Primal leadership’ is written to portray how emotional leaders can use their strategies to increase productivity of their employees rather than autocratic and dictatorship leadership. It depicts the manner in which successful leaders respond on emotional grounds to the desires of their employees, while at the same time it shows how dissonant leaders can be disadvantaged in propelling the success of a company.

The authors of the book go on to explain how it can be very difficult to cope with a miserable leader, and at the same time explains how it can be easy for an emotional intelligent leader to come out of problems.

According to Goleman, D., etal, “dissonant leaders lack either one of the domains of emotional intelligence; social or personal domain” (p.14). In order to come out of this crisis the authors propose that, “dissonant leaders can improve their personal competence through self awareness and self management, while they can improve their social competence through social awareness and relationship management.”

The theme of the book is to educate leaders to use flexible leadership skills that are intended to motivate employees using approachable skills that include training, democracy and involvement.

The book has been structured in three sections that present the processes of developing primal leadership in the first part, then the process of making a leader in section two and the final part talks about building an emotionally intelligent environment in an organization. In the first chapter, subjective scenarios and theories of leadership have been discussed.

The second part discusses the process of making leaders by processes that start with self assessment and the desire for self learning. Goleman, D., etal, describe three steps through which primal leadership can be achieved that include, “realizing their bad habits, using better techniques and rehearsing for any opportunities that come their way”.

This implies that, “True leaders are made and not born.” The last chapter is a discussion of emotionally intelligent organizations. They describe the difference in leadership in organizations headed by dissonant leaders and emotionally intelligent leaders.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Why the content of the book is important for leaders This is an important book for leaders though the facts discussed have not yet been practically proven to work in an organization. It educates leaders to use emotional approaches when dealing with their subjects. By reading this book, the reader would be able to distinguish between tried and right management, benefits of motivation in an organization and leadership theories in a different perspective.

For instance, the book states that leadership starts with a vision that enables one to have shared goals and those leaders should provide coaching in a democratic manner. Dominant leaders can learn from the 360 feedback model and rehearsal of necessary behaviors needed for different opportunities.

The book states that the past leaders who were successful earned it because they were emotionally attached to their employees. This is an approach that current leaders should use to understand their employees. Managers will learn to drive their emotions positively so as to satisfy the desires of every person in the organization.

They also get to understand that if they use their emotions negatively, they would be exerting dissonance thereby suppressing emotional basis that allow people to excel. Furthermore, managers would learn that practicing primal leadership drive the emotions of employees in the right direction.

According the Authors, “Affective Events Theory provides a conceptual basis for understanding emotions at work. It proposes that effective events create moods or emotions that mediate job attitudes and behaviors.” This theory helps leaders to understand the importance of reading moods of employees so that they can predict behaviors of employees.

Important emotional component of leadership The authors of the book propose that the following aspects ought to be integrated so as to have a good leader; leading from the heart, feelings and thought. Leaders need to be intelligent so as to handle tasks and shortcomings in the job.

But, being intelligent alone is not enough for a leader; he or she should be able to motivate, counsel, respond and listen. The manner in which we act is dependent on the design of the brain and can be related as follows.

We will write a custom Essay on Primal Leadership specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More ‘Our brains are like an open loop.’ Our interactions with other people enable us develop emotional stability. In the open loop system, signals from an individual can trigger hormonal reactions and immunity of another person. This implies that other people can change our emotions. The continuous interaction of open loops among members of a group brings on experiences of several people.

Influence of negative emotions makes people to be disrupted in the work place drawing away attention from work. Positive emotions on the other side enable people to be motivated and work to achieve maximum work output. A good feeling is like a lubricant to the brain that makes it understand complex information.

In a case study of sixty two chief executives, it was found out that a positive mood of the management team led to cooperation and team playing which translated to better results. A company that is led by leaders with negative moods performed poorly.

Importance of reading emotions The definitions of dissonance in music imply a non rhythmic or harsh sound. One characteristic of dissonant leadership is that it produces employees who are emotionally unstable. They often abuse employees and use manipulative techniques even though they are not aware they are doing it. This behavior is destructive to organizations because it would lead to failure in accomplishing their mission.

This is opposite with resonant leaders who are attached to their people’s feelings and drive them in a positive way. According to the authors, resonance is acquired naturally by intelligent leaders. Their emotional being is felt by the people they lead. A good example is when something bad happens that people are not happy about; these leaders would express emotions for the group.

People would be left with a feeling that they are taken care for and understood. People in the organization feel some comfort in their minds, exchange ideas, make collective decisions and implement actions promptly. This connection in emotional way makes more sense as it makes people work for a common goal hence, success of an organization.

Dimensions of emotional intelligence The authors of the book describe four domains of emotional intelligence and eighteen competencies that are unique with them. Although they propose that leaders should possess these competencies for primal leadership, an outstanding leader does not have all of them.

The first domain is self awareness. Under this domain, the competence of emotional self evaluation is addressed. This is where an individual evaluates himself and adjusts his behaviors to make sensible decisions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Primal Leadership by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Other competencies under this domain are self confidence and precise self evaluation. Self management is another domain which comprise the following competencies; flexibility, emotions personal control, transparency and being optimistic. The other domains proposed by the authors are social awareness and relationship management.

Leadership styles The best performing leaders act according to some distinct leadership styles. The leadership styles proposed in the book include the following: Visionary leadership, where a leader is to tell a group where they are going, but not how they would get there. Leaders should give people an opportunity to propose means by which they can achieve their goals.

Coaching is another style leaders should adopt. Coaching is the art of teaching or training people in new areas. Through coaching people can understand their weaknesses and strengths and it helps people improve their career expectations. Leaders can also adopt a democratic style of leadership to be successful. In this type of leadership, leaders are ready to listen and involve their subjects in decision making.

Leadership by affiliation is another style through which leaders use friendly interactions to promote harmony in the work place. In addition pacesetting leadership demands that the leader sets excellent examples to be followed by employees.

This style of leadership can only be applied in places that they can suit and not all situations. Finally, commanding as a style of leadership demands that the subjects obey commands from the leader.

Developing emotionally intelligent leaders The authors of the book argue that, the motive to learn depends on individuals’ brain. They add that for one to adopt good leadership skills, has to practice and repeat continuously good leadership traits. This is because neurons that are used become used to them and become stronger with time. For development of emotional leadership, two approaches are proposed in the book.

First, is self directed learning in which an individual is to nurture the behavior that they have or desire to be, which requires that one to identify who he are before proceeding. The main theme of self directional learning is to use change required for emotionally intelligent leaders.

Motivation to change Change begins when one discovers who they are. By connecting with your own desires about life guides an individual to know who they are in life. If you were to imagine what you would want to be in twenty years from now and list your strategies for accomplishing it, you would find guiding principles for your life.

By asking yourself what you want to become and accomplish before you die will help you explore new opportunities in life. Look at the ideal person that you desire to be then compare it with your real life.

After a close examination of the later, create a practical plan that will help you acquire leadership skills. After planning, implement your strategies and seek support from trustworthy relationships. People are very helpful for leadership development.

Building emotionally intelligence in organizations As discussed above, change in a leader is necessary, but for the whole organization too. There is need to initiate parallel transformations in organizations that people work. In cases where there is no harmony, groups of people start changing when they realize their nature of work. They have to understand each other’s individual differences then define their vision.

The book states that group decision making plays an important role in the success of an organization. When leaders ignore decisions of groups, they do it at a great risk. Group intelligence therefore displays the traits of emotional intelligence in an organization.

Work Cited Goleman, D., etal, (2002) Primal leadership: Realizing the power of emotional intelligence. Harvard: Harvard Business School.

[supanova_question]

Types of employee incentive plans Coursework cheap essay help

Incentive plans These are plans set up by the employer to motivate the employees in an effort to boost their production and performance. The incentive plans help make the employees feel as part and parcel of the business thus making them work hard. There are many types of incentive plans that are useful in making the employees attached to the company. The incentives come in different forms and can either be stock options or profit sharing.

Stock Options The stock option incentive plans are plans that the employer makes to offer the employees with a chance to make investments in to the company stocks. The employees purchase part of the business stock, which acts as a motivator to work hard to make the company or business more productive, than when they are not part of the business. The stock offer gives the employees to hold a real stake of shares in the business.

The employees get the chance of sharing the benefits from his or her work as part of the shareholders. The employers set a performance target for the employees, and those who meet the set targets become part of the stakeholders. This plan is beneficial to both the business and employees as both get the chance to reap the benefits of their hard work, (University of Michigan, 1981).

Advantages of stock offer to the business

The company gets its dividends payment in accordance to its performance in the market in relation to other competing businesses. Therefore, an increase in performance of a business means that it will receive more dividends compared to one whose performance is low. The business gains more profits also, as the employees are willing to go further in their efforts to achieve the set targets.

The business owner is also sure that the employees will put in more efforts as they are a part of the business and their future depends on the success of the business. The stock offers also ensure that the employees stay in the company long enough, therefore, reduces the chances of having to constantly replace employees.

Disadvantages to the business

The company has to set aside money for giving the employees a stock option in the company. The company is at a risk if the employees do not work hard enough to achieve the target.

Advantages to the employees

The employees can gain a lot of money from the stocks if the market prices favor their company’s stocks. The employees also get a chance to get a share of their hard work, (Kracklauer, Mills, Dirk, 2004).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Disadvantages to the employees

The employees have to put in a lot of efforts to meet the target, and they have to wait for a long time to achieve this. This ties the employee with the company for a long time depriving him or her, the chance of moving to greener pastures.

Profit Sharing This is an incentive plan for the businesses puts aside parts of the pre taxed profits and then share it out to the employees. The employee must meet the set conditions that will allow him or her to receive part of the profit. The common condition will be meeting target and having served in the business for a certain period, ( Fullerton, 2006).

The mode of payments differs from one company to the other, and some of them put the money into the employees’ retirement funds. The other form of payment is the calculation of the period one has been in the company, which helps in the calculation of the profits. The other form of payment is one that gives shares of the profits depending on the position held by the employee.

Advantages to the business

The company’s profits increase because the employees work hard to make more profits, which in turn will increase their shares of the profits. There is also a reduced risk of employees quitting to go work in other companies because they know that their efforts are the ones that will boost their earnings.

Disadvantages

However, most of this plans do not work because they companies spend lees amounts of money on investments. This leads to a reduction in the profits earned which later on leads to losses. The problem with the plan is that it will not keep the earnings of the company steady, because it will keep on fluctuating according to the performance of the employees. The company is at a risk of losing focus on their set objectives and targets. This is because the employees will work hard to achieve maximum profits, and not to meet the company’s targets.

Advantages to the employees

It unites the employees and employers as they work together to achieve their set goals. It also increases the levels of motivation, which in turn would increase the earnings of the employees making their lives comfortable. All this will lead to further improvement in performance as the employees are sure of a good salary. It also acts as a bridge between the employee and the employer, which makes the employer feel at ease with the company.

Disadvantages of profit sharing

The employees will not receive a consistent earning which makes planning for their personal expenses difficult. The employees will receive appreciation from the employer due the profits earned and not on their value as quality employees.

We will write a custom Coursework on Types of employee incentive plans specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bibliography Fullerton, S. (2006). Sports Marketing. Pennsylvania: McGraw-Hill.

Kracklauer A. H., Mills, D. Q.,

[supanova_question]

Overview of Nike based on Outsourcing Essay college essay help online

Outsourcing is identified as the practice of contracting one or more business functions to someone else. The reasons behind outsourcing are identified to be varied as they depend on the particular needs of the company. However, the major reason behind this global trend in the corporate world is to reduce the total cost of labor in the production process and to procure specific professional expertise in the production process.

The American economy has been under immense pressure for a long time due to the increasing cost of production related to the particular legislation revolving around minimum wages as well as union regulations (Hira,

[supanova_question]

Documentary film called “The Corporation”. Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Argument

Limited Liability

Corporate Person-hood

Requirement to Maximize Shareholders’ Profits

Conclusion

References

Introduction The documentary identifies that corporations often apply some potentially harmful techniques in their production system as they seek to increase their profits. There has not been a lot of interest in identifying the potential harm that some production processes in corporations pose to ordinary people since most people have not been affected directly.

The documentary goes ahead to give real life examples of how corporations are overlooking even basic human rights in their quest to grow and increase their competitive edge in the market. While it is identified that corporations are participating in unethical practices, apparently the liability cannot be placed on one specific person. The growth of corporations as it is explained in the documentary, promises a not so rosy picture of our future.

The most unfortunate part is that we are all responsible for the unethical practices of these corporations since we fuel their greed by buying their products (Gevurtz, 2010). After identifying the inefficiencies that are inherent in corporations, the documentary raises the question of how we can manage the behavior of corporations to ensure that there are no innocent people who are being hurt by their activities.

Among the issues identified as the major motivators of corporations and their behavior is the particular aspect identified as the corporate veil, corporate person-hood and the priorities of corporations in their production processes (Abbott

[supanova_question]

Political Violence in South Africa between 1985 and 1989 Essay best college essay help

Introduction Apartheid was a political principle that was adopted by the National Party administration of South Africa between 1948 and 1994. It was one of the systems adopted to segregate the black people and deny them their rights. It was aimed at instilling the white supremacy, through maintaining the Afrikaner marginal rule. Apartheid was established in 1945 after the Second World War by the National Party, which was dominated by the minority Afrikaner whites.

Even though racial discrimination was established by colonialists, the National Party adopted apartheid as a national policy after the 1948 general election. The policy came up with four categories of races including native, white, color and Asian races. This meant that these races had to live in different localities either willingly or by force. In 1970, the apartheid regime proscribed political organizations that were formed by other races.

The blacks were forced into being refugees in their own country since their citizenship was nullified. They were forced to live in the ten tribally based autonomous motherlands referred to as Bantustans. Through this, the government could easily restructure the education system, medical care services and other public services, which were distributed racially.

The black people could always be mistreated in the public and their culture was devalued. They received inferior services that could not be matched with those of other races.

Within South Africa, the natives staged demonstrations to demand for their rights. This was through political violence, which was organized by African leaders and political organizations such as Mandela and UDF respectively.

Internationally, the global society slapped economic sanctions, including trade embargo. Since 1950s, the state witnessed violence due to practices exercised by the government. Many leaders were imprisoned while others were exterminated. This paper will only concentrate on the activities of political organizations from 1985 to 1989.

The Background of Apartheid and Political Violence in South Africa Before 1948, South Africa was a state that was run democratically. Even though racial discrimination was rampant, it existed illegally. Before elections, the major Afrikaner party urged citizens to vote for it since it could introduce apartheid. It closely overpowered its major opponent and formed a coalition regime with another marginal Afrikaner political party. Malan was declared the first premier of the apartheid regime.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The officials of the National party tried to justify the existence of the apartheid policy, arguing that South Africa did not have a single homogenous race. The officials of the National party went ahead to sub-divide the population into four major tribes. The white race had more powers socio-economically and politically. Other races existed at the mercy of the white race. The white race involved the English speaking tribes and the Afrikaans.

The government approved laws that could divide people based on their races. In 1950, the first law was enacted, which was referred to as the Population Registration Act. The law formalized ethnic classes and came up an identification certificate for each group (Pottinger 89). In 1950 still, the government approved another bill referred to as the Group Areas Act, which allotted each race a specific area. Before then, the government had passed a bill that criminalized marriage between different races.

Socio-political and economic discrimination caused many problems in South Africa. Successive presidents of the National Party instituted laws that caused more pain to other races. In the judiciary, only the white race was employed meaning that judicial rulings favored only whites. Other races could only vote for a white to represent them in the highest law-making organ that is, the parliament.

Before the introduction of Apartheid, divisions, conflicts and competition between the two major factions characterized South African political activities. One of the group suggested that conservatism could bring greatness to the state. On the other side, liberals argued that only respect for human rights and freedoms could boost the country’s economy. The apartheid system contributed significantly to internal conflicts.

The government responded to these conflicts by deploying security forces to harass demonstrators (Venter 16). Due to this, political organizations gained support from the locals. The government decided to change the approach after realizing that the society supported these organizations. The National Party came up with some reforms that could help in solving the conflicts between the government and demonstrators.

Political protestors were urged to wage peaceful demonstrations after acquiring necessary documents from state agencies, such as the police. In their arguments, non-white political organizations suggested that apartheid government could only be overthrown through mass campaigns. Through this suggestion, students led other demonstrators to push for their rights. Furthermore, political organizations called members to participate in national strikes, boycotts, civil defiance and brutal clashes in order to overthrow the apartheid regime.

Political Influence between 1985 and 1989 Between 1985 and 1989, South Africa witnessed a serious political violence, with Africans demanding for independence. The anti-apartheid organizations wanted the Botha government to quit office and leave power to the majority that is, Africans. During this period, radical local leaders urged communities to defy any government order that was unpopular to them.

We will write a custom Essay on Political Violence in South Africa between 1985 and 1989 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The communities were against various local authorities and leaders who had been employed by the government since they supported unpopular regime. By 1985, the ANC changed its strategy by ensuring that the urban areas were ungovernable. The party requested various races to default paying rent and other charges imposed on them. Consequently, various councils failed to offer services to whites due to lack of finances.

Some were overthrown while others collapsed due to constant conflicts. Youth organizations and militant groups replaced councils that were exorbitant and indifferent to the wishes of the many. Such militant organizations took over responsibilities that were previously reserved for the councils.

In other words, tyranny of the multitude was the order of the day. Those suspected to be working with the apartheid regime received sever punishments. The officials of town councils and other civil servants were forced to migrate to other places because of their behavior. Some were murdered by neck lacing whereby a blazing wood was put around the culprit’s neck.

The head of state, P.W. Botha, announced a military rule in the thirty-six authoritative districts following the protests. Furthermore, the president was advised to proscribe various political organizations because they were directly responsible for the conflicts. Due to this, many leaders were arrested while others were put under house arrest. The Botha administration moved to enact a law that gave enormous powers to the police and the military.

The state security agencies were allowed to implement curfews in various places facing security problems. They could control the movement of people. Moreover, the president ruled by decree implying that he could issue instructions without pursuing the law. During this time, the government recommended that it was illegal to use words that were perceived to be hate speech. This could amount to arrest.

Upon arrest, the government could not disclose the name of the arrested person. This was actually against the rights of the arrested people, which sparked more violence (Houston 14). People were imprisoned without trial, something that sparked political violence all over the country.

In 1986, the president extended the state of emergency to include the whole country due to violence. The government modified the Public Security Act, which gave the government powers to quell violence using all available means. During the same year, the press was highly controlled.

The government could harass protesters but journalists were never allowed to access the areas. The state used national broadcaster to distribute false information as regards to the uprisings. In 1987, the Botha regime extended the state of emergency for an additional two years (Ross 71). In 1988, the United Democratic Front (UDF) was proscribed because of its activities. The government was dissatisfied with the way UDF operated.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Political Violence in South Africa between 1985 and 1989 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Between 1985 and 1989, the political violence persisted mainly because of the economic and political hardships. However, residents themselves were the major problem. Associates of Inkatha and the UDF-ANC groups attempted to outdo each other. The government applied the policy of divide and rule that is, by supporting one side.

Political organizations such as ANC and PAC engaged government troops in war. The government attacked the ANC bases and villages while the ANC could strike the restaurants with bombs. In early 1989, was affected by a disease and was urged to step aside in February the same year.

By the time Botha was leaving office, the economy of South Africa had collapsed and was rated the lowest in the world. The state was shocked when foreign powers imposed various sanctions, including trade embargos. The exit of Botha paved way for discussions, which gave policy makers in government the chance to reconcile with anti-apartheid leaders. The incoming president was liberal since he announced that he could do away with the apartheid policy.

He also announced that he could guarantee political freedom and each person could be allowed to elect a leader of his or her choice. Consequently, anti-apartheid groups such as ANC, PAC, SACP and the UDF were allowed to operate freely (Rantete 12). The head of state, F.W. de Klerk, pledged to liberate all political inmates and allow political involvement. Some laws such as the land act were also abolished.

Conclusion From the above analysis, it can be observed that political organizations played a major role in South Africa between 1985 and 1989. Botha was against political organizations because they interfered with the activities of the whites. It is also true that apartheid was established in 1948 but its effects were felt more from 1985 under Botha.

Botha ensured that his regime provided important services to the white race by using brutal tactics to contain the influence of other races. He first proscribed all political organizations and detained some of black leaders. Later on, he ordered the security agencies to unleash terror on demonstrating Africans. After his reign, the new head of state promised to abolish apartheid and introduce political freedoms.

Works Cited Houston, Gregory. The National Liberation Struggle in South Africa: A case study of UDF, 1983-1987. Aldershot: Ashgate, 1999. Print.

Pottinger, Brian. The imperial presidency: PW Botha the first ten years: Johannesburg, Southern Book Publishers, 1988. Print

Rantete, Johannes. The African National Congress and the negotiated settlement in South Africa. Pretoria: Van Schaik, 1998. Print.

Ross, Robert. A Concise history of South Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999. Print.

Venter, Albert. Government and politics in the new South Africa. 3th ed. Pretoria: Van Schaik Publishers, 2006. Print.

[supanova_question]

Effective of library services Proposal essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Project Description

Research Objectives

Expected Outcomes and Benefits

Budget Plan

Time Plan

References

Project Description Customers have different service needs and expectations of a service and require service delivery to conform to these needs and expectations. It is important to take cognizance of in addressing the problems faced by the customers. Within library services, efforts geared towards filling the gaps between perceived expectations and perceived performance should be tailored to meet the needs of clients.

This becomes more poignant when analyzed from the perspective that librarians generally view customers or patrons through the prism of their collections. There is need to gain insights into effective strategies for flipping this to see library collections through the eyes of the customer.

The justification of this project revolves around the understanding that effective tailoring of library services towards the needs and expectations of the customer calls for deep knowledge in customer’s perspective. Audit Commission (2002) posits that by “explicitly addressing the value propositions with the aims of adding value and reducing irritation, student satisfaction with library services can be easily achieved.”

However, great deals of literatures on customer satisfaction within both for-profit and non-profit organizations abide in the fact that the capacity to consistently deliver quality services revolves around the ability to tailor products through the eyes of the customer. Successful completion of this research project demands a number of resources and support from stakeholders.

These include financial support, access to library data, access to articles, reports, and publications on the topic and approval of ethical considerations to carry out the research.

Research Objectives Assumptions of customer perceptions by library staff are not always accurate (Applegate, 1993). In fact, librarians generally view their customers or patrons through the prism of their collections. This project seeks to examine effective strategies for seeing library collections through the eyes of the customer as opposed to viewing the customer through the prism of library collections.

Expected Outcomes and Benefits This project seems to serve as a reminder to all library managers that they must deviate from viewing their customers through the prism of their collections. In fact, the project seeks to instill a culture of library service delivery that draws from the experiences of needs and expectations of the customer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The strategies for achieving expectations of the client must therefore take cognizance of the view of the customer (Cullen, 2001). It is expected to form the basis on which library managers may find a cocktail of effective strategies in seeing their collections through the eyes of their customers, thereby acquiring the capacity to achieve customer satisfaction.

Budget Plan Title Duties Hours [email protected] ($) Total ($) Research Assistant 1 Development of Questionnaires 6 18 108 Onsite Research Preparation 12 20 240 Note taking and interviews 24 30 720 Transcription 100 10 1000 Assistance with analysis 8 15 120 Stationery Supplies 350 Electronic Supplies 750 Transportation 150 Accommodation 550 Food 270 TOTAL $ 4250 Time Plan It is expected that the research will follow the time scale as indicated below.

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill (2007).

References Applegate, R. (1993). Models of User Satisfaction: Understanding False Positives, RQ, 32 (4): 525-539.

Audit Commission (2002). Building Better Library Services: Learning from Audit, Inspection and Research. London: The Audit Commission.

Cullen, R. (2001). Perspectives on User Satisfaction Surveys. Library Trends, 49 (4): 662-686.

Saunders, M., Lewis, P. and Thornhill, A. (2007). Research Methods for Business Students. London: Pitman

We will write a custom Proposal on Effective of library services specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

The Extent to which Media Images of Families Reflect the Diversity of Families in Relation to Issues of Culture Gender, Size and Composition Essay essay help online: essay help online

Media shapes the early childhood learning environment to the extent that it highlights ethical issues, gender roles and cultural concerns. Popular media, in particular radio, television, newspapers and popular magazines play proactive roles in constructing the perceptions of how families need to look like.

The “ideal image” of a family has immense impacts on “real” families upon bearing in mind that different families comprise of people with differing personalities. The impact is the development of differing cultural identities among people right from the earliest stages of physical and cognition development (Maples, 2001, p.67).

Media associates certain races and or cultures as being more superior to others in terms of finance and portrayal of familial roles that people regard as “ideal”. Sexualisation of certain familial roles creates images of reservation of certain duties for a particular gender among children (Lumbay

[supanova_question]

Explaining a Concept Research Paper best essay help

Sociological theories are the key components of sociology as a discipline. They function as guides for researchers and also guide practitioners who conduct intervention strategies. Sociological theories are defined as a set of concepts which are interrelated. They explain, describe and predict the relationships among different parts of the society.

The theories are made up of ideas and concepts that have close relations and are scientifically tested and brought together to expand, clarify, magnify and enlarge how human beings understand people together with their unique behaviors and the society in general. The theories assist sociologists to perform different types of studies with particular questions that examine the assumptions in the theories (Ritzer 110). This is a concept explaining paper that focuses on the concept of sociological theories.

In the following example, two researchers, Henry and Cumming conducted a study that focused on the process of aging. They developed an aging theory that comprised of assumptions. In the theory, they assumed that once elderly people realize that they are about to die, they stop their youthful actions.

At the same time, the members of the society shift their focus from them. The researchers tested their theory by using a large number of aging people and found out that the generalizations and findings they had devised resulted did not support the theory. The theory was therefore abandoned since the findings did not support it. This showed the importance of research in determining the validity of sociological theories.

Theories are used to study millions of people in societies and even at other levels. When they are used to study large groups of people, they are referred to as macro theories.

On the other hand, when theories are used to study small groups of people such as families, couples or teams they are known as micro theories. The macro theories are basically comprised of functional and conflict theories while the micro theories include social exchange and symbolic interactionism theories. In most situations, most theories are used at both the micro and macro levels.

There are two broad categories of theories. The first category is referred to as the grand category of theories and focuses on universal qualities of social issues or problems. Its basis is abstract concepts and ideas as opposed to specific evidence. Such theories include symbolic interactionism, conflict, and social exchange theories.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second broad category of theories is the middle-range category of theories. These theories are formed on the basis of scientific findings which are specific and centre on the interrelation between or among concepts in a specific social problem or process.

Conflict theory is an example of a macro theory. A macro theory is used to study issues that affect larger groups of people. The founder of the theory was a German economist, philosopher and a sociologist known as Marx. He was disappointed because the educated people in the society mistreated the less educated and the poor.

He could not tolerate the capitalist ideals that allowed the powerful individuals in the society to exploit the poor and perpetrate inhumane acts on them. The theory was later developed by Max Weber and took a moderate ground. In the development, he conducted a thorough study of capitalism but did not agree with Marx on rejecting the theory.

Conflict theory is very important when trying to understand poverty and wealth, war, revolutions, slavery, child abuse, domestic violence and political strife among others social issues. The theory asserts that the society is constantly in conflict and people always compete for scarce resources.

It assumes that individuals who have wealth in the society strife to earn more of it at the expense of those who do not have. It is usually a power struggle that favors the elites and the wealthy while the poor become the victims of hard situations. Power is the capacity of individuals to seize whatever they want even when they face strong opposition.

The second type of grand theory is the structural functionalism or functionalism. Functionalists argue that society must sustain a state of balance as the different components of the society perform their functions. This theory has a relationship with ecological and biological concepts.

The functional and non-functional systems in the society are analyzed the same way the human body is analyzed to detect problems. Some of the processes that express functionality in the society include romantic relationships, growth or decline of the population, socialization, religious practices and friendship among others.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Explaining a Concept specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Functionalists agree with proponents of conflict theory that the society experiences some breakdowns and that mistreatment of the poor in the society is a reality. The societal breakdowns are referred to as dysfunctions and threaten the stability of the society. However, functionalists exhibits a more positive and optimistic attitude than the conflict theorists.

They acknowledge the fact that societies experience problems just like the body does. Functionalists study the parts and processes of the society to find out how societies maintain their stability in the wake of factors that make society unstable.

The third type of theory is symbolic interactionism. Interactionism takes place as either social exchange or symbolic interaction. Symbolic interaction theory argues that people in the society interact with one another on a daily basis.

It is a useful theory that is used to improve communication, understand people, and impart skills among individuals of different cultures and foster good relations in the society. Generally, the theory is used to understand most of the aspects that make up the society. It is a theory that provides a magnified understanding of meaning.

The fourth type of theory is called the social exchange theory. This theory argues that in the society, individuals constantly interact as they try to maximize rewards and incur minimal costs. Its assumptions resemble those of the conflict theory.

Human beings exhibit rationality since they have the capacity to differentiate between the good and the bad after they have learnt the advantages and disadvantages of every choice. People look at the available options in every situation and figure out how the rewards can be maximized and costs minimized. One of the most outstanding features of the theory is its equity concept (Axelrod and Cooper 10).

All the sociological theories are applicable when it comes to conducting studies on collective and individual behaviors. However, some theories are best suited in some circumstances because they handle certain issues better than other theories. A particular issue may be studied through several theories in order to establish certain aspects of the issue. Sociological theories are important since they are used by researchers to establish various societal facts and solutions to specific problems.

Works Cited Axelrod, Rise and Charles Cooper. St. Martin’s Guide to Writing. New York: Bedford Books, 2007.Print

Not sure if you can write a paper on Explaining a Concept by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ritzer, George. Sociological theory. New York: McGraw-Hall, 2000.Print

[supanova_question]

The Individuals with Disability Education Act Coursework college essay help online: college essay help online

A Summary of the Six Key Components of the Original 1975 IDEA (Individuals with Disabilities Education Act) The Individuals with Disability Education Act (IDEA) was signed into law in 1975; however, it was originally called 1975 Education for all Handicapped Children Act (EHA) or Public Law 94-142. Before the development of the act, many disabled children were denied access to education and very few schools allowed in public schools.

Under the Act, the US has a goal of ensuring that all youths develop into independent, responsible, and respectable people in the society (Gargiulo, 2010 p.33). Therefore, the Act was developed to protect the rights and meet the needs of disabled children and their parents, as well as ensuring that all children got equal opportunity in education in the United States (Lain, 2006, p.1).

This original IDEA had six key components, which include free and appropriate public education(FAPE), individualized education plan(IEP), nondiscriminatory evaluation and Identification, the least restrictive environment(LRE), procedural due process and parental participation(Lee, 2005, p.259).

The first important component of IDEA 1975 is free and appropriate public education (FAPE). FAPE implies that all the children with disabilities should have access to the special education and special services that they need irrespective of the severity of their disability conditions. This special education should be provided at the public cost and should equally meet state’s education standards (Tenor865, 2009).

It requires a proper definition of the educational placement, services and setting that are most appropriate for students with disabilities (Lee, 2005, p.259). FAPE ensures that parents of such children do not pay for the special education and services that are offered to their children.

The other component is nondiscriminatory testing and evaluation. This provides that, an unprejudiced assessment criterion should be applied to decide if a child qualifies to be provided with special education services (Lee, 2005).Not all disabled children qualify for services offered under the IDEA act, those with mere disabilities are usually left out.

Only children with visual impairment, mental retardation, auditory impairment, language and speech impairment and those with severe emotional disturbance can qualify the services offered under IDEA. It also defines the kind of placement that can be used for a given child, depending on the type of need recorded. The assessment should be done by trained and qualified staff before a child with disability can start receiving special education (Tenor864, 2009, p.2).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is aimed at ensuring that children are not prejudiced based on their cultural, racial, or language differences. It avoids overrepresentation of a particular group of people in the institutions that give these special needs services. This is particularly essential since most districts find high number of minority children enrolled in the special education schools (Lee, 2005, p.259).

The individualized education plan (IEP) is another important component of the IDEA. Children have differing disabilities and different children will require different learning services and needs. Moreover, each student has specific learning goals and will require specific learning modifications and this should be put in consideration.

The development of the IEP is required to optimize learning for each student and requires a joint work by a team comprising of parents, educational personal, and students in certain instances to develop a student education plan. The motive is to find the type of services needed by a particular student (Tenor864, 2009).

Least restrictive environment is another component, which is concerned with the establishment of an independent and friendly learning environment for students receiving special needs and services where they can realize their full potential. This component of IDEA makes sure that handicapped children are educated along their fellow non-disabled children (Tenor864, 2009).

The component provides that the children should have access to independent environment and be subjected to regular lessons as far as the disability condition can allow. The children can be subjected to residential treatment or they can be subject to full inclusions depending on their needs (Lee, 2005, p.259).

The procedural due process is another component that ensures that the principles outlined in the act are completely followed by schools. The section provides for the rights of people concerned to be involved in the entire program. This includes the disabled children and their families, teachers, psychologists and other pertinent persons.

The component “allows the parent to be represented by legal counsel, and to ask for an impartial trial if there is a disagreement about their child’s educational plan” (Tenor864, 2009, p.2). With this component, parents of children with disabilities have the right to reach the records of their children and make sure that the records are confidential (Tenor864, 2009).

We will write a custom Coursework on The Individuals with Disability Education Act specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The parents have the right to take part in IEP and should also be informed of any possible changes in the services, for instance, a change of the individualized education plan, a change in placement, or a shift in educational class of the child (Tenor64, 2009). It has the legal provisions for solving the differences between families and schools providing these special needs and services. Procedural safeguards are very important because they protect the rights for both the children and their parents.

The other component is parental participation, which provides for the inclusion of parents in educational decision-making and setting of the learning objectives for children with disabilities and generally in IEP development (Lee, 2005, p.259). Much of the intervention to help a child with disabilities should follow the consent of parents or any other people responsible for the child.

Parents should be informed more often of their children’s situation in schools and they must be consulted before any action about their children like new placements or change of services is taken. In addition, this component of IDEA ensures that parents are consulted before any disciplinary action is taken on their children.

Summary of the Key Components of the Later IDEA Reauthorization The IDEA has had several developments since its inception. Changes have been necessary to understand how laws can be put into practice and the necessary adjustments that can make them efficient and effective (LD Online, 2011).

Public Law 99-457 (1986)

One of the major changes that followed the 1986 amendment of the Education for all Handicapped Children Act was the addition of the infant and toddler component. This was characterized by provision of more services to infants and young children with disabilities from birth to the age of five.

This was made possible by incorporation of a new pre-school program grant program which increased the money allocated to disabled children between three to five years of age by threefold (Cengage Learning, 2011a). Two parts, B and H, had the particular provisions on these interventions.

The developments included an establishment of interagency council on early intervention which lead to the establishment of Early Intervention Program(EIP), the development of individualized family service plans(IFSPs) which join families in nurturing their handicapped children, promotion of public awareness programs on possible interventions, and putting families as the center of focus in these programs (Cengage Learning, 2011a).

There were also concerns on safeguard rules and effective transition of families between different systems and reduction of the likelihood of putting disabled children in various institutions while at the same time nurturing their potential for independent living in the society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Individuals with Disability Education Act by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Public Law 101-476 (1990)

Amendment in 1990 saw the change in the name of the law. The law was there before known as Education for all Handicapped Children Act (EHA) and was renamed Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA) in 1990, its main aim being recognizing the child with disability (Cengage Learning, 2011b). Under the new provision, the term handicapped was removed and victims were termed as “children with learning disabilities.”

The other important amendment was on the eligibility criteria. In effect, autism and traumatic brain injury were introduced as other exceptionally categories (Cengage Learning, 2011b). The amendments also provided for transition planning between systems and services for disabled children at the age of sixteen.

Another amendment to the act at this time was the definition of Assistive Technology Devices and Services (ATDS) for the disabled children which can be included in the Individual Education Plan (IEP). Lastly, there were also concerns to extend the least restrictive environment so that children are educated along non-disable children (AT Laws, 2012).

Public Law 105-17 (1997)

This amendment yielded the most important changes for the IDEA, with the law being restructured from nine to four subchapters (Cengage Learning, 2011c). Other developments included much emphasis on the roles of the parents and families, students and other education stakeholders in promoting IEP programs for the students with disabilities.

The amendment provided clarity on the extent to which the children with disabilities can be disciplined by the teachers in schools (AT Laws, 2012). The access to general education was also emphasized under the amendments.

On the use of Assistive Technology and Devices and Services to aid in IEP, amendments were made to allow these devices to be used in various setting like at homes to make sure the students get fair and appropriate education. In addition, the act emphasized that teachers should include orientation and mobility services to specific students particularly those with visual and auditory impairment when using assistive technology and devices in IEP (AT Laws, 2012).

IDEA 2004: Public Law 108-446

This amendment marked the final regulations on IDEA being the last amendment that has been made. The IDEA 2004 has four sections – A, B, C, and D. The first section defines the terms as used in the law and section B outlines how to source funds from the federal government to aid the eligible students with disabilities (LD Online, 2011).

This defines the eligibility criteria and mechanisms for evaluation. Section C entails early intervention programs for the infants and toddlers with disabilities whereas the last section focuses on how educational agencies can work effectively with these children with disabilities indeed the amendments on the act at this time allowed the disabled children to take part in various operations and programs under the IDEA(US Department of Education, 2008).

IDEA amendment in 2004, allowed local government agencies to conduct child find activities and make sure that there is fair distribution of resources among the handicapped children in their locality.

In addition local government agencies were allowed to deliver special services to private schools and to decide the right amount of money to spend on the disabled children in their area. Lastly, the amendments of the act in 2004 lead to the corporation of new consultation rules for private schools which host disabled children (U.S Department of Education, 2008).

Summary of IDEA Guidelines of Referring Students with Suspected Disabilities The first step involves identifying a child needing special education and services. This can be done through child find which consists of government agents who identifies disabled children in each state and through referral by a parent or other people who wants a child to be evaluated for disability.

Secondly, the chosen child is then evaluated for the disability. The consent of the parent to a child suspected of disability is necessary in the initial evaluation of the child. Evaluation is a vital step in referring children with suspected disabilities because with this it is possible to know whether the child is eligible to special needs and services. Parents are can call for reevaluation of their child if they are dissatisfied with the results obtained (National Dissemination Center for Children with Disabilities, 2011).

The third step is to decide whether the child is eligible for the special education and services based on the evaluation results. A certain level of disability is required for a child to qualify for the special education and services under IDEA. As a result not all disabled children are eligible for the special education and services but those with extreme disabilities.

At this stage, parents may be summoned to hear eligibility decision made on their children. After determination of eligibility of the child, within a month a team is selected to focus on the child and set up Individual Education Plan for the child. An IEP team meeting is then organized; this meeting is attended by teachers, psychologists, special teachers and other pertinent persons who have knowledge about the child.

The meeting is then held and the IEP team determines the best services to offer to the child. All this is done with the consent of the parent and if they disagree, their mediation and options may be considered.This step culminates with a well written IEP for the child (National Dissemination Center for Children with Disabilities, 2011).

Provision of services to the child then follows; special education and services are provided to the child based on the IEP. All the parties involved are given a copy of the child IEP for them to know their responsibilities which include: modifications, accommodations and support.

The parties include; parents, teachers and special service providers who have the responsibility of supporting the child daily through various means. Services are offered to the child for a given period after which a progress report is filled by IEP team. Reports are prepared and presented to the parents and other concerned people occasionally to determine effectiveness of the IEP to the child. With these reports, the IEP is reviewed and amendments can be done on it for the benefit of the child.

Normally, IEP review is done on annual basis unless parents request for frequent reviews. The last step is to review the child to know how he/she is progressing. This review is usually done after every three years although the review can be done more often if situations demand that or on parent or on teacher request (National Dissemination center for Children with Disabilities, 2011).

Some Other Intervention Concepts In accomplishing the above procedures, certain procedures also need to be followed as interventions to help the children with disabilities. The referral process may be detailed and time consuming; however, there is enough evidence indicating eligibility. In this case, an intervention can be given while the evaluation process is underway – this is termed as pre-referral interventions.

The identification of disability, evaluation for eligibility, and the subsequent delivery of the special need services involve the participation of different people including educational professionals, parents, students (in possible cases) and other education stakeholders. If the child is found eligible, parents and educators have to meet to arrange for individualized education program to help the child (National Dissemination center for Children with Disabilities, 2011).

Meetings are held between the parents and educators to discuss the conditions such as placement of special services. There is also a need to cascade service delivery options. This intervention is necessary due to the different needs met by children with disabilities. It involves developing a learning environment that accommodates all children by ensuring that the instructor provides special attention to the students with special education needs.

Early intervention concepts should also be put in place by use of early education programs which are useful in identification of children with disability. Young children are unable to speak and due to that, they only express themselves by crying, pushing or even gesturing. Some children have a challenging behavior which does not respond to efforts of early educators and parents who find it hard to meet the children needs.

This lot of children may need an individualized plan where they will be monitored closely to find out their problems in time. This is very important for social and mental development and can be used to identify children with special needs who can benefit from the provisions of the IDEA (National Dissemination Center for Children with Disabilities, 2011).

Early intervention services are also referred to as part C services provided under the IDEA act. These measures are there for infants who are handicapped or have developmental delay. Such children are evaluated to decide their eligibility to receive early intervention measures.

References AT Laws. (2012). Special Education Laws and Legislation. Web.

Cengage Learning. (2011a). The Education for All Handicapped Children Act Amendments of 1986 (PL 99-457). Web.

Cengage Learning. (2011b). The Education for All Handicapped Children Act Amendments of 1990 (PL 101-476). Web.

Cengage Learning. (2011c). The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act Amendments of 1997 (PL 105-17). Web.

Gargiulo, R. (2010). Special Education in Contemporary Society: An Introduction to Exceptionality. Fourth Edition. Thousands Oaks: SAGE

Lain. (2006). IDEA: A Breakdown of Its Components, Amendments, and Referral Process. Web.

Lee, S. (2005). Encyclopedia of school psychology. Thousand Oaks: SAGE

LD Online. (2011). IDEA 2004. Web..

National Dissemination Center for Children with Disabilities. (2011). 10 Basic Steps in Special Education. Web.

Tenor864. (2009). A Look at the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act. Web.

U.S Department of Education. (2008).The Individuals withDisabilities Education Act: Provisions Related with Children with disabilities Enrolled by their Parents in Private Schools. Washington DC. Web.

[supanova_question]

Architector Giotto di Bondone Essay online essay help

Introduction Giotto di Bondone was one of the first greatest personalities in architect and Florentine painting of his time. According to Pioch (1), during the Italian renaissance Giotto became renowned as the first genus of art. His greatness in the field of art is attributed to two factors.

Firstly, he brilliantly got to the heart of every sacred history event he was representing by breaking down the episode to its fundamental, dramatic core, as well as his ability to design compositional means through which he could express the deepest spiritual meaning of the sacred history episode and its emotional effects in terms of uncomplicated area of paint.

The second factor is that Giotto’s art is outstanding for its simple, grave, and clear solution to the central tribulations of an attempt to represent the human figure, volume and the space, solitary and structure of three dimensional forms. The solutions that he came up with helped in solving fundamental dramatic narrative problems, as such, these solutions have never been surpassed and in many ways, they have consequently been elaborated (Wolf 29).

Discussion Tactile imagination

Giotto’s deep understands of other sculptors’ achievements such as Giovanni Pisano, Nicola Pisano, and Arnolf di Cambio is seen as the greatest inspiration of his success in his representation of the basics of human psychological and spiritual reaction to events as well as human form.

The aforementioned sculptors were very keen in tackling the fundamental problems of representation particularly in a physically three dimensional medium. Giotto’s paintings do not only appeal to the tactile imagination which the objects of the art possess and represented by the human figures, his paintings also depicts a keener sense of reality, with a more likeness of life than the objects.

His paintings are therefore intensely real in that they deeply evoke the tactile imagination of the audience thus compelling them to everything that stimulates their sense of touch while observing the objects (Williamson 15).

Movement and action

Another peculiar aspect of Giotto’s painting is his treatment of movement and action. In all his paintings, the gestures and the grouping never fail to convey the intended meaning. Giotto used the significant shade and light, significant line, the significant gesture, and the significant look up or down, to convey an absolute sense of motion in his work such as Paduan frescoes of the Ascension of our Lord, of the Resurrection of the Blessed, of the angel in Zacharias Dream.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Or of the God the rather in the Baptism. Giotto’s ability to convey action and movement in his work is indeed a claim to perpetual appreciation as an artist (Gillet 6). This genius appreciation enabled him to represent objects in a representation that is more complete and quick, subsequently giving the audience the opportunity to confirm their senses of capacity that in turn bring into being a great source of satisfaction.

It is argued that in every piece of Giotto’s work the audience feels its real connotation and he conveys as much of his art work as the general confines of his own skills and art permit regardless of the painting theme (Williamson 47). In instances where the theme of his painting is sacred story, Giotto’s paintings are endowed with careful sacramental intentness, processional gravity, as well as hieratic dignity.

He used several symbols to depict an individual dominated by a given vice. This is evidence in his work such as Arena at Padua, at the Injustice, the Avarice, and the Inconstancy, while painting Inconstancy Giotto paints a woman who has a blank face, with aimlessly held out arms, with her feet placed on a wheel side, and her chest falling backwards (King 37). Consequently the painting makes the audience giddy to look at the woman.

In the painting injustice he uses a man who is powerfully built in his prime years, the man is clad in a judge costume while grasping a lance that is double hooked in his clawed right hand and clenching his sword hilt with his left hand. The eyes of the man are firmly on the watch, with an attitude that suggests his readiness to devour on his victim.

He is seated on a rock that is higher that the trees. It therefore goes without saying that in the aforementioned paintings, there is a clear caption of each of the vices as Giotto has perfectly presented and extracted their visible significance.

Conclusion Giotto was greatly concerned with the human figures presentational problems as well as their actions pragmatically on a flat surface which was to embody 3 dimensional spaces. In the earlier times artists used the Byzantine tradition flat forms. They also disregarded what was around them and often imitated each other.

Unlike the earlier artist Giotto carefully considered human body and nature and he realized that the two aspects were endowed with deep emotions, humanity, and great dignity (King 58). He therefore placed his human figures in albeit shallow, free space. This led to his acceptance and recognition as one of the greatest artist of his time.

We will write a custom Essay on Architector Giotto di Bondone specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Gillet, Louis. “Giotto di Bondone.” The Catholic Encyclopedia. Vol. 6. New York: Robert Appleton Company, 1909. Print.

King, Margaret. The Renaissance in Europe. NY: Laurence King Publishing, 2003. Print.

Pioch, Nicolas . Giotto di Bondone. Web Museum, Paris 2002. Web.

Williamson, Beth. Approaches to Giotto. A journal on Art History, Vol 34, (2011): 1061 – 1065.

Wolf, Norbert. Giotto di Bondone, 1267-1337: the renewal of painting. NJ: Taschen, 2006. Print.

[supanova_question]

How is Narco-Governance Related to Political Liberalism? Essay essay help

How is narco-governance related to political liberalism? The emergence of narco-governments has been favored largely by the thriving trade in illegal drugs. Countless of reports from numerous agencies have implicated many senior government officers of many states in drug dealing. There are governments whose budgets and public spending are bankrolled by the dirty money from illegal drug trade (Taussig, 1994).

In return, the rich drug dealers get unlimited access to the various sectors of the economy, security and protection. These drug dealers carry out their illicit drug deals with the blessings of the government (Jimenez, 1990).

The impunity displayed by these drug lords goes beyond just controlling the government spending; the government is always at their beck and call and any disgruntled voices are either intimidated into silence or killed, in most cases, the mercenaries that they own while the government officers including the president in some cases looking the other way.

Strangely enough these governments consider themselves politically liberal; they claim that their actions are for the common good of all citizens. Such kinds of governments are common in Latin America where drug lords are literary running a number of governments by virtue of funding them. Like in the case of Mexico, such drug dealers have executed many civilians and government officers opposed to their activities and considered as their enemies using their mercenaries (Gootenberg, 2008).

Such governments call themselves politically liberal; to them they are serving the best interests of the citizens. Liberalism, while aiming at protecting individual liberties and private properties, it should go beyond just looking at the intra-state relations and focus also in the international relations. This is because governments do not operate in vacuums but rather, they operate in an international environment which determines it affairs to a great extent.

However, it must be noted that different states will either use liberal or non-liberal means to achieve these components of liberalism. To be considered completely politically independent, a state should be able to act autonomously, and with equality and neutrality. Thus, liberalism goes beyond just the name, it is the component, the action that qualifies the name. The name should be defined by the actions and not the name defining the actions that ought to be associated with it (Hindess, 2004).

These components of liberalism and the numerous different arguments in the philosophical world point give credence to the existence of a relation between narco-governance and political liberalism. The very nature of political liberalism; it is almost amorphous and has many facets, gives the society to define it in their own terms.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More An autonomous state capable of self governance is considered to politically liberal. Such states may or may not prohibit certain activities even they might be harmful to the general public. Narco-governments would be considered to be politically liberal as they permit drug dealing and illegal drugs usage even though they are harmful to the general public. A politically liberal state would exhibit neutrality in its actions and decisions; never imposing ideas, rules or regulations on its subjects (Hinojosa 2007).

The subjects of such states have the freedom to choose what is good or bad for them. Contrastingly, citizens of narco-governments usually lack this liberty in most cases as the drug lords usually have the final say for the citizens’ choice of life should always favor their drug businesses (Guattari, 2006). The concept of equality is one of the three pillars of political liberalism as champions for the equal treatment of all citizens as equals.

This is a right that usually protected and spelt out in the laws governing those states. Narco-governance works on the premises of creating an unequal society by creating an economic vacuum. Thus, citizens of such states rarely enjoy the equality, a state propagated by law.

Since autonomy and equality are antagonistic, most narco-governments usually go for autonomy over equality. Hence, while these narco-governments would argue that they are liberal, they are only using a sprinkle of liberalism concepts. These show the relationship that exists between narco-governance and political liberalism.

How and when have U.S. domestic politics, rather than Latin American security problems, shaped narco-governmental geopolitics (narco-geo-politics) in Latin America? Most people would cite Latin America countries’ security problems as the major player in the narco-geo-politics in Latin America. While this is true to some extent it is important to note that the problem of narco-geo-politics of Latin America is also influenced by other external factors such as domestic politics in the United States of America.

Due to their foreign policies which govern and determine how the United States government relates with her neighbors and the global community at large, the domestic politics and political parties’ policies and ideologies in relation to foreign policies have for a long time shaped the narco-governmental geopolitics of states within Latin America including Colombia and Mexico.

Between 1998 and 2000 the United States government used billions of dollars in Colombia as donor’s fund aimed for economic development with the mutual agreement that Colombia would lay down effective policies to curb drug trade (Walker, 1997). Such actions usually infuriate the local drug lords who feel their country is being dominated over.

We will write a custom Essay on How is Narco-Governance Related to Political Liberalism? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Hence, when such countries fail to honor their pledge of cooperation in dealing with drug trafficking, the funding is withdrawn leaving the government dangling precariously and at the mercy of drug lords.

The drug dealers may form rebel groups such as FARC to fight the government which they view as puppets of foreign powers (Marsh, 2004; Hinojosa, 2007). Such foreign policies and aid if withdrawn leave the countries at the mercy of the drug dealers who may take over or even decide to fund the government budget while favoritism in return.

Americans have been accused of insubordination and violation of sovereignty of other Latin American countries like Mexico where they have organized secret sting operations. Such operations are usually organized against drug cartels by the United States government and are usually carried out by their personnel.

These operations curtailed the cordial relationship between the United States of America and Mexico as the Mexicans felt disrespected. This lack of trust opens a leeway for the drug lords to warm their way to the heart of the government promising economic assistance to fill the void left by the withdrawal of American aid.

This causes a shift in the narco-geo-politics of such countries. The United States of America applied a seemingly selective treatment of captured drug dealers where they only extradited foreign nationals to their countries where they know they will face more harsh punishment than in their naïve countries.

On the other hand, their citizens or citizens of would be friendly states would leave to serve their sentences in countries where they were arrested as the sentence would less harsh. This would shape the narco-geo-politics in Latin America as the drug cartels may take advantage and seize the government (Youngers

[supanova_question]

Development is No Longer the Solution to poverty Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Development Serves First World Nations Not Third World Nations

Illusions of Poverty Reduction

The Development Problem Lies in the Favoured Economic Models

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Prescribed solutions from societies that do not experience lack in its absolute sense will not work for the world of third world counties anguishing in poverty. Historically, such prescriptions have led to increased dependence on hand outs and or a complete breakdown of institutions necessary to fight poverty at an indigenous level (Dos Santos 1970). This essay is a critical assessment to the phrase below, made by Sachs (1992) while referring to the worthlessness of development as a solution to poverty.

The impression of development stands like a decay in the scholarly scene (Sachs 1992, p. 1). The same author proceeds to say, “delusion and disappointment, failures and crimes have been the steady companions of development, and they tell a common story: it did not work” (Sachs 1992, p. 1).

“Moreover, the historical conditions, which catapulted the idea into prominence, have vanished: development has become outdated” (Sachs 1992, p. 1). The author finished by stating that “but above all, the hopes and desires, which made the idea fly, are now exhausted: development has grown obsolete” (Sachs 1992, p. 1).

Development Serves First World Nations Not Third World Nations The differentiation-integration model of development theory uses various components of societies to define development. However, it falls short comprehensively offering the universal depiction of development as an end means to solve the poverty problem.

Even after bringing forth the question of taking into account social, psychological conditions, and concomitants of productive development, it goes on to narrow the focus to a question of transitioning from backwardness to advancement in the economic status (Bernstein 1971). The problem here is that the advancement refers to first world countries. Thus, the notion of modernization is simply a quest to transform third world into first world without offering a lasting solution to the cause of the poverty (Banuri 1990).

The first-world countries became economically superior by relying on the abundance of raw materials and cheap labour from the world. It has also been having international market access that fosters trade. On the other hand, modernization theorists expect third-world countries to replicate similar situations, and become economically advanced, when the conditions do not allow them. While they may have abundance in raw materials, they lack the freedom and capacity to exercise their capacity of resource exploitation (Peet

[supanova_question]

The Process of Formulating Policy Case Study college essay help online

Table of Contents Lindblom’s Incrementalism

Kingdon’s Streams Model

Baumgartner and Jones’ Punctuated Equilibrium

Sabatier and Jenkins-Smith’s Advocacy Coalition Framework

Works Cited

Lindblom’s Incrementalism Incrementalism is the process of formulating policy by aggregating the minute units of the policy to come up with comprehensive policy. Lindblom used the example of a manager who is supposed to formulate policy on inflation (79). The manager would have to aggregate all the values that affect inflation and then come up with policy using these values (Lindblom 79). The manager would then analyze the policy available and take advantage of the available policies to come up with a comprehensive framework (Lindblom 79).

The barrier to significant policy change in Lindblom’s incrementalism theory is the fact that policy makers and analysts limit their scope to what is comprehensible to the users. They aim at simplifying the policy for the users rather than coming up with comprehensive policy that may be difficult to understand.

Lindblom intimates that the policy makers in the western democracies use incremental methods to formulate policy for the purpose of remaining relevant as well as simplifying the process of policy formation. Therefore, policy makers aim at coming up with policies that will not affect the ability of the users to understand.

However, in this paper analysis of policy, Lindblom says that whatever might be seen as a minute change by one person may be seen differently by another (298). In this light, the other barrier to significant policy change is the view of policy users. Change in policy is dependent on the public attitude (Lindblom 85).

Political scientists are of the opinion that the survival of democracy in the United States is dependent on fundamental agreement on sensitive issues (Lindblom 85). Therefore, if the users do not accept a change in policy, there will be no change in policy.

For policy to change significantly there must be a great passage of time. Policy changes are gradual and occur over time. This is because the policy makers use old policies to formulate new policy. Lindblom explains that policy analysts and policy makers compare the existing policy with the old policy to come up with policy that is relevant over a given period (79).

In the process, policy makers end up changing only a fraction of the policy available since most of the policies remain relevant over a long period time. Users of such policies may only notice a small change in the general policy but for the users to realize that a significant amount of change in policy a great deal of time must have passed. Therefore, for significant changes in policy to occur and be noticed by the users, a significant passage of time is necessary.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Kingdon’s Streams Model According to this theory, the barriers to significant policy change include goal specification and changing goals. Problems and preferences are relatively not well known by the policy makers (Zahariadis 75). Therefore, policy makers find it hard to select an alternative that would yield maximum benefit (Zahariadis 75). The major challenge under the concept of ambiguity is that policy makers do not know what the problem is (Zahariadis 75).

The definition of problem is always shifting and vague (Zahariadis 75). Policy formulation is extremely complicated due to various reasons due to the differences in understanding among individuals. Sometimes these differences may contribute to lack of clear goals thus leading to shift in goals.

Due to these problems, the policy formulated may be vague in terms of language, ambiguous, and contradictory. Policy makers also have the responsibility of filling gaps in policy. These gaps may or may not align with the intentions of the policy maker. If the gaps to be filled do not coincide with the intention of the policy maker then there is likelihood that the goals will not be specific.

According to Zahariadis, for significant policy changes to occur, there must change in time (75). Time is unique and scarce and the primary objective of decision makers and policy is to manage time effectively (Zahariadis 75). It is reasonable to pursue policy-making decisions that may be irrational but can last through time (Zahariadis 75). Therefore, with this in mind the only way that policy can change effectively is through change in time.

As time changes the interests of the people may also change. Therefore, changes in interest may also account for significant changes in policy. Kingdon’s adaptation of the garbage can model has incorporated ideas-versus-interests dilemma (Zahariadis 78). Therefore, changes in interests of the policy users may account for significant changes in policy.

According to Zahariadis, the big political events are usually connected to the small/ narrow sectional development in specific way (78). In this light of events, we can notice that significant policy change is highly dependent on the narrow or small ideas of users in different sectors of an organizational unit.

Baumgartner and Jones’ Punctuated Equilibrium Punctuated equilibrium as used in policy is a theory that advances the notion that most policies will exhibit little or no changes for an extended period of time. In case the changes in policy occur, it is generally restricted to specific areas in the policy thus creating new policy that is completely different from the first.

We will write a custom Case Study on The Process of Formulating Policy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The barriers to policy changes in this model are the conservative nature of organizations, the restricted cognitive nature of human, and vested interest. The conservative nature of organizations explains how organizations and states are unwilling to change their policies over a given period of time.

The policy makers remain sticky for a continued period of time until something happens to change their culture. In case of vested interest, the policy may remain stagnated for a while because it serves the interest of several people or groups. Baumgartner and Jones in their article “Punctuated Equilibrium in politics” explained this concept using the idea of policy monopolies (6). Every individual group and entrepreneur has his or her personal interest.

Therefore, a monopoly in politics deals with policy of personal interest since no one likes competition (Baumgartner and Jones 6). Due to these interests, significant policy changes are hard to come by. Another reason for lack of significant changes is due to the limit in human knowledge. Policy will remain in the same stagnant stage until human gains knowledge or recognizes a need for change in policy.

For policy to change there must be humongous shifts in societal views or changes in government. It is logical that without change in societal views the policy may remain the same since they would have no qualms about the existing policy. The policy would be serving its purpose because the knowledge of the society is limited. However once the views of the society changes and they see that the policy is no longer serving its purpose significant changes are bound to occur.

Another factor that may lead to significant changes is the shift in governance. Once the policy makers change policy is bound to change due to the fact that the new policy makers will want to serve their personal interests. If the previous policy does not serve, the interest of the new policy makers there will be a shift in policy thus a significant change to accommodate the interest of the new policy makers.

Sabatier and Jenkins-Smith’s Advocacy Coalition Framework Advocacy coalition is the process where a group of individuals come up together to support specific policy change.

According to Sabatier and Jenkins-Smith’s the idea of policy change is influenced by political scientists (14). Scholars have clearly demonstrated that the political scientists are not necessarily as neutral as they may be viewed neither are they indifferent to policy changes; instead these political scientists are members of coalitions that may or may not support policy changes.

The degree of their support and the level of coalition determines how the policy changes. Therefore, policy changes are affected by cognitive limits of the political scientists. Significant policy changes may only occur if the political scientists recognize the need to change the policy and act in a collected effort to change the policy. Otherwise, changes in the core of matters of the policy are not susceptible to changes unless there are serious anomalies in the policy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Process of Formulating Policy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Major policy changes occur in the core aspects of policy in case of very great anomalies in the policy. Where the policy experiences great anomalies, the political scientists may at as a unit to ensure that the policy is changes to suit its purpose. The levels of agreement among the political scientists needed to institute policy change vary across different governments. Hierarchically superior systems and coalitions may try to change the policy core of subordinate coalitions or levels.

Policy core may change substantially in cases where the fundamental perceptions of the policy makers change. For example, a change in basic priorities of the policy users may institute changes in the general policy core. Sabatier and Jenkins-Smith’s believed that the increase in support for environmental pollution lead to passage of the 1970 policy amendment (14).

Moreover, serious problems in the policy may cause the policy makers to reconsider their stand on certain policies and change them. Deep core policies are hard to change it takes a lot of effort to change the deep core policies. Changes in deep core policies may change due to changes in beliefs of individuals and the political scientists. Like religious beliefs deep core policies are rooted in the systems and changes can only occur if the masses agree that the policy need to be changed.

Therefore, for deep core policy to change there must be change in human nature, change in the priorities of the ultimate values, and a change in the socio-cultural identity of the community. Changes in the secondary aspect of policy may occur significantly if there is a problem in the specific aspect.

The political scientists must view this problem as serious enough in order to support significant policy changes. In addition to this, secondary aspects of policy may change due to administrative decisions. The administrators may collude to change policy n order to serve personal interests.

Works Cited Baumgartner, Frank and Jones, Bryan. Punctuated Equilibrium in Politics. Colorado: Westview, 1999. Print

Lindblom, Charles. “Analysis of Policy.” Public Administration Review, 19.2 (1958): 298-299. Print.

Lindblom, Charles. “The Science of Muddling Through.”Public Administration Review, 19.2 (1958): 79-88. Print.

Nikolaos, Zahariadis. Ambiguity, Time and Multiple Streams in Theories of Policy Process. Colorado: Westview, 1999. Print

Sabatier, Paul and Hank, Jenkins-Smith’s. Advocacy Coalition Framework: an Assessment. Colorado: Westview, 1999. Print

[supanova_question]

Discuss why food services are the most commonly outsourced function in the business Community Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Food services are the most commonly outsourced functions in the business community for several reasons. To start with, it is important to appreciate the fact that the preparation of food is a very involving task and if at all businesses are to provide their employees with nutritious and healthy meals, then they need to leave this work to professionals. In addition, once the business community has outsourced the food services function, it can now be able to concentrate on its core business activities.

This helps to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of business functions. Moreover, food service departments in organizations are required to adhere to various federal nutritional guidelines and because of the lack of professionals in the business community, businesses risk failing to comply with these rules. This means that the business community can face prosecution by the federal government for violation of the rules. In order to avoid such problems, outsourcing becomes the most logical thing to do.

Describe the advantages of outsourcing food services to a management Contractor

When a business community decides to outsource its food services function to a management contractor, there are a number of benefits associated with such a decision. To start with, such a decision will more than likely reduce the operational costs of the business in question.

This is because a lot of resources usually go to the process of acquiring, processing, preparing, and serving food. Such process requires money and when the company outsources these functions, it can save on some of these expenses. In addition, food services do not constitute a core process of a business community, unless it is in the hospitality industry. Therefore, the company is likely to record improve efficiency in its operations because all the resources of the firm are directed towards achieving its core objectives.

The business community is also likely to save on the money that would otherwise have been spent in the purchase of new food equipment, as well as in replacing other equipments. In this case, the outsourced company has to assume this new role. This also goes for the salaries and wages of the employees working at the food services department in a business entity.

Once a management contractor has been tasked with the responsibility of providing food services functions to a business entity, he has to pay his own workforce. Therefore, the company is able to save on employee salaries.

Explain the unique aspects of food service operations that drive these Advantages

Unlike the production of other products, foodservice is characterized by certain unique characteristics and these can affect the decisions made regarding production and services. To start with, there are certain peak periods when the demand for food tends to be high (for example during lunch, supper, and breakfast).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In between the demand is somewhat erratic. Also, the demand for food can be affected by competitive events or time of the year and this can result in the modification of food production to suit the demand. We also need to note that food production is by and large, labor intensive, often requiring unskilled and skilled labour.

At the same time, the perishable nature of food means that there is need to have professionals handling food during production, while preparing it, and during serving. A change in food production can also affect the menu planning. The aforementioned unique aspects of food service operations are therefore the driving force when a business entity decides to outsource the food services function to a management contractor and in the process, it can benefit from the associated advantages.

[supanova_question]

Managing Product and Service Innovation for Kodak Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction Innovation is an object, idea or practice that is regarded as new by individuals or units for adoption (Rodgers, 1983). It is the invention of more effective or better ideas, services, processes, products or technologies which are readily accepted by the target market, the society and governments. In regard to innovation, the target market is the most important.

Innovations act as the catalysts for growth in the increasingly competitive business field. Irrespective of the field a company operates, firms must continually transform structures of the economy from within by being innovative in products, services and processes.

Companies must also seek for improved ways and methods to enchant their customer base with improved and better quality, price, service and durability. These are the products of innovation which might be realized through the integration of organizational strategies and advanced technologies.

Innovations will not only add value to the customers, but also make business economically feasible (Tushman

[supanova_question]

How postmodernism can be used as a theoretical approach to the Humanities Essay essay help

There are myriad of practices, methods and ideals that encompass the concept of postmodernism, especially in regards to humanities. As a matter of fact, this concept entails quite a number of theories attached to critical thinking and philosophy, contrary to the belief that it is a philosophical movement. Some of the most common theoretical applications of postmodernism have been witnessed in humanities, post-structuralism and feminism.

In other words, postmodernism is apparently another perspective through which traditional ideologies can be approached in non-conventional ways by deviating from the mode of superculturalism that has been pre-established. Owing to this complexity in defining postmodernism, the concept has been treated and debated with lots of controversy.

For instance, this concept gained a lot of prominence during the 1950s before it could eventually be discussed alongside humanities such as art and literature during the 1960s. In any case, the origin of postmodernism is largely believed to have been developed through humanities.

On the other hand, Humanities include all those study disciplines that involve the human race but at the same time void of science or scientific origin. Most branches in literature, theology or philosophy studies lie under humanities. Theology and musical and visual arts are also studied in humanities. English, among other languages form a strong basis in humanities as a medium of communication. The liberal studies, as well as general human artistic works, are all embraced in humanities.

Needless to say, it is definite that humanities can be theoretically approached from the concept of postmodernism. For example, theories that attempt to explain metaphysics, formalism, constructivism, realism, relativism, as well as positivism, are firmly grounded in postmodernism in spite of the slight departure. In a sense, the western civilization has been critiqued through its intellectual pillars, traditional practices and the enlightenment legacy.

According to postmodernism theory, most of those elements that are considered to be realities are merely social constructs. As a result, they are prone to transform at any given time. This conforms to philosophical thinking of certain theorists of the 20th century.

For instance, Jean Baudrillard (1929-2007) argued out that there are currently so many signs that reality seems to have disappeared. Moreover, the concept of postmodernism theoretically emphasizes the relative importance of motivations, power relations and language when formulating ideologies and belief systems. This coincides with most tenets in humanities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, the sharp binary classification has been attacked by the postmodernism concept. Some of the classifications that have been disputed include colonial versus imperial, black versus white, gay versus straight and female versus male. Such strict classifications are disputed in postmodernism. As a theoretical explanation towards humanities, studies in sociology and political science tend to benefit a lot from this standing point.

The concept continues to argue out that any form of reality should be treated as plural. In addition, realty depends on the interpretation of the parties involved as well as the nature of what is being addressed. Indeed, this can be used as theoretical explanation to the theory of truth as portrayed in philosophy. The concept of postmodernism is also quite categorical that since people’s perception of the world is subjective, absolute truth is non-existent.

To date, it is evident several fields in humanities have been influenced by postmodernism. Some of theories derived from postmodernism have been used either directly or indirectly in music, visual arts, anthropology, history, architecture, linguistics, sociology, literary criticism as well as religion.

While postmodernism has been discussed at length in various pieces of literature, it is profound to note that modernism has also vastly contributed to most humanities while the intrinsic difference between the two is minimal. Moreover, postmodernism has also changed various perspectives in the interpretation of the law as well as in business and marketing.

It has also been considered to be an academic movement by far and large since it depicts some form of reactivity to modernism in as far as the entire field of humanity is concerned. In particular, theories derived from postmodernism are often closely related to skepticism, textuality and plurality. Hence, humanity is the key beneficiary of such theoretical platforms.

In yet another description of postmodernism by Fredric Jameson, who was a literary critic, it is evident that this concept was also understood as part and parcel of the economic theory of capitalism that was cultural-based and dominant as well. This took place during the historical period of late capitalism. The latter has also been conclusively expounded by Ernest Mandel, who was a Marxist theorist.

According to the latter theorist, the concept of postmodernism took shape during the late capitalism years and was largely associated with consumer capitalism, multinational capitalism and globalization. Nonetheless, globalization seems to be a recent development in the field of humanities, although aptly fitting within the confines of postmodernism. Furthermore, the postmodern philosophy, such as the concepts of objectivity and subjectivity are purely developed from the theoretical application of postmodernism.

We will write a custom Essay on How postmodernism can be used as a theoretical approach to the Humanities specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To recap it all, it is vital to reiterate that the development of postmodernism theory has largely influenced the ideological assumptions in the field of humanity. Therefore, it can be used as a theoretical approach to humanities.

[supanova_question]

Research Methodology: Data Collection and Analysis Essay essay help online: essay help online

Research Methodology This chapter discusses the methodological approaches used by the researcher to collect, analyze and present its research findings. In this case, the study followed a positivist and phenomenological paradigm. The selection of the paradigm determines how the study expresses the underlying research perspective toward how things are connected (Brenda, 2003).

The study’s choice of a positivism and phenomenal approach remain appropriate to the study. This paradigm succeeds in investigating the study scenario in its natural setting to deal with the existing factors affecting children because of the “No Child left Behind Act.”

Data Collection The researcher used a mixed research design in the collection, and analysis of data. The study shall collect quantitative data by administering a survey questionnaire. The survey instrument shall enable the researcher to collect and analyze empirical data to investigate the effect of “No Child left Behind” Act on children. The collection of quantitative data is appropriate to determining the existence and extent of the relationship between the Act and several strategic effects (Brenda, 2003).

The researcher’s choice of a qualitative research design remains appropriate to the study scenario because it allows a researcher to examine the phenomenon in its natural setting during the study. Phenomenological approach enables the researcher to explain factors influencing the factors in the research topic to enable a plausible explanation of the study theory.

Instrumentation The researcher collected qualitative data by using focused interviews to assess the effect of the Act on disabled children (Brenda, 2003). The interview shall consist of open-ended questions to give a general insight into the possible effects of the programs under the guidance of “No Child left Behind” Act.

The use of open-end questions is to help the researcher to win first hand confidence of the respondents, and objectivity of the responses (Merriam, 1998).

Sampling technique The study utilizes a random sampling approach in selecting the sample of the study. This technique ensures that the research cushions its results from errors of biased source of data.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Data Analysis Qualitative Data Analysis

The researcher’s use of thematic analysis to analyze interview findings helps to analyze data drawn from interviews (Merriam, 1998). This approach is based on fundamental trends, patterns of behavior or life exhibited by individuals within their environment. After interview data, the researcher developed patterns related to the data.

Later, data cataloguing was used to identify and formulate themes. Pattern grouping was finally done and relationships between groups determined (Merriam, 1998). This gave room for a general assertion that could explain and clarify practices of “No Child left Behind” Act on disabled children.

Quantitative Data Analysis

Quantitative research on the other hand, deals with collecting and analyzing numeric data. This form of research entails the use of relatively large-scale data in order to examine or ascertain a social phenomenon through statistical analysis. In this research, the researcher selected a qualitative research design with the view to answer the research question under review. According to Merriam (1998), qualitative research studies things in their natural way or setting, in which the researcher is an integral tool in data collection.

Under this approach, data collected is in the form of words, or pictures and the outcome are used as a process and not product. The application of qualitative research method in this study was to enable the research to find and develop theories that would explain the relationship between variables through elements of qualitative research (Brenda, 2003).

References Brenda, L. (2003). Design research: methods and perspectives. New York: MIT Press.

Merriam, S. B. (1998). Qualitative research and case study applications in education. New York, NY: Jossey-Bass Publishers

[supanova_question]

John Wilkes Booth’s life and his assassination of Abraham Lincoln Research Paper college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Career as an Actor

Business Ventures

His Interest in Politics

Assassination of Lincoln

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction John Wilkes Booth was born at Bel Air in Hartford County, Maryland on May 10, 1838, to Junius Brutus Booth and Mary Ann Holmes. Who had come to the United States from England in June 1821(Clarke, 79). He was shot dead on April 26 1865, at the age of 26. He secretly married the daughter of Senator John Hale of New Hampshire. As a young boy, Booth was athletic and popular. He went on to become a skilled equestrian and fencer.

He attended Bel Air Academy in 1850-1851. He was intelligence, though he was not interested in education, he loved horses, fencing and entertaining people. He later attended Milton boarding school for boys at Sparks Maryland, were he nurtured his love for acting classical work (Wilson, 113).

He later joined St. Timothy’s Hall an Episcopal Military at Catonsville Maryland. Were he was under strict supervision and as a result, he later on sympathized with the South’s Confederation Army and gave them support. Due to the sudden dead of his father, Booth dropped out of school a year later after joining the school. At the age of sixteen Booth was interested in theatre were he went on and became a leading actor.

Career as an Actor Although inexperienced Booth made is first debut on August 1855 as a supporting actor, at Earl of Richmond at Baltimore’s Charles Street Theatre. Afterwards he joined a Stock Company at Arch Street Theatre at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania in 1857. However, he was not as good as his half brother in elocution.

He nevertheless captured the imagination of his audience, by growing into an outstanding and accomplished actor (Townsend, 55). He played his part with such great enthusiasm that the audiences admired him. He made his first acting appearance in New York City in May 1862, he made his Boston debut, playing nightly at the Boston museum in Richard III Romeo and Juliet May 13, the Boston Transcript‘s review the next day called Booth;

In January 1863, Booth’s acting career was looking bright, when he returned to Boston.

Business Ventures He invested in varies ventures like land speculation at Boston’s back bay section also invested in 31.5 acre farm were oil had previously been discovered and by early 1864 they had drilled a 1,900ft well yielding 25 barrels per day at Allegheny river. The Civil War in the South was getting complicated. With Lincoln’s re-election, it was clear that there was no end in site. Booth abandoned the oil business on November 27, 1865

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There was no much know about is business venture, this was because he died young and he devoted most of is time to acting and enjoying the fine things of life, and the involvement in politics, did not allow him to concentrate on his business.

His Interest in Politics In April 12 1861, a civil war broke out, his admiration for the South’s secession had become an obsession, and he publicly advocated for South’s secession in November 6 1860. Later on during the civil war, 11 states seceded from the Union, but home state of Booth favored joining the Union, at the same time, Lincoln suspended the writ of habeas corpus and imposed a martial law (Rhodehamel, 58).

That saw Maryland remain with the Union, which lead to the arrest and imprisonment of pro- secession Maryland political leader and the stationing of Federal troops at Baltimore. Booth was against the abolition of slavery and the right of the former slaves to vote that he wrote a letter criticizing the Union Government for wanting to abolish slavery. He cooperated with the South’s Confederation Army by smuggling quinine for them.

Assassination of Lincoln The prospect of re-election of President Lincoln angered Booth so much that he regretted having promised his mother for not joining the military. He was disappointed, to the point of regret as to why he never acted before to put to an end the life of the Union main supporters.

This gave him more reason as to why he should kidnap Lincoln with an aim of exchanging him for the South’s prisoners. He recruited Samuel Arnold and Michael O’Laughlen to help him carry out is plan. After a landslide win, President Lincoln advocated for the rights of former slaves to vote.

That man’s looks, his coarse low jokes and anecdotes, his vulgar similes, and his policy are a disgrace to the seat he holds. He made the tool of the North, to crush out slavery.

When the President stated his desire for giving the former slaves an opportunity to choose their leader and participate in the nations building process, at a gathering at, white house. This speech disappointed Booth so much that he decided that that would be last public appearance of Lincoln. In April 14 1865, Booth went to Ford’s theatre to get is mail, while there he was informed that the President and his wife will be attending the play at the theatre that evening.

We will write a custom Research Paper on John Wilkes Booth’s life and his assassination of Abraham Lincoln specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This presented a perfect opportunity to carry out is assassination attempt (Smith, 120). He therefore immediately went on to make plans to assassinate the President. As he had access to the Lincoln box, later that evening after confirming the presence of the President, he slipped into the box at 10pm and shot the President. Booth as a fugitive on April 26, he was tracked and shot dead at Garrett’s farm, just south of Port Royal, Caroline County, Virginia.

Conclusion There is some controversies surrounding the death of Booth, with some historians indicating that Booth had escaped to Japan, and there was an attempt to cover up, till to date it can’t be authoritatively be proven whether he was the one indeed shot died at Garrett’s farm. Therefore, there is a need to conclusively, lie to rest these theories by performing a DNA test on his remains to prove his identity for the last time.

Works Cited Clarke, James. A Sister’s Memoir. USA: University Press of Mississippi, 1996. Print.

Rhodehamel, John. The Writings of John Wilkes Booth. USA: University of Illinois, 1997. Print.

Smith, Gene. The story of America’s legendary theatrical family. New York: 1992. Print.

Townsend, George. The life, crime and capture of John Wilkes Booth. New York: 1977. Print.

Wilson, Francis. John Wilkes Booth. New York: 1972. Print.

[supanova_question]

Military Fascism in pre-WWII Japan Essay cheap essay help

Fascism represents a kind of a political system whereby the state possesses total power. As such, every citizen is required to work for the country as well as the government. The head of state for such a state is a dictator or some other powerful individual who uses police force and strong army to maintain law and order. Fascism was first seen in Japan during the period in which it used to export most of her goods, mostly silk and luxury items (Tsutsui, 2009).

At the beginning of the great depression, luxuries were foregone and this left Japan incapable of fueling her factories. In order to put a stop to the depression, Japan had two choices to make; invading China for some more resources or closing down their factories. During this time the Japanese government was being ruled by Emperor Hirohito and his army referred to as ‘a diet’ that was slowly becoming fascists.

This permitted the military together with the factory proprietors to have great influences over the decisions of the country; thereby opting to invade China and Manchuria. It was at a later time that the Japan’s government began to closely conform to the Army Nationalistic objectives. Thence, as time went by, military fascism developed in japan (Tsutsui, 2009).

With control over the government and, essentially, the whole country, the army pushed Japan further and further into the pacific war and ultimately led to more war with the west. A number of other reasons contributed to this Japans military fascism and one such reason was thirst for power.

The Meiji restoration unleashed massive changes in Japan. This was a period of revolutionary modernization and as a motivation from these, came forth the desire for prestige, power and wealth as a way to redress the enforcement of unequal treaties placed upon them by the western powers during the past (Tsutsui, 2009).

Moreover, the Sino-Japanese War victory, gave Japan a first real bridgehead on the continent of Asia, forcing China to acknowledge the independence of Korea and giving up Taiwan and Liaotung peninsula (Tsutsui, 2009). However, Russia, Germany and France dissented that the intrusion of Japanese to Liaotung would stage a constant jeopardy to China thence, forced a deeply chagrined Japan to desolate the peninsula.

Furthermore, the Japanese exertions to incorporate their economy into a liberal global order became futile earlier on in the 1930’s when the economies of the west that were depressed placed a hindrance upon the Japanese trade so that they could guard against the markets of their colonies. The structure of international peace that was substantiated in the League of Nations was thought of by the Japanese to have favored the nations of the west who were controlling the resources of the world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the west had played in a hypocritical way when they barred Japanese out-migration via the anti-Asian in-migration laws of the 1920’s. These series of events caused the Japanese to deflect from democracy and indorse fascism and its extension to the japans empire (Tsutsui, 2009).

In conclusion, the slowly burning aggression of Japan was steered with frustrations with a world whose governance appeared inclined in preference of the west. The military fascism was a way of expressing the Japanese economic, power and policy dissatisfaction by the west, and it hence contributed in some ways to the rise of World War II. They charged their hardship upon the western countries and the incompetent government.

Most citizens of Japan likewise conceived that the government did almost nothing to help them, despite the fact that it stood for democracy. They therefore began to buy into what the Nationalistic patriotic societies were embracing- military strength, reconstruction and respect for autonomy. They started to join these patriotic societies and the army, consequently resulting to the rise of military fascism in pre-WWII Japan.

[supanova_question]

Market Structure during Post-Mao China: Capitalism or Socialism? Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

The words Capitalism and Socialism are distinct in usage and have been used in the Maoist regime and the Reform Era, which is commonly known as the post-Mao regime. This happened after the death of Mao in September 1976. Deng, the chief architect of change who explicitly rejected Mao’s “politics in command” which brought about certain undesirable aspects such as the Great Leap Forward and the Cultural Revolution replaced it.

His economic objective was to do away with the all the aspects that made China poor especially peasant backwardness. One of the key economic sectors that needed to be reformed were national defense, agriculture as well as science and technology. The aim of this change is to transform China into a socially and economically highly developed country within the next 30 to 50 years.

China is no doubt in a capitalistic economy after going through an unsatisfactory “halfway house” which was neither capitalism nor socialism that brought about bureaucratic intrusion in the economy. This yielded very poor results in the economy. The Chinese economy has seen undergone a sweeping economy.

Most of China’s retail stores and service shops are currently under private ownership. Privatization of property has also extended to other sectors such as the real estate and the agricultural sectors. This has led to the permeation of a great sense of division of labor in the agricultural sector. Despite the increasing trend of the cost of living in China, a great proportion of the Chinese population appreciates the freedom of choice within the Chinese markets.

Most of the retail stores offer a variety of products with varying consumer friendly prices. The communist ties of the Chinese community have lost their strong ties paving way for a new approach to the economic affairs of the nation. This has led to a great improvement in the standards of living for most of the citizens especially those are not financially stable.

In the traditional setting, capitalism refers to the control of the means of production in an economy by the affluent class- capitalists. The class of capitalists is able to control a large proportion of a nation’s economy because of the favors they receive from the political system in the country in question.

In the contemporary society, it refers to the privatization of the means of production in a country’s economy. On the other hand, socialism refers to the phenomenon whereby the ownership as well as the major means of production is under the control of the state. All the people in the society have substantial control over the available means of production. It is applied to an economic system in which property is held in common and not individually and a political hierarchy governs the most important relationships within the economic system.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The economy in the post-Mao era has undergone some changes. One of the major changes is the increase in the gap between the rich and the poor in the Chinese community. The housing market and consumerism have undergone drastic changes in the recent past. Additionally, most of the economic sectors have undergone privatization.

There has been an increase in the number of people in the Chinese community as well as a similar increase in the number of the affluent in the society. The poor are getting poorer whereas the rich continue amassing wealth. Capitalism makes it hard for the Chinese people to adapt and live to tell the tale.

It makes it hard for the people to identify with what they were used to such as their traditional culture, family background and ones surname. In essence, identity of the majority in the Chinese population is continually becoming a problem. Today, socioeconomic status and the struggle to be rich are choking them to death for the mere purpose of identity in the society. It is very clear that while some are gaining, others are losing pushing socioeconomic classes in opposite directions.

Getting a job has become a painful experience for many unlike before where people had work units. Most of the jobs are under privatization. Much effort is on the peoples’ abilities to produce quality products and work effectively. They are now competing to get a job and finding new identities as they work on their own, which proves to be vicious and difficult.

Greed too has changed the way people relate and conduct their lives. Due to the hardships associated with the capitalist market, many people have to work for longer hours to be able to access most of the basic consumer products. During the Mao regime, the people measured their wealth in terms of children, land as well as their homes.

They also acted as a form of their identity. The earlier Chinese population would know ones socioeconomic status and their identity if they mentioned where they lived. This too changed during post-Mao era where housing was privatized. “The demise of public housing regime and the rise of commercial real estate industry have opened up new opportunities for the people in the urban centers to seek differentiated lifestyles, status recognition and cultural orientations” (Zhang, 2008, 24).

[supanova_question]

Contrast-Enhanced Ultrasound in Focal Liver Lesions Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Contrast‐Enhanced Ultrasound of Benign Focal Lesions

Contrast‐Enhanced Ultrasound of Malignant Lesions

Contrast‐Enhanced Ultrasound of Traumatic Lesions

Contrast Enhanced Ultrasound Guided Percutaneous Biopsy

Merits of Contrast Enhanced Ultrasound

Demerits of Contrast Enhanced Ultrasound And Their Solutions

Conclusion

List of References

Introduction Contrast-enhanced ultrasound (CEUS) is now gaining popularity as a key a tool for demonstration and detection of focal liver lesions. It has replaced the normal medical ultrasound as an imaging technique. A normal medical ultrasound as an imaging technique has generally been the gold standard diagnostic imaging technique for the liver across the world.

Its pros lie in its affordability and availability. However, one of its major pitfalls is its reliability in demonstrating focal lesions despite the advent of Doppler. This has often been a major challenge because of the grey scale appearances of the sonograms causing blurring patterns. Small lesions with diameters >1cm and iso-echoic lesions too pose great difficulty in this diagnostic modality.

The sensitivity is poor with a false-negative rate of > 50 % (Wernecke et al 1991, p. 731). In addition, inaccessibility to the eighth of the liver is a major setback in detecting lesions in the segment.

With the advent of Doppler ultrasound, more insight in the diagnosis of liver lesions has been added by the use of the arterial patterns whose abnormality may be characteristic of certain pathology e.g. the spoke wheel pattern observed in focal nodular hyperplasia.

Contrast enhanced ultrasound involves intravenous injection of contrast media (microbubbles) prior to the ultrasound procedure. The microbubbles remain in the systemic circulation for a given duration of time during which ultrasonic waves are directed to the anatomic site of organ pathology. An echo is then reflected by the microbubbles which are then converted into contrast-enhanced image by the ultrasound system.

The operator needs to familiarize himself with the ultrasound equipment and its ‘contrast’ settings, which is dependant on the type of machine. The contrast agent is prepared according to instructions provided. 20 ml of normal saline should be given following the administration of the contrast. An intravenous cannula is placed away from the side of ultrasound examination.

A stop-watch in the machine is used for accurate interpretation of the phase of imaging (Arterial, venous and late phases). Scanning is then done for a period of at least 5 minutes. The examination may be video recorded for later review. Still images are also taken at points to help highlight the pathology.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some focal lesions in the liver not demonstrable on ultrasound may not be suitable for demonstration with contrast agents. Small lesions <1 cm, may be difficult to characterize especially when deep within parenchyma, generally.However, liver metastases, even those < 0.5 cm, are normally demonstrated using slow infusions through the liver in the later portal-venous phase or the late phase.

The characterization of focal liver lesions forms a key element in the majority of radiological practices. Although the normal medical ultrasound imaging is useful for the identification of focal liver lesions, accurate demonstration and characterization of a lesion is often difficult even with the use of colour Doppler (Nino-Murcia et al., 1992, p. 1195).

Microbubble contrast enhanced ultrasound (CEUS) has proven diagnostic accuracy in focal liver lesions (Bleuzen et al., 2006, p. 40). It can also be used to augment other imaging modalities like plain abdominal X-ray, contrast enhanced ultrasound guided percutaneous biopsy and B-mode ultrasound. It does not use ionizing radiation and is non-invasive unlike angiography or biopsy. It is well tolerated, affordable and relatively time efficient.

LIVER LESION Sensitivity Specificity Haemangioma Focal nodular hyperplasia

Liver abscess

Liver metastasis

Hepatocellular carcinoma

Cholangiocarcinoma

88.9% 83%

66.7%

77.3–90%

94.1%

57.1%

100% 98%

95%

100%

93.2%

100%

Table 1: The quoted sensitivity and specificity for the detection and demonstration of some common liver lesions using microbubble contrast (Source: Berry

[supanova_question]

World Regional Geography Report: London and Paris Comparison Report (Assessment) essay help free: essay help free

Map comparison assignment Both London and Paris represent primate cities of their respective states- England and France respectively. London is synonymous to Paris with respect to spatial structuring and land use patterns. On focusing the map of London (figure 1-9), it is apparent that the city is located centrally enhancing its influence on the entire state with ease.

To bolster its influence the city is served by radial rail and road networks that spread to its rich hinterland. The core of the city otherwise the CBD that is characterized by congested neighborhoods transition outwardly to sparsely populated suburbs. To date, the evolving business centers around London are competing with the CBD.

Akin to London is Paris which is characterized by its central location vis-à-vis other cities within the state. Paris forms the core and, sits at the helm of power influencing the entire state. Even though it is located in less productive region, its hinterland, rich agricultural land is the reason behind its success.

Road and rail network which spread radial from the CBD facilitates its influence. However, just like London emerging urban centers on the peripheral of the state rival Paris. One such city is Lyon which is still being dwarfed by Paris in terms of population density (Kimble 492).

Both figures (fig. 1-3 and G-10) are meant to locate the modern European geographical realm and its origin. However, the accuracy of the information given about the origin of the states by both maps does not coincide in some aspect and, to some extend differ in the actual boundaries.

With regards to the origin, while figure G-10 owe the existence of powerful western European states to a rich agricultural hinterland, figure 1-3 owe this to accumulated minerals. With regards the boundary, while the absolute location of Europe is defined by high and upper-middle economies that stretch to Eastern Russia, the relative location of Europe (fig. 1-3) is limited to few states.

According to figure 1-3 the Arabic realm stretches deep within states located towards Iberia. To this end, it is evident that with varied views a map projection meant for the same location can differ in many aspects.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The boundary of Europe’s core area cuts across several states that include Southern Norway, Sweden, Poland, Slovakia, Austria, Slovenia, Italy, Spain, Ireland and United Kingdom. The boundary encompasses states that fall within regions defined by high income economies.

This is depicted by map G-10 that defines states and economies. Also, as portrayed by figure G-9 these are regions that are well endowed with industrial minerals and hence support large populations of persons. With regards to climatic condition (figure G-8) this core area is characterized by short dry season with average rainfall between 100-200 mm per annum as portrayed by figure G-7(Schaefer 279).

Europe as a geographical realm is a composite of many languages that fall within several groups. However, the discrete components of the groups are not mutually understandable. In turn, this has been an impediment to efforts geared towards unifying Europeans. However, on focus to United Kingdom English as a language spoken by the three states of Scotland, Ireland and England is the reason behind the existing peace.

Similarly, Switzerland enjoys a peaceful co-existence with its neighbor the Germans for the reason that they both speak Germanic language. This also applies to the Belgians of whom majority speak Germanic akin to its neighbors. The Polish who fall under Slavic group have pockets of Indo-Iranian groups that initially differed with both the Russians and the Germans to form an independent state- Poland.

Finland enjoys a peaceful co-existence with its neighbors thanks to a common language apparently spoken by most of its neighbors. Finally, Romania, an Island, is characterized by a single language- Komi vital in enhancing unity (MacLeod and Jones 507).

Map construction Map 1: showing Europe’s physical geography

Map 2: political-cultural geographic information.

We will write a custom Assessment on World Regional Geography Report: London and Paris Comparison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Map 3: Economic-urban information

Works Cited Kimble, Hebert. “The Inadequacy of the Regional Concept” London Essays in Geography 2.17 (1951): 492-512. Print.

MacLeod, George, and Jones Mother. “Renewing The Geography of Regions.” Environment and Planning 16.9 (2001): 669-695. Print.

Schaefer, Frankline. “Exceptionalism in Geography: A Methodological Examination.” Annals of the Association of American Geographers 43.3 (1953): 226-245. Print.

[supanova_question]

China Mobile Limited Coursework best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction In the economic hard times, firms are confused on whether to reduce their marketing budget or continue investing more on brand building hoping that they could possibly gain a competitive hedge over other companies. Most companies are aggressively increasing their marketing expenditures so as to increase their sales.

The annual ranking that was done by BusinessWeek in 2008 showing the 100 Best Global Brands showed that US firms are keeping their marketing budgets steady and as a result have a steadily increasing income (BusinessWeek 2008).

However, no Chinese firm appeared in the top a hundred brands globally. Most Chinese companies have put in place strategic considerations to their brands while engaging little in global brand development as part of international marketing strategy.

China Mobile Ltd was ranked first in 2007 Best Chinese Brands (Interbrand China 2007, 7). According to China Mobile Limited (2011) in 2007, China Mobile had a brand value of 313,000 RMB millilion an increase of 11% from its brand value in 2006. Its operating revenue in 2010 was 485,231 RMB million, an increase of 7.3% from its 2009 operating revenue.

In 2010, it made a profit of 119,640 RMB million. According to Interbrand China’s Chief Executive Officer, Frank Chen, the brand value shows the discounted cash flow of the firms total earnings that it is expected to fetch to the shareholders in the coming fiscal years.

This implies that brands are among the company’s economic assets and therefore need serious management. A positive change in the company’s brand value comprehensively reflects an increase in performance that has been achieved by its management team through the application of various strategies.

Branding has become a major focus for Mobile China and it has produced abundant returns. The company estimated its customers to be about 584 million in December last year. In 2011 alone, it has had an increase of customer number by 16.824 million in the months of January to March to reach the 600 million mark (BBC 21 April, 2011). The company has voice business as well as new businesses.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Its voice business provides its customers with the opportunity to make as well as to receive calls using their mobile phones within the regions of its network coverage. Its services range from local calls to international roaming. The new businesses include data business as well as value-added services.

China Mobile Group provides its GSM international roaming service is in 237 countries while its GPRS roaming services is in 186 countries (China Mobile Limited 2011). China Mobile has put much emphasis on attributes that differentiate its brand from those of other companies as well as strengthening its relationship with its customers with an aim of ensuring present and future earnings.

Quelch’s seven features of a Global Brand Brand development requires various marketing strategies. In order to achieve a global brand status, the company must have achieved the benchmarks which are considered universal features for the world’s top brands. Quelch (1999) considered seven features as being the benchmarks of the top global brands.

Strong in home market

China Mobile Limited has a very strong market base in China which has mostly supported the growth of its brand value. Its strong market base has made it occupy the top position in terms of the best brands in the Chinese market for the past few years. According to Quelch (1999, 5) companies have to be strong in their home markets so as to be successful in the international market.

According to China Mobile Limited (2011) the company’s is China’s leading mobile services provider. It has many subsidiaries which it refers to as Group which operate in China. The company has been doing well in the Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited since its incorporation in 1997.

It also entered the Shanghai Stock Exchange in early 2004 and has since established itself in the Shanghai stock market. In 2010, the company received awards for Best Overall Investor Relations which were awarded by Large Gap, Sector, Asia Pacific and a Hong Kong Company.

In 2009, it was awarded for Best Corporate Social Responsibility as well as Most Committed to a Strong Dividend Policy. In 2010 for example, the company’s dividend per share was HK$3.014 (China Mobile Limited 2011).

We will write a custom Coursework on China Mobile Limited specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to China Mobile Limited, achieving large customer base in China and its other countries of operations has involved improving network quality and customer service, expanding its 3G business and promoting cost efficiency as well as effectiveness of its operations. China Mobile also has special services that it offers specifically in the Chinese market.

According to Panda Phone (2007)Shenzhen Mass Card was introduced by the company to serve the Chinese population. The system is a pre-paid card that allows customers to recharge money through scratch cards or other means such as electronic recharge tickets and aerial recharge. It is applicable around China particularly in Hong Kong, Macao and Beijing China.

In 2010, the Groups overall customer base increased by 11.8% to reach 584 million (China Mobile Limited 2011). It has continued to maintain its leading position in terms of market share with net additional customers of about 61.73 million in 2010 (China Mobile Limited 2011). Its major market segment focus has been the rural as well as the migrant markets in China.

It offers information which particularly targets the rural population. Some of these services include Agricultural Information Service through the use of the internet as well as mobile phones. Its corporate customer base in China has also continued to grow. Its corporate customers have included government as well as various industries in China such as manufacturing, energy along with the finance industry.

As a result of China Mobile’s huge market share that it has been able accumulate in the Chinese Mobile Communications Market, it has been able to achieve considerable economies of scale that enables it earn significant returns while providing great value as well as service to its customers.

Geographical/balance in sales

Mobile China is an international company that boasts of having the largest market share among mobile phone services providers in the world. In terms network scale, China Mobile is ranked first. Mobile China has several large brands which include M-Zone and Go Tone which are leading GSM digital mobile service brands; Shenzhen Mass Card among others.

China Mobile provides international roaming services in 237 countries and GPRS roaming services in 186 countries (China Mobile Limited 2011). According to China Mobile (2011) the company has the most sophisticated GSM International Roaming Services.

According to Quelch (1999, 6) an international company must have a minimum level of global recognition, awareness as well as sales in order to achieve the status of a global brand. The company entered the New York Stock Exchange back in 1997 and has had an average performance since then.

Not sure if you can write a paper on China Mobile Limited by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Investors in the US who are interested in the company business are therefore able to invest in it by buying shares through the New York Stock Exchange. The total number of China Mobile’s customers in the US is about 1.9 million. The company also operates in Pakistan.

China Mobile has launched two major joint-ventures aimed at expanding its market shares in other countries. China Mobile has agreed on a joint-venture with Nokia Corporations and Siemens AG to develop a mobile internet technology which is faster than the present 3G network.

They also agreed a partnership with South Korea’s SK Telecom which is the largest telecommunication firm in the country in order to develop modern wireless technologies. These joint-ventures and partnerships helps China Mobile increase its sales by using other brands as well as their marketing network to make sales. China Mobile today uses Nokia and Samsung brands.

Address similar consumer needs worldwide

According to Quelch (1999, 6) the physical products and services that a company with a global brand offers should be the same throughout the world so as to serve the widely-held human needs. Mobile China provides voice and data services, it has introduced the use of broadband in mobile communications, mobile internet, promotes mobile handsets and also integrates mobile handsets in the daily lives of people.

It also promotes mobile TV as well as other businesses. The company standardizes its marketing throughout its various markets. It develops brands that adapt its marketing across cultural as well as socio-economic settings. Mobile China provides standardized services and products to its customers worldwide.

For example, the company has developed standardized internet products like Access Card for Machine as well as Remote Video Monitoring Service. In addition, it has developed Access Module for Sensors as well as other industry application templates.

The company has also established International Information Hubs which have standardized centralized operations aimed at achieving economies of scale (Duffy

[supanova_question]

Evaluation as a Important Part of the Educational Process Coursework a level english language essay help

Evaluation is an important part of the educational process. It is crucial for future success of the educational process and educational program. It shows what kind of work has been done, what objectives were accomplished and what are the benefits for participants. In education, evaluation is a basis for decision making that allows defining the alteration for the existing educational program.

There are approaches how to perform evaluation of the educational program, one of them is “program theory” which can also be represented in different ways. In this paper, we are going to provide a model of the future evaluation on an existing innovative program aimed at improving students’ proficiency in spoken and written English through writing English drama scripts and producing drama performance.

First of all, we should distinguish between evaluation, assessment and measurement and define what a program evaluation is, and what its benefits are. Thus, assessment and measurement are the components of evaluation. Assessment is a data-gathering and measurement “refers to the process by which the attributes or dimensions of some physical object are determined” (Kizlik 2011).

Assessment and evaluation can be distinguished according to three criteria: purposes, objects being assessed and steps in conduction. Thus, the purpose of assessment is to define the opportunities for learning and mane a diagnosis of the students’ performance, the assessed objects are students (class, group or course), the steps are taken in assessment are a number of targets (the results of instructions).

“Evaluation is more that a judgment of ultimate success or failure” (Frechtling 2007 p. 3). The purpose of evaluation is to improve the existing practices of educational program and provide results for future decision-making. As opposed to assessment, the objects being evaluated are particular programs, projects or few teachers that take part in projects.

Major steps taking when evaluating a program or a project are description of the program, providing a theory on how to input the outcomes and conducting a research on how to test the theory provided. According to Muraskin (1993), “evaluation can be an important tool in improving the quality of a program if it is integrated into the fabric of an educational program rather than added on after the fact.”(n. p.).

In this regard, evaluation can provide considerable benefits for the educational program. The program evaluation clearly articulates goals and objectives and strengthens the program design in such a way. Second, it serves a basis for decision making for improving the quality of the project. Third, it provides a contribution to making constructive changes which enhances the effectiveness of the project.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Next, it helps identify successes of the outcomes. Finally, it ensures connection between school program strategies and student outcomes (“Program Evaluation” 2009).

There are many reasons to conduct evaluation, among them are the possibilities to determine the effectiveness of programs, document of objectives that have been met, provide information about service useful to program staff and students, enable staff to provide changes to improve the program’s effectiveness (Muraskin 1993).

In order to create an appropriate strategy for program evaluation, it is necessary to know its logic. Weiss (1997) provides logic of evaluation analysis that consists of the steps that follow: describing program (input; activities; outcomes; causal links ),making comparisons (intended versus observed; pretest versus posttest; experimental versus control), developing and modeling the causal processes, locating unintended effects, examining deviant cases, ruling out alternative explanations, interpreting implications of findings, fashioning recommendations for changes and providing policy analysis that findings suggest.

This is the way the evaluation should be modeled and provided. Davidson (2005) suggests that “evaluation need to be designed and conducted in ways that address the information needs of program staff and other upstream stakeholders” (p. 23).

Evaluation of the program is usually implemented through the program theory. According to Patricia J. Rogers (2000):

Evaluations that are based on program theory have two essential elements: an explicit model of the program (in particular, the mechanism by which program activities is understood to contribute to the intended outcome and an evaluation which is guided by this model (p. 4).

There are minimum three component of the program theory: program activities, the intended outcomes, and mechanisms that lead to the intended outcomes. Program theory can be represented in different ways. There are four broad approaches that can be used to represent it: outcomes chain logic theory, pipeline logic models, realist matrices, and narratives.

We will write a custom Coursework on Evaluation as a Important Part of the Educational Process specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More We will focus on logic models that “show a sequence of results leading to the ultimate outcomes or impact of interest” (Funnell

[supanova_question]

The initiative by Christian Alliance College to enhance teaching Coursework essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

References

Introduction Assessment is very effective in as far as enhancing learning is concerned. This is especially so when learning is characterized by a cycle of feedback and adjustments. It is very important to understand this concept on assessment because education assessment ought to be applied in the most suitable way as possible to cater for all the needs of the students.

Poor application of assessment method during learning affects the learning process and jeopardizes learners’ achievement. There are various kinds of assessment methods, which if professionally and appropriately implemented, are associated with various benefits.

This paper aims at bringing into light the models behind assessment thereby giving insight on how assessment should be adeptly put in place to enhance effective learning and students’ achievement in the classroom.

Discussion The initiative by Christian Alliance College to enhance teaching and learning through assessment is workable. This is because assessment is very useful in identifying gaps present during learning and teaching, and in bridging these gaps. The need to enhance teaching and learning is due to the fact that the students lack the confidence required while reading and making presentations.

In addition, the current learning culture does not allow the students to improve because they are under negative pressure from their peers. They also are unable to improve based on self-assessment. Teachers fail to engage in interesting assessment strategies due to lack of time, and too many responsibilities.

Regardless of this fact, constructive alignment is the initial step where curriculum goals are defined and learning assessed against these goals. The program by Christian Alliance College is cost-effective in that it is flexible enough to avoid redesigning of a new programme in future. This is because the programme’s design can accommodate expansion and upgrading of content (Project details).

The different kind of assessment intended to be put in place are very useful in covering the diversified needs of students/learners. Peer assessment is effective when a predefined assessment criterion is available. It is very important for teachers to ensure that learners are able to effectively use assessment criteria and properly take part in peer-assessment activities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is after successfully achieving this that teachers should introduce the self-assessment task. It is the manner in which the two are employed that matters, as well as the definition of the assessment criterion for such methods of assessment. It should be an objective process that does not criticize but, identifies gaps that require filling (Jones, 2005; Popham, 1998).

Lesson planning and analysis is an initiative that is very essential in identifying and determining the most feasible learning /teaching activities that would help achieve curriculum goals and objectives. Before conducting lesson planning, there is need for both the students and teachers to be fully aware and understand the curriculum goals so that all decisions are made with reference to these goals.

Lessons are prepared in accordance with exam syllabus or CDI documents. This helps to teach students that which is relevant to the assessment criterion. During lesson planning, it is very important to examine resource materials that are relevant in achieving the intended learning outcomes (Lecture 1 notes; Lecture 2 notes).

Students have different perceptions for different kinds of assessments and it is these perceptions that greatly influence the effect of the assessment process. Therefore, this further justifies the use of diversified assessment strategies.

The move by Christian Alliance College to employ peer, self and teacher assessments, as well as online discussions is commendable. In addition, the incorporation of technology enhances the assessment process and especially in the current contemporary computerized world (Earl

[supanova_question]

Neuro-Scientific Research Findings and Recent Discoveries: How the Brain Learns Research Paper essay help free

Educational neuroscience is an upcoming field of science that brings together scholars and researchers in educational psychology, cognitive neuroscience, education theory, and developmental cognitive neuroscience among other related disciplines in exploring the various interactions that exist between education theory and biological processes.

Neuroscientific research is arguably one of the major areas of study which have continued to draw increased human concern and attention in the world. According to Goswami (2007), Neuroscience plays the key role of bridging the gap between the two disciplines, through a more direct form of dialogue between educators and researchers who work together to bring light in the understanding of how the brain functions.

Educational neuroscience plays the significant role of emphasizing the overall understanding of the various codes of neuroscience as it is applied in the modern world of scientific study of the human mind and the brain. In that case, the discipline has presently continued to receive great support and concern from both educators in the field and cognitive neuroscientists.

As a result of this heightening concern, various academic institutions from allover the world have expressed their willingness to play an active role in supporting the study of educational neuroscience. The contents of this paper reveal how findings in neuroscientific study and recent discoveries on the functions of the brain impact differentiation in the classroom.

It is obviously clear that educators ought to be informed about developments in the brain research and the recent big concern of neuroscientific study meets this requirement in a more realistic approach, thus forming an impressive potential at increasing human understanding of learning and teaching.

However, educators should always try to be cautious about the current explosion of neuroscientific research, and they should go for only those findings and observations that are well established. Neuroscientific research offers a diversity of findings on how the brain learns and these insights, even though not all of them would be close to perfection, helps educators to strengthen their knowledge, thus establishing positive grounds for further learning (Sousa

[supanova_question]

Effects of domestic violence on children development Coursework college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Emotional development

Childhoods and teen violence

Child behaviour development

Self-esteem

References

Introduction From conception, children are continuously learning; learning does not end with childhood but it is part of human life. Through learning, children develop socially, emotionally, and their personality is shaped by the experiences they face.

For an appropriate child development, a child needs love and care from both parents. In case of families experiencing domestic violence, the social and emotional development of children brought put in such families is adversely affected (Emery, 1989). This paper discusses the effects of domestic violence on children; it will concentrate on building a table of dependent and independent variables.

Emotional development Children need to grow in environments that reinforce good behaviour and grow their emotional well-being; however, domestic violence has been an issue in many societies in the world but considered as a family matter, it is only of late that legal proceedings can be taken on an offender.

Since women movements in 1970s, domestic violence has become a legal matter calling for police, courts and judicial process intervention. In cases where children are exposed to such violence, then they become emotionally troubled:

In the above, case them the dependent variable is children emotions while the independent variable is domestic violence:

Emotions (E) = f (domestic violence (D.V.))

Childhoods and teen violence When one is talking of domestic violence, what comes in mind is wife or husband violence; in most case women are on the receiving end, they are subjected to physical, psychological and emotional violence. However the scope of domestic violence extend far beyond this believe to include child abuse and the effects that such abuse have on a child. The most common types of violence within the family are wife abuse and child abuse.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Violence in this sense may include slaps, pushes, sexual abuse, battering, and use of abusive words. A research conducted by in United States of America, shown that each year over 3.3 children suffer from domestic violence. The recognition of this is affected by lack of data that can be used for the analysis. The effect is mostly psychological, emotional and sometimes physical.

The most noted one is physical and thus emotional and psychological remains not recorded (Carretta, 2008). Children are sometimes the subject of war and they suffer from beatings and physical injury; when such a case happens, then the child is more likely to become violent at his later stages in life; this creates another relationship of domestic violence and violence of children and teens:

Violence among children and teens (V.C.T.) = f (domestic violence (D.V.))

Child behaviour development The environment they are brought up in shapes the behaviour of children; in case his families are violent, the behaviour that the child will develop is likely to be inclined to that angle (Fantuzzo, Fusco, Mohr

[supanova_question]

Myer Human Resource Management Report essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Globalisation

Technology

Conclusion

References

In every organisation, whether service, goods, public or private, human resources are required for an effective operation; the human management department is mandated with the role of ensuring that their organisation has the right number of employees at the most appropriate cost (Renckly and Renckly, 2003).

In the wake of globalisation and technological companies need to adjust their people management skills to benefit from the changes; Myer is an international merchandise store specializing more on apparels, to remain competitive, the company needs to have an orchestrate team (Myer Official Website ,2011).

This paper discusses how the company has responded to issues brought about by globalisation and technological development as far as people management is concerned.

Globalisation Myer has identified the need to have human capital from different parts of the world; diversity in the company has assisted in bring people with different cultural backgrounds in the company in the efforts of serving their customers better. For instance, a fellow Muslim can better handle a Muslim customer than the case would be if the attendant was a Christian, this has facilitated the growth of good customer relation.

With diversity, the company is able to get more inputs in decision-making regarding stocking that they need to have for a competitive business; it is the company’s policy to involve staffs in decision-making and their input is high valued. When there are people from different areas of the world, the company is able to make sound decisions regarding different issues.

Not all is good with diverse employees, the company has to make mechanisms that facilitate the growth of teamwork with people of diverse culture, different standpoints and people who see things differently, and it uses many funds in culture intelligence programs (Swamson, 2009).

Technology The use of technology in today’s business is not evitable; the company has acquired massive computer hardware and software to assist in its operations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For the old employees, who might have not had a chance to train in computers, the company has embarked on lessons to train them on simple operations using the gadgets; none of them who have ever been sacked for lack of the expertise. The company acknowledges that they have pool of knowledge that the company can use for competitiveness.

When recruiting, it is mandatory that the recruit should have some people skills; this assists the company to reduce the cost of training new entrants on computers.

Depending with the department that an employee is recruited to work in, his/her computer skills vary; for example those working in the computer department need to have accounting software knowledge while those working in research and development need to have data analysis software knowledge and experience.

The company has used computers to develop a virtual team; virtual team work across time, space, and geographical area, they have information that assist in making sound decision on issues facing a company. The teams are particularly crucial when Myer is making marking strategies and policies (Anthony, Kalmar and Perrewé, 2002)

Conclusion Myer’s human resources department has the mandate of ensuring that adequate employees are available at all times; it has the role of planning, deploying, employing, training, retaining, and dismissal of employees. In response to growth in globalisation, the company recruits from different countries and embarks on measures to blend the human capital to the mutual benefit of the company and the employees.

References Anthony, W. P., Kalmar, K. M. and Perrewé, P. L. ,2002. Human Resource Management, A Strategic Approach. South-Western: Thomson Learning.

Myer Official Website.,2011. Myer [online] Available at: https://www.myer.com.au/ .

We will write a custom Report on Myer Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Renckly, B. and Renckly, G. R.,2003. Human Resources. New York: Barron’s Educational Series.

Swamson, R. ,2009. Foundations of Human Resource Development: Easy read Large Edition. San Francisco: https://www.readhowyouwant.com/

[supanova_question]

Closed Circuit Systems Ltd Essay essay help online free

Introduction Closed Circuit Systems Ltd is committed to empowering its clients with technology to provide security solutions to their organizations and business premises. Our organization is among the leading providers of technology based security to organizations in business across different fields of operation.

Our company has vast years of experience and operation and has become a household name in regards of provision of closed circuit television remote monitoring (CCTV).

Our history and reputation is wholly pegged on the successes the company has enjoyed in its seventy years of existence for delivering to its clients as its mandate states “empowering its clients with technology to provide security solutions to their organizations and business premises”(Collins 2009).

The provision of all services offered by Closed Circuit Systems Ltd through its staff requires awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the basic principles of equal opportunities and equality in order to develop an understanding of the effects of prejudice and discrimination and denial of equal opportunities to all persons. With this in mind the company seeks to retain the best of professionals amongst its ranks (Collins 2009).

Mission statement

Closed Circuit Systems Ltd is committed to empowering its clients with technology to provide security solutions to their organizations and business premises through the use of modern advanced technology.

To provide integrated security surveillance today for a better and safer tomorrow. Closed Circuit Systems Ltd’s solutions to client need to be tailor-made to ensure that each and every client’s needs are addressed and solutions unique to their particular needs are formulated.

Policy

Closed Circuit Systems Ltd has adopted the following policies and codes of practice because it approves of the fact that service provision rests not in good intentions but rather in actual actions (service delivery).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company will ensure that no service user, client, employee, or job applicant and so forth are favored any less than others.

This action will ensure that everyone gets equal treatment or services regardless of the basis of “sex, race, age, ethnicity, tribal background, social status, disability, marital status or religious belief or is disadvantaged by circumstances or qualifications that are not substantial or justifiable” (Collins 2009). Closed Circuit Systems Ltd is committed to conduct its business in accordance to all laws that may apply to its position.

Each and every employee is expected to be informed of the code of ethics that the company is based on and should meet its requirements in doing their duties.

Queries pertaining its interpretation about the members of staff and officers should be brought to that individual’s superior or mayor for interpretation of this regulation, and “subjected to any collective bargaining agreement; any action concerning contravention of this regulation concerning officers and members of staff shall be ruled by the firm’s board of directors” (Schwartz, 2009).

Our policies are reviewed at each management review

Guiding principles (code of practice)

The following are the responsibilities of all our staff:

To ensure the equality of opportunity for all

To report to managers any apparent breach of policy to co-operate in measures introduced by the management

To undertake available training as per company requirements

To work within the law with honesty and integrity

Not to allow discrimination by them or others in matters such as decisions on work, reviews, recruitments section, training and reporting.

Not to subject anybody to behavior, whether thoughtless or malicious, which offends, insults, hurts or puts them at a disadvantage through discriminatory behavior

Will adhere to the company’s confidentiality policy

Will openly provide relevant information to authorized persons when required

Will agree to acceptable strategies for dealing with certain events and ensure continued good practice

Will attend staff meetings regularly

Will protect the welfare of the government and staff alike

Confidentiality policy

The company will utilize the guidance on consent and confidentiality as outlined above. This states that, any personal information about individuals in the company’s database is subject to legal duty of confidence and will not normally be disclosed without the consent of the subject, your organization and the government other than as directed by law.

We will write a custom Essay on Closed Circuit Systems Ltd specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Closed Circuit Systems Ltd will ensure that the policies regarding sharing of personal information will be available to your organization and the government only.

The company will operate a clean desk policy given that, client information or files are not left out when not in use and will be locked away and secured in a filing cabinet by the senior officer on duty. All staff will be required to sign a policy compliance form in accordance with this (Collins 2009).

In obtaining consent to seek information from other parties or for the company to disclose information about certain individuals under the data protection Act the explanations required will include:

clarity about the purpose of approaching the company,

what information will be sought or shared

details of individual seeking information

reasons for disclosure of any information

what is hoped to be achieved

consent and approval from the relevant authorities concerning the above

In all cases, no information should be shared without express authorization from the government (Schwartz, 2009).

Purpose of the code

This code of ethics main purpose is to create a crime free environment at the work place by using the most modern technology available. Ensuring of maximum input in the business premises by the workforce through monitoring of employee performance, and performance training are also a major purpose of the code.

In addition to this, the code will provide a means of successful execution of services and a success at prosecution through recordings in court (Henn 2009).

Training and education

Training will include induction; health and safety measures; camera systems; risk assessment; conflict management; safe systems at work; diversity training; customer relation service; radio procedure; use of radio systems; emergency procedures; when to notify the authorities; equal opportunities; fault identification and repair; investigation; evacuation handling; basic fire fighting report writing; data protection Act; court procedures; witnessing in court; information technology; and communication.

The training and education will be carried out as per the company’s regulations and requirements and each employee is expected to be present as required (Henn 2009).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Closed Circuit Systems Ltd by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Employees it covers

The staff will each be appraised monthly and supervised in carrying out of their duties. All employees of Closed Circuit Systems Ltd will be required to attend pre and post training brief meetings as required and set out in their employment contracts. The company will take on appraisal review meetings every six months and team meetings will be held monthly so as to increase the employee spirit.

Management and stakeholders meetings will be duly arranged by the management of the company or appointees of the management to undertake the task (Henn, 2009). The company will make available practical guidelines and emergency procedures to the staff.

This will be in form of a guide book and all members of staff are asked to always keep one at hand so that they are well versed in this requirements and safety measure.

The company will ensure that it does all it can in its power to protect its staff from harm and violence. In addition to this, there will be implementation of lone working policies and procedures for staff (Stanwick

[supanova_question]

Business Corporations and their Role in the Industry Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Summary of the author’s overall view-point

Discussion on the major issues presented in the case

Questions for thought

References

Introduction Business Corporations define objectives that are used to help in reinforcing the position of business Companies; this leads towards strengthening of some respected positions within the industries which establishes the business above existing competitors. Business ethics and regulations are observed for the purposes of realigning business institutions towards their respectful positions.

The corporate and financial ethics revolves around the company’s key strengths and opportunities, and at the same time assist in preventing any form of weaknesses as well as protecting the company against threats. However, there is a possibility that a company could create competitive advantage through the implementation of appropriate business models (Camardella, 2003, pp. 103-107)

Summary of the author’s overall view-point The author focuses on the current moral ethics and lifetime decisions which require address in the life of businessmen. The issues pertaining to work place ethics are explicitly addressed within the case study. The author focuses on Tyco’s policies which require revision as a result of numerous scandals experienced annually.

This is since formal auditing used by the company results into some of the harmful implications which incorporates various negative publicity and disastrous results on the side of top management. According to the author, management should be capable of scrutinizing various cost structures within the company for the purposes of settling for less expensive and trusted auditing methods.

Hence, the benefits of bylaws, including clear lines of accountability and long term effects should also help in solidifying the Company’s choices.

Due to some disorganization within the Company’s management and employees it was necessary that instead of using corrupt formal audit report to keep the staff accountable to their duties, the process of reorganizing the staff could more importantly assist in establishing clear rules on accountability (Deming, 1986).

Discussion on the major issues presented in the case Several issues are presented in the case study all of which focuses on financial management ethics, compensation processes and means, at the same time fraudulent cases facing the company’s top management team. There is also the essence of power struggle amongst the employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The central problem in Tyco case revolves around the nature of disconnect in power and authority; this is whereby small group of employees including the CEO and some board members assumed the role of managing various sectors of the Company and maintained control of the staff and policies.

The nature of control of this core group from the top managers, CEO and CFO, determined the outcome of every process within Tyco; this brought lots of conflict within the Company’s management team.

This nature of dominance led to easy articulation of fraudulent activities including customer related services, of which corrective attempts could not be made since even investigative bodies such as PWHC were involved (Chan

[supanova_question]

Public policy project Coursework essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Abstract The XYZ Company’s Think Beyond taskforce was convened in Minnesota with the aim of developing public policy on youth gambling. The policy would serve as a guideline in combating challenges posed by youth gambling in United States of America. This project paper commences with a brief introduction of the company behind this policy development. A brief overview on youth gambling is also revisited.

In order to support facts presented in the paper, relevant statistics have been incorporated throughout the essay project. Furthermore, themes and goals that acted as guidelines for policy development have been fully explored in the paper.

On the same note, identification of goals and themes has been pointed out as one of the success determining factors when exploring positive and negative trends that may either promote or hinder the policy development process.

Finally, several recommendations have been arrived at based on discussions that were conducted in an open and democratic manner. These recommendations, also referred to as action plans, were designed to facilitate smooth implementation of the policy.

Background Information of the Company XYZ Company is a provider of specialized behavioral health care services in United States. The company specializes in rehabilitation of mostly young people who have been ravaged by drug and substance abuse, eating disorders, learning differences among other behavioral problems.

They reach out their clients across United States through myriad of clinics and academies spread across various states as well as through seminars that are usually conducted on a regular basis. They also carry out both empirical and theoretical research studies which are used as important informative tools in the entire rehabilitation and treatment program.

In designing their programs, XYZ understands that being youthful stage in life is proving to be more challenging than it was some decades back. The company clearly understands that young people are highly vulnerable to drugs, exposure to violent gangs and the new wave of cyber crime.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The world today is very fast paced with everyone rushing to keep with globalization wave. In any case, the level of neglect among young people is rather high since there are no well defined structures that have been put in place to catalyze their smooth transition to adulthood.

XYZ Company is more or less like a model academy programs. It target vulnerable youth by addressing individual and group issues affecting them while transiting to adulthood. The organization prefers tackling youth related problems using an insight-oriented therapy as compared to behavior modification therapy. The model has proven to be successful and has been embraced by other organizations.

The key target of both therapies is to increase awareness among participants on how their emotional and behavior habits affect their well being alongside offering guidance towards positive change. The company has been in business for well over 20 years.

They have made use of research as core method of devising scientific solutions in behavioral health issues identified among youth. Their programs have been a success. Five years ago, XYZ entered into contractual agreement with United States government to carry out research on public policy regarding youth issues that are emerging and need to be treated with urgency.

Description of the policy issue Medical statistics obtained from XYZ Company shows that quite a significant number of adolescent’s patients were being admitted to the academy with mental health symptoms that had not been common in recent past. They recorded an increased number of adolescents with sudden alcohol and substance abuse complications, suicide attempts, anxiety complication, poor unexplained health and higher rates of depression symptoms.

Further investigation by the organizations’ therapist confirmed that most of the adolescents who were diagnosed with above symptoms had been involved in online gambling. Most of them also confirmed that they were addicted to gambling hence the mental health related symptoms.

Gambling industry has been expanding at a rapid rate on a global scale. The advent of the internet or information superhighway alongside increased use among adolescents has lured innocent young people into the highly addictive habit (Campbell

[supanova_question]

General Motors as Multinational Organization Coursework college admission essay help

Introduction Multinational organizations are those organizations that have globalized their operations. Such organizations have branches in many countries around the globe. Some of the branches are given some aspects of autonomy although they are still answerable to the headquarters. A good example of such organizations includes the General Motors Company.

This company has branches in almost all continents on the globe and also enjoys a good fraction of the market share. Intercultural management is a style of management that is sensitive to the different cultures represented by employees from different countries and languages (Information Resource Management Association 2002).

Due to the large extent of its operations, the company, just like any other company has personnel who come from different countries. These personnel speak different languages and also have a different culture from that of Americans. For these reasons, the company is forced to deal with issues typical of an intercultural organization.

This is because various forms of misunderstanding usually arise in such kinds of workplaces as a result of differences in culture and language interpretation. It is worth noting that such kinds of language and cultural differences are the main factors that cause international alliances and mergers to fail (Holstein, Not Dated).

This is also because there is no corporation that can operate in an environment full of misunderstanding caused by language misinterpretations and differences in culture. This paper discusses how several issues cause misunderstanding and subsequent failures of globalized business organizations.

A case study of General Motors is given as a good example to show how the culture of the business management, misunderstanding and cultural differences in the factories overseas caused the failures of the automobile company in the year 2008 (Adair 1997).

Managerial situations Managerial situations require exceptional skills that are actually aimed at controlling, predicting and adapting to particular situations. Traditional planning techniques are important in any managerial situation because it helps an organization to become more prepared and more responsive to changes that are hard but the organization can go through if it is well prepared.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Managerial situations require a leader to plan on how to deal with practical circumstances that rock an organization. The four orientations of planning are therefore very important when a manager is faced with challenging situations. These strategies include reactive, inactive, preactive and interactive. A reactive strategy is a sought of flashback whereby things tends to return to previous state.

This strategy deals with things separately. The inactive strategy tends to deal with issues at the current or prevailing situations. In this kind of situation, the management seems to be satisfied with things as they are (Rossiter 1998). The management therefore tends to muddle through the situation. The preactive strategy is one that believes in change. This strategy has the ability to predict the future.

Prediction of the future allows the management to be more prepared for the situations. Last but not least, managerial situations require an interactive gesture.

This strategy has a perception that the past, the present and the future are different although they are quite inseparable. This suggests that for any bad situation that happened in the past, the organization will feel its impacts both at the time of its happening, in the present and even in the future (Krolicki 2011).

Conceptual framework The conceptual framework of this paper tries to give a master plan of the way intercultural management can be achieved in a globalized organization. This is a good starting point because it acts as a guideline to effective management. Communication is one of the most important aspects of management in any organization.

It is coincidental to find out through a study done by Joshi and Lazarova, that an average of 97.5% of leaders and team members highlighted communication as the most important thing that makes leaders competent (Spencer-Oatey, Not Dated). This is why some of the biggest problems in an organization are caused by poor communication. Most of the communication problems arise from the lack of a shared language.

This is especially so in a multicultural globalized organization. For instance, an American copyrighter will experience difficulties in interpreting the meaning of some aspects of Japanese language when working in a Japanese company. This can happen even when his manager is pretty good in English (Sypher 1990).

We will write a custom Coursework on General Motors as Multinational Organization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This situation suggests that there are various misunderstandings that may arise when a person tries to explain something to people who are not natives of the language that person is using. Such situations will cause subtle differences especially during communication and may make people to have various interpretations of the message which may vary in context and even in the meaning.

Although this situation is more common in multicultural international organizations, it also occurs to some substantial levels between native speakers of the same language. Communication is therefore very important in developing a good relationship, mutual understanding and intercultural competence.

Communication also helps in adjusting to language proficiency and in understanding the importance of intercultural management in a globalized organization (Spencer-Oatey, Not Dated).

The case of general motors In the year 2008, General Motors was faced with a managerial problem that was related to financial issues. These financial issues arose from decades of abuse of power by the top management. Analysts proposed a $25 billion bailout in order to keep the automobile company afloat the market.

Other analysts were however skeptical with this bailout because they though that it will only take care of the financial issues and yet the roots of the problems that the company faced emerged from a cultural trend (Transcultural Synergy 2011). This is because the problems are believed to have developed for the past fifty or more years as a result of money minded Chief Executives.

Thus, the $25 billion bailout will only make the company stay in the market until when the money runs out. General motors opted for expensive health care programs for their personnel instead of looking down on the union. This is because the management thought that staring down the union will cause strike among the employees.

The option that the management took was however detrimental because it brought the company to its knees in terms of competitiveness. As a result, the market share of General Motors has continued to decline over the past forty or so years (George 2008).

The lack of a competitive General Motors is therefore attributed to the high employee costs as well as inflexible work rules. For this reason, it needs a new leadership with new culture (Adair b. 2007).

Not sure if you can write a paper on General Motors as Multinational Organization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Many analysts have come up with new proposals aimed at helping the company to improve its competitive nature in the market (World- Traveler 2011). Some of the analysts suggest that dividing General Motors into two companies will help it diversify its products and make them more efficient. Others suggest that a new management needs to be installed in the company.

The new management will help bring in a new culture for all the employees that will empower them and make them become more independent thinkers and hence more innovative. New employees also need to be negotiated so that the company can use a new wage scheme that will help it continue to operate effectively in the market.

A new culture will also help the company’s management to embark on an aggressive development of new products out of innovation. It has also been suggested that the company should only retain those factories that are most productive both in the United States and foreign ones.

All the above factors should help the company to operate with cash balances that are enough to make it stay afloat the international market (Zeromillion.com. 2011).

In relation to innovation and culture, the company needs an all time effort to manufacture different kinds and shapes of automobiles for the market. The cars should range in size from small to large according to market demands. GM also needs to come up with a different plan for their products.

This plan should take care of various aspects in the motor industry such as fuel efficiency. For instance, Chevrolet, one of the lightest cars with the smallest engine had poor fuel efficiency. Such kinds of mistakes in the automobile company should be reviewed with an aim of improving the fuel efficiency.

In addition, the company needs to borrow a leaf from the Japanese automobile industries whereby General Motors should build batteries in the U.S. This is to help them gain independence from battery making companies that are always rocked with troubles. Some of the problems of the battery companies include manufacture of defective batteries.

At one time, a battery company that was being outsourced by the General Motors was forced to recall six thousand battery units. A good solution to this could be a joint venture with a first rate battery manufacturing company like one from Japan (Flint 2008).

General Motors needs a complete overhaul of the century old corporate culture. This is because the current corporate culture is dominated by managers whose main focus is to chase the next deal in order to reverse its market decline. There is also a problem in the middle management sector.

The problem is that most middle managers are still operating with comfort and they are not dedicated to offering extra efforts to the company. This situation of the middle managers staying in their zone of comfort has been there for quite a while thus, prompting the need for change.

The management of General Motors has helped bring up a lot of bright minds. However, among the people the company has developed, there are those whose minds are uncultured. Such kinds of minds are the ones responsible for dragging the efforts of others. The management should therefore set up a mechanism that will check and minimize the number of individuals who have uncultured minds (Adair a. 2007).

The other thing that General Motors should be wary of is the conception that it is a big company and that it is a proxy of the world. As a matter of fact, such kind of thought is one of the reasons that make the company suffer from the troubles it is currently experiencing.

Achieving understanding The process of achieving a mutual understanding between people is actually based on the way senders and receivers of communication can encode and decode signals respectively, exactly in the same way. Miscommunication therefore is as a result of a mismatch between the messages sent and those that are received.

This means that there must be a sort of familiarity of the language between the senders and the receivers of that language (Aurifeille 2006). This is the reason why some books describe communication as a way in which the meaning of a message is transferred from the sender to the receiver.

The case of General Motors is not an exception to this because in this scenario, various aspects of communication are responsible for the decline of its market share. Correct interpretation of information from the company’s top management to the middle managers, both in the local U.S. factories and foreign factories would help the company stay afloat in the market (Fine 1969).

Barriers to communication can cause difficulties in understanding the message being conveyed. There are so many barriers to effective communication. Some of them include physical barriers such as location of the sender and the receiver and faults in the system design. Attitudinal barriers are also deterrent factors for effective communication (Arnott

[supanova_question]

The Potential Causes of the Financial Crises in South East Asia Essay essay help: essay help

The collapse of the financial systems of Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, and Malaysia has its roots in the fundamental and structural foundation of the international capitalist system which unavoidably will contribute to its crushing, under its own weight (Rahman, 1997).

“The financial crisis was transformed into a full-blown recession or depression, with forecasts of GNP growth and unemployment becoming more gloomy for affected countries” (Khor, n.d.). “The threat of depreciation spread from a few countries to many in the region, and also to other areas such as Russia, South Africa, and possibly Eastern Europe and South America” (Khor, n.d.).

The Potential Causes of the Financial Crises As far as the causes of the financial crises in these countries concerned there is no single opinion. They vary from economy to economy. The Asian Tiger economies were growing and were open to foreign investments, goods and services, capital flows and relying heavily on dollar markets (Nanto, 1998).

“There has been a great debate over the causes of this depreciation as weather the domestic policies and practices or the inherent and unstable nature of the global financial system were responsible for it” (Garay, 2003).

In the first phase of the crisis , the international establishment (represented by the IMF) and the G7 countries placed the blame directly on domestic ills in the East Asian countries as it spread from Thailand to Malaysia, Indonesia, the Philippines, then to South Korea (Garay, 2003).

Source: Garay, 2003. The Asian Financial Crisis of 1997-1998 and the Behavior of Asian Stock Markets

But soon another view emerged which put the blame on the developments of the global financial system: the combination of financial deregulation and liberalization across the world; the increasing interconnection of markets and speed of transactions through computer technology and the development of large institutional financial players” (Garay, 2003).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More “A developing country opens itself to the possibility of tremendous shocks and instability associated with inflows and outflows of funds when it carries out financial liberalization before its institutions or knowledge base is prepared to deal with the consequences” (Garay, 2003).

“A total of US$184 billion entered developing Asian countries as net private capital flows in 1994-96, according to the Bank of International Settlements” (Garay, 2003). “In 1996, US$94 billion entered and in the first half of 1997 $70 billion poured in” (Garay, 2003). “With the beginning of the crisis, $102 billion went out in the second half of 1997” (Garay, 2003).

“From the above mentioned figure it is evident that the flows (in and out) can be so huge; the shifts can be so unpredictable and sudden when inflow turns to outflow and the huge capital flows can be subjected to the tremendous effect of “herd instinct,” in which a market opinion or operational leader starts to pull out, and followed by a panic withdrawal by large institutional investors and players” (Garay, 2003).

Source: Garay, 2003. The Asian Financial Crisis of 1997-1998 and the Behavior of Asian Stock Market

To maintain foreign investors’ confidence transparency on the business and government level is highly required. In the absence of transparency on such key economic variables as foreign reserves and policy directions, herd instinct prevails, which can make the situation uncontrollable (Kihwan, 2006).

“In the case of East Asia, although some of the currencies were over-valued, there was an over- reaction of the market, and consequently an ‘over-shooting’ downwards of these currencies” (Garay, 2003). “It was a case of self-fulfilling prophecy. The financial speculators, led by some hedge funds, were also responsible for the original ‘trigger action’ in Thailand.

The Thai government used up over US$20 billion of foreign reserves to fight off speculative attacks” (Garay, 2003). “Speculators borrowed and sold Thai baht, receiving US dollars in exchange” (Garay, 2003). “With the falling of the baht, much less dollars were needed to repay the baht loans which made large profits for them” (Garay, 2003).

We will write a custom Essay on The Potential Causes of the Financial Crises in South East Asia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More “According to a report in Business Week in August 1997, speculative attacks on Southeast Asian currencies in July 1997 contributed to big profits for the hedge funds.

According to Business Week, in July (the month when the Thai baht went into crisis and when other currencies began to come under attack) As a whole, the hedge funds made only 10.3 percent net profits (after fees) on average for the period January to June 1997whereas their average profit rate jumped to 19.1 percent for January-July 1997.

Therefore, the addition of a single month (July) made the profit rate so far this year to almost double” (Khor, n.d.). “In some countries, the depreciation in the currencies was due to the outflow of capital by foreigners as well as local people who feared further depreciation, who were concerned about the safety of financial institutions” (Khor, n.d.).

The East Asian financial crises are considered to be the result of over-investment on the part of the bankers and businessmen within the region as well as by the international bankers and businessmen. The market participants argue that “there was too much money chasing too small an investment outlet” (Rude, 1998).

Surplus money was flowing into Korea and Southeast Asia to be profitably placed. The potential causes of the Southeast Asian financial crises can be distinguished between long-term secular developments, the medium-term economic conjuncture, and any immediate (efficient) cause (Rude, 1998).

The market participants advocate that a decline in the profitability and a rise in the riskiness of the underlying investment projects, a deterioration of local balance sheets, and a rise in the magnitude of the foreign exposures were the relevant long-term developments and that these trends created a financial structure that made a financial crisis in East Asia both possible and unavoidable.

Changes in the economic conjuncture in 1996 and early 1997 pushed what was

both possible and inevitable toward becoming a reality. The exchange rate attacks that began mid-1997 were the immediate trigger. From this perspective, deterioration of the underlying economic fundamentals and financial panic caused the crisis (Rude, 1998).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Potential Causes of the Financial Crises in South East Asia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The low-wage, export-oriented, foreign-financed growth strategy that the countries in Southeast Asia and the Republic of Korea were following ahead of the crisis became the victim of its own success. The underlying investment projects that both local and foreign capital were financing in the region were profitable and productive at one time.

But because of the additional productive capacity created in one country after another in the same or similar industries, problems like rise in wages, decline in profit margins in the export industries, and the flow of funds toward the non-traded goods sector and into more speculative activities in the local real estate and equity markets were mushrooming (Rude, 1998).

On the other hand, the relevant cash flows were becoming increasingly problematic, leading to a gradual deterioration in the balance sheets of local financial and non-financial institutions: increase in the liabilities to foreign and local creditors, decrease in the asset quality, rise in the leverage ratios.

The gap- and duration-related interest rate exposures were escalating due to an increase in the maturity mismatch of assets and liabilities. Meanwhile, foreign capital continued to flow into South East Asia and the Republic of Korea from Europe, the United States, and Japan.

An accommodating monetary stance and low inflation, contributed to low interest rates in the major industrial countries. The rise in the equity prices in the United States and Europe appealed investors to find sizeable exposures in highly valued, if not over-valued, securities in companies in the industrialized nations whose earnings potential may have fallen below those available in the Pacific Basin emerging markets.

Compelled by a competitive search for higher yields to take on the Republic of Korea’s and Southeast Asia’s greater credit and country risks, international creditors increased their exposures to local banks and corporations, both directly through loans and indirectly through local and international bond markets.

Japanese lenders were particularly eager to extend credits to the region, due to the poor investment prospects at home, especially to the foreign branches and subsidiaries of Japanese corporations. Equity investors in the United States and Europe were also driven to increase their exposure to the region’s greater market risks, both for diversification purposes and to search for even higher capital gains (Rude, 1998).

Once profitable and productive these foreign investments, like the domestic ones, took on an increasingly speculative tone, their asset quality declined, the associated leverage ratios and interest rate risks increased, and the maturities were shortened. The aggregate market exposures became increasingly complex and obscure as well (Rude, 1998).

It can be illustrated evidently by the two notorious off-balance sheet/derivative strategies used in East Asia. Special purpose vehicles (SPV) were set up to direct fund into the region and particularly into the Republic of Korea by the U.S. banks.

In these arrangements, some of the stock was transferred by the banks to the SPVs which in turn issued short-term paper in the international markets using that stock as security and used it to make investments that were considered advisable by the banks. In reality, the banks had assumed a foreign exposure, but it never showed up on their balance sheets (Rude, 1998).

“Total Return Swap” (or TRS) was another strategy in the same direction. These were a series of triangular transactions between international investment banks, Korean banks, and Indonesian companies. Double swaps were set up between the Indonesian companies and the investment banks, on the one hand, and between these banks and the Korean banks, on the other.

Under these arrangements, the Indonesians, who did not have the Korean’s high credit ratings, were able to borrow, and the Korean and investment bankers made a high rate of return. The setback was that the Korean banks had to compensate the investment banks for any losses if the Indonesian companies went bankrupt, which ultimately happened (Rude, 1998).

Three major changes in the economic conjuncture took place in 1996 and early 1997. First, due to developments in the general international economic environment and other factors, export growth rates, and hence, domestic growth rates in the region began to slip.

Second, Official interest rate increases in the United States (March, 1997) and Germany (October, 1997) proposed that lending in the less risky Western industrial countries would become more profitable.

Third, the economic and financial situation in Japan worsened. Japanese bankers and institutional investors began to consolidate their exposures not only at home, but in the Republic of Korea and Southeast Asia as well as Japan’s banking problems began to intensify (Rude, 1998).

Local and foreign investors in the East Asian emerging markets were now reluctant to extend further credits and other moneys and soon began searching for ways to actually lessen their exposures (Rude, 1998).

So, the extent and depth of the crisis should not be attributed to deterioration in fundamentals, but rather to panic on the part of domestic and international investors (Zhuang

[supanova_question]

The UN and Global Security: Is It Able To Tackle New Threats? Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The UN’s response to Terrorism

The UN’s response to Nuclear Proliferation

Weaknesses of the UN in addressing terrorism

Weaknesses of the UN in addressing Nuclear Proliferation

Recommendations

Conclusion

References

Introduction The United Nations (U.N.) was born on June 26, 1945 after fifty nations from around the world including the U.S., U.K., USSR, France and China signed the Charter of the United Nations in San Francisco.

Official ratification by the five states which were also permanent members of the U.N. Security Council occurred on the 24th of October, 1945 and this marked the official formation of the U.N. The League of Nations which had previously held the mantle of ‘world peacekeeper’ subsequently dissolved itself to pave way for the newly created body.

From the UN Charter, we draw conclusions that the intention of the founder members of the U.N. was to form a body that could effectively address all global issues related to peace and security.

However, from 1945 to date, the world has never been completely at peace with all manner of strife and conflict beginning from the cold war to the current Middle East versus the West conflict. New threats such as terrorism and civil strife keep the U.N. occupied and sometimes overwhelmed such that some conflicts have received less attention than they deserved.

The UN Charter mandates the Security Council to be the sole decision making body on all matters concerning peace and security around the world. Article 24 of the Charter states that the signatories grant the Security Council power to act on their behalf on all matters regarding global peace and security.

It further mandates the council to act within the U.N.’s powers and principles and to submit annual reports to the U.N. General Assembly on the progress made in terms of its mandate.

The Council, according to Article 24 should consist of fifteen members, five of which are the veto-wielding countries- France, UK, US, USSR and the People’s Republic of China. The other ten non-permanent members are to be elected by the General Assembly for a term of two years (Norman 2005, 6).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Charter in Article 39 envisages that “the Security Council shall determine the existence of any threat to the peace, breach of peace, or act of aggression… and shall decide what measures shall be taken….(UN Charter)”.

Article 42 then gives the council the green light to “… take such action by air, sea, or land forces as may be necessary to maintain or restore international peace and security. Such action may include demonstrations, blockade, and operations by land, sea, or air forces of Members of the United Nations.”

In addition to the Security Council, the U.N., with the aid of ‘specialized agencies’ such as the International Maritime Organization (IMO), the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) and the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) has come up with several pieces of legislation in the form of conventions that deal with particular threats to international peace and security such as terrorism and nuclear proliferation.

These treaties are twelve in number and they all relate to acts that aid or are closely connected to terrorism. Interestingly, all the above protocols and conventions were completed before the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks in the U.S. (Norman 2005, 5).

The Security Council, together with these U.N. bodies and affiliates together form the U.N.‘ collective’ security system. The emphasis on collectiveness is based on the fact that all member states are expected to participate in the security apparatus.

Despite, the collective security and the provisions of the UN Charter, the reaction of the U.N. to transnational threats has been lukewarm at best. The U.N. seems to be plagued by numerous problems that have prevented its ability to counter new threats such as nuclear proliferation.

Part of its weaknesses is caused by its inability to adjust to the changing global arena, which has seen a bust of globalization, centralization of trade and increased diplomatic ties between member states. In the words of Sir Robert Jackson in 1969,

We will write a custom Essay on The UN and Global Security: Is It Able To Tackle New Threats? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The [U.N.] machine as a whole has become unmanageable in the strictest sense of the word. As a result, it is becoming slower and more unwieldy like some prehistoric monster. The lumbering dinosaur is now 40 years older and certainly not better adapted to the climate of the twenty-first century (Weiss 147).

This paper shall look into these new threats, what the U.N. is doing about them and how it should be dealing with them.

The UN’s response to Terrorism Since the September 11 attacks, there has been an increased focus on the threat of terrorism and the access of nuclear materials to terrorist organizations and ‘rogue’ states. The body mainly responsible for much of the legislative action has been the General Assembly (G.A.) (Rosand 2003, 333).

The Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) which runs the U.N.’s social and economic policy has taken the mantle from the assembly and has played a key role in counter-terrorism.

The U.N.’s Commission on Crime Prevention and Criminal Justice (UNCCPCJ) has also played a key role in forming the ‘U.N. system’ (Norman 2005, 7). Together, the three have helped formulated multilateral legislation to counter terrorism. Though the G.A. cannot compel members into action, the recommendations made are influential in the shaping of national and regional counter-terrorism policy.

The 40-member UNCCPCJ and the 400-member U.N. Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) have been credited with their action against transnational crime such as trafficking of persons and drugs, corruption, organized crime and terrorism (UNODC 2004, 4). The UNODC has a special Terrorism Prevention Branch which has helped coordinate state efforts in counter-terrorism through the Global Programme against Terrorism.

Through the above system, the U.N. has worked to provide both peaceful and coercive solutions to the threat posed by terrorism. While the Security Council responded aptly to the September 11 attacks condemning them as a threat to global peace and security, the response was not targeted to the particular act of terrorism but to international terrorism as a whole (Norman 2005, 4).

Though the immediate remedial action was targeted at Osama Bin Laden’s Al-Qaeda terrorist network, the overall action in setting up bodies and legislation was aimed at achieving a multifaceted counter-terrorism framework (NACTAUS 2004, 9).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The UN and Global Security: Is It Able To Tackle New Threats? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Additionally, the U.N.’s response provided universal legal norms that guided both regional and local legislation and policy on terrorism and related acts. The pillar of these norms is contained in Article 33 of the UN Charter which states that in dealing with a threat whose remedy can be achieved through peaceful and coercive means, peaceful means must be considered first.

This strategy informed the U.N.’s response to the 2001 attacks and led to the development of the policy of ‘dissuasion’, ‘denial of means to act’ and ‘sustainable cooperation’ as the three main counter-terrorism tools (PWG 2002, Para. 21). However, the above three-pronged approach is just but one out of a myriad of strategies that the U.N. has adopted.

In the 1990s period, counter-terrorism strategy adopted by the U.N. through concerted effort was at most punitive and severe since it involved wide economic and diplomatic sanctions against terrorist-supporting states. A good example of this is the U.N.’s response to Muammar Gaddafi’s Libya after the government prevented the prosecution of Libyans involved in the 1993 Lockerbie bombing.

Another such example was the placement of sanctions against the Sudanese government for its alleged support of Bin Laden and his network of terrorists.

Perhaps the most stringent response by the U.N. to terrorism was the invoking of sanctions against the Afghan Taliban regime through Resolution 1267 (popularly known as SCR 1267) which involved the formation of a special “sanctions committee” to oversee the compliance of states to the sanctions.

Placing of sanctions is done in accordance to Chapter VII of the UN Charter which provides that action shall be taken “with respect to threats to the peace, breaches of the peace, and acts of aggression”.

Interestingly, four days after SCR 1267 was passed, the twelfth convention on counter-terrorism (Convention on the Suppression of the Financing of Terrorism) was passed. This marked a change in U.N. policy since the focus now was the speedy adoption of these protocols and conventions with an aim to cause a universal legal framework to prevent both domestic and international terrorism.

In light of all these efforts from various organs of the U.N. towards a legal counter-terrorism framework, only Botswana and the U.K. had effectively acceded to the twelve conventions by September of 2001 (Ward 2003, 289). In particular, only two other countries; Uzbekistan and Sri Lanka had passed the 1999 International Convention for the Suppression of the Financing of Terrorism.

This lukewarm reaction by the international community coupled with the shock that came with the 2001 attacks led the Security Council to blame non-ratification as the cause of the proliferation of the terrorism threat (Szasz 2002, 901).

The mobilization of state actors to cooperate in fighting terrorism was cited to be the main U.N. strategy to defeat the vice. The Security Council consequently developed a two-pronged strategy that involved increasing state capacity to implement counter-terrorism measures and the monitoring of state compliance with universally accepted legal norms.

Resolution 1373 placed focus on this strategy and it aimed at obliging states to sign and ratify the U.N. conventions on terrorism and related acts.

It also required states to cooperate in international counter-terrorism by sharing intelligence, proper screening of seekers of asylum, addressing terrorism loopholes and links, battling organized crime, reporting on any nuclear materials found in suspicious hands and eliminating exemption clauses in extradition laws (SCR 1373, para 4).

Another major contribution of SCR 1373 was the establishment of the Counter-Terrorism Committee (CTC), which was annexed to the Security Council as a “committee to monitor implementation of this resolution (para 6).” The committee operated in stark contrast with the sanctions committee of Resolution 1267.

The CTC was given an open-ended mandate which indicated that the U.N. appreciated the threat posed by terrorism and thus continuous obligatory monitoring was and still is a necessity (Norman 2005, 12).

The CTC’s mandate under Resolution 1373 is threefold; first, it works to ensure that all states have legislation that supports counter-terrorism.

Secondly, it looks to strengthen existing state machinery for counter-terrorism and finally, it looks to ensure compliance with other aspects of the Resolution such as capacity building, border screening, international policing, intelligence exchange, extradition and tracing and seizure of proceeds of crime (CTC 2004, 34).

Despite, its efforts, the U.N. is still ill-equipped in its fight against terrorism. Weiss (2009) states that the global body is crippled by four individual and collective problems (146). The first of this is what he terms as the ‘Westphalian system’ whereby the narrow interests of individual states have blurred the global agenda.

Secondly, there is ‘diplomatic burlesque’ whereby states have aligned themselves in interest groups that rarely agree even on mundane matters. The first two problems affect the decision-making capacity of the U.N. The other two problems are structural in nature.

First, there is the problem of agencies with overlapping jurisdictions and lacking in centralized command and coordination. The other problem is bureaucracy and low productivity among the employees of the U.N. yet staff costs account for the largest share of the U.N. budget (146).

The UN’s response to Nuclear Proliferation The issue of nuclear proliferation is not unrelated to that of terrorism. Nuclear proliferation began in the later part of the 1940s after the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in Japan which brought World War II to an abrupt end.

The devastating consequences of the use of nuclear weapons were laid bare for all to see and if that was not enough, the Chernobyl accident of 1986 confirmed that nuclear weapons were not the only threat; nuclear material was equally dangerous.

During the Cold War, the U.S. and Russia were in an arms race, the result of which was that they both have more than 28,000 nuclear warheads in their stockpiles which is enough to destroy the world as we know it (Cooper 2004, 301).

With time, other countries such as India, Pakistan, China, France, UK and Israel built their own stockpiles though this was mainly for defense purposes. Through the doctrine of Mutual Assured Destruction, states agree that they would not use nuclear weapons against each other due to the effect of retaliatory attacks.

However, the doctrine is only theoretical in the sense that ‘rogue’ states such as Iran, Iraq, North Korea and Syria have at times alluded to their intention to acquire and use nuclear weapons. In addition, terrorist organizations have also attempted to lay their hands on nuclear weapons which increase the threat of nuclear proliferation (Cooper 2004, 301).

The U.N. has established the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) as its watchdog against the unlicensed proliferation of nuclear material. The Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) was passed in 1968 and it sought to prevent the non-nuclear states from acquiring nuclear weapons while prohibiting nuclear states from increasing their stockpiles.

In addition, the hugely popular treaty provided that the nuclear states would assist non-nuclear ones in developing nuclear power for peaceful use as long as they would forgo their intentions to acquire nuclear weapons. To date, the NPT and the IAEA are the only hope against nuclear proliferation (Cooper 2004, 303).

Weaknesses of the UN in addressing terrorism Initially, the Security Council in combating terrorism used sanctions as the preferred method as evident in Resolution 1267. However, this approach (which seemed to work better in deterrence) was watered down by SCR 1269 which substituted the hard-line stance on terrorism to a more ‘timid’ strategy (Norman 2005, 6).

However, the reason for the change in approach was to include more countries into the counter-terrorism strategy. Nevertheless, there is no special obligation placed on member states to comply with set universal legal norms and the Security Council cannot compel a state to accede to a law (Szasz 2002, 905).

Looking at the other U.N. options, it is clear that the Terrorism Prevention Branch lacks the necessary framework to fight terrorism on a wider level due to limitations in personnel and legal support. The legal deficiency was witnessed when the U.N. Office of Legal Affairs’ Action Plan for the year 2000 failed to include terrorism in its Strategy for an Era of Application of International Law.

The plan blamed the poor penetration of international law on poor follow-up by individual states. It states that “many multilateral treaties of potential global application remain unsigned by a large number of States or, though signed, unratified.

The objective of creating a global framework of binding norms in the areas concerned is consequently frustrated, particularly in those cases in which the treaties are prevented from entering into force” (UNOLA 2000, 2).

Norman (2005) states that though the U.N. is objective about state cooperation in counter-terrorism, practical capacity-building and the necessary support to ensure compliance was absent (6).

He finds that in acting against a particular threat the Security Council showed political will in diffusing it such as the Lockerbie and Sudanese incidents but in binding members to come up with a comprehensive legal framework, political will is hard to obtain (7).

The best example of the lack of consensus on these legal norms is the lack of a universal definition of terrorism. In addition, there has been no progress on the initial intention to have a single comprehensive convention on terrorism (UNGA 2000, paras.13-18). The reason behind the lack of a clear definition lies in the fact that many states are reluctant to accept definitions that might hinder them from adequately dealing with ‘political threats’.

Instead, these states have preferred to keep municipal legislation that legitimizes use of brutish force against activists and political actors (SGA 2002, paras.11-13). This has prevented the U.N. from coming up with a definition that is both acceptable and inclusive of the elements that involve terrorism.

As a summary, it is evident that the U.N. suffers from the lack of political will by member states to fully commit themselves to counter-terrorism. The reason for this has been mainly the obsession with the West, particularly America, to introduce a whole raft of changes that seek to take away the sovereignty of states in the name of counter-terrorism.

States have also been concerned with the zeal with which particular groups have been targeted in counter-terrorism, which has led to suspicion on the real intent of the fight against terrorism.

Naturally, the nations with Islam as a major religion have been majorly concerned about these endeavors, especially because terrorist purport to act in the name of Allah and so counter-terrorism measures might aim at suppressing Islam. Since the U.N. cannot compel member states to comply with legal agenda, the U.N. remains captive to political forces, thus limiting its capability to deal with the vice effectively.

Weaknesses of the UN in addressing Nuclear Proliferation Cooper (2004) finds that the U.N. is actually very poorly equipped to handle the threat of nuclear proliferation (297). First, the NPT is an optional protocol, and being the only piece of international law seeking to prevent proliferation, the non-compliance with the treaty is to be expected.

In addition, nuclear states such as India, Israel, Pakistan, and North Korea have either refused to sign the NPT or pulled out of the convention, thus putting global peace into jeopardy. The IAEA remains the only hope for non-proliferation, but it remains ill-equipped and powerless. First, member states have to give permission to IAEA inspectors and this being voluntary; there is no way to monitor the nuclear activity of a particular state.

The only hope for non-proliferation has been the control of trade in nuclear materials, but even this has been dashed by the discovery of a thriving nuclear “black market”. Apparently, it is only possible to monitor 90% of the nuclear material produced; thus, the other 10% is at risk of being acquired by ‘rogue states’ and terrorists.

After 1991, the world learnt that Iraq had been secretly making nuclear weapons following the Gulf War and an additional protocol was added to the NPT which gave the IAEA more power to conduct investigations at weapons facilities but only 38 states have ratified it (Cooper 2004, 299).

In the words of the former Director-General Mohammed El-Baradei, there is “need for a complete overhaul of the export control system. It is not working right now (Cooper 2004, 301).”

The best examples of the U.N.’s ineffectiveness against nuclear proliferation are the cases where the U.N. has failed to stop the acquisition of nuclear material by rogue states. The most recent of these cases is the Iran case where the Mahmoud Ahmadinejad’s government has been enriching uranium against IAEA and U.N. directives.

Another peculiar case was the confession by A.Q. Khan, the ‘father’ of the Pakistani nuclear bomb that he had been illegally peddling nuclear technology to Libya and other rogue states.

This led President Bush to state that “…these terrible weapons are becoming easier to acquire, build, hide and transport…. Our message to proliferators must be consistent and must be clear: We will find you, and we’re not going to rest until you’re stopped” (Cooper 2004, 209).

Part of the reason why it has been had to control proliferation has been the argument that allowing certain states to have nuclear weapons while preventing other access to the weapons amounts to neo-colonialism. In fact, most states feel that Western states have not taken measures to get rid of their own stockpiles and thus their monitoring of other states is in itself an attempt at dominion.

This is why the non-G8 nuclear states have refused to sign the NPT. Another reason why these states have distanced themselves from non-proliferation attempts are the unique problems of individual states. In the case of Israel, there is need to protect itself from its ‘hostile’ neighbors.

For India and Pakistan, tension between both states has made them acquire nuclear weapons. It remains to be seen what steps the international community shall take to prevent proliferation since this is a sensitive issue that might threaten peace and security.

Recommendations Jolly et al. (2005) make various suggestions to improve the U.N. to meet new transnational security threats. They state that the current structure of the U.N. and its approach to security as a whole is flawed and needs to be reconsidered. First, they suggest that collective security should be reconsidered outside the ‘traditional compasses of national and military security (61).

Instead, a collective approach should be postured on globalization and instead of depicting terrorism and nuclear proliferation as threats to nations; they should be marketed as threats to trade and good relations which countries can easily identify with outside their political interests (62).

These researchers further suggest that the U.N. should address global inequality and unresolved political differences so as to gain the necessary consensus needed for action.

Weiss (2009) suggests that the U.N. should focus more on the concepts of global citizenship and international responsibility to eliminate the threat posed by nationalism and narrow-minded interests that are the biggest setbacks to its capability to combat terrorism and nuclear proliferation (148).

Lastly, he adds that the U.N. structure should be reformed based on performance, leadership, integrity, and talent just like any other 21st Century body with a mind for success (151).

Conclusion All in all, the U.N. has made various attempts to meet threats of peace and security in the globe. For particular threats, the Security Council has met and provided solutions to the problems which have in one way or the other, helped solve conflicts. However, just like any other regional or international body, the UN has been the victim of political back and forth between states.

As such, it is necessary that the U.N. adjusts itself to rid itself of these weaknesses that have stifled its effectiveness in eradicating global insecurity. This would involve reviewing legal frameworks, especially on nuclear proliferation, taking tougher stances on terrorism and fighting the politicization of the security debate.

In addition to these measures, the UN should be re-invented to reflect 21st Century practices such as centralization of trade and command, performance-based contracting, global citizenship and less fascination with national sovereignty. This way, it can equip itself to solve 21st Century problems.

References CTC (2004) CTC Programme of Work. Available at: https://www.un.org/en/ .

Cooper, M.H. (2004) Nuclear Proliferation and Terrorism. The CQ Researcher, 14 (13), 297-320.

Jolly, R., Emmerij, L and Weiss, T. (2005) The Power of U.N. Ideas: Lessons from the First 60 Years. New York: United Nations Intellectual History Project.

National Commission on Terrorist Attacks on the U.S. (NACTAUS) (2004) Overview of the Enemy. Staff Statement No. 15. Web.

Norman, P. (2005) The United Nations and Counter-terrorism after September 11: Towards an Assessment of the Impact and Prospects of Counter-Terror ‘Spill-Over’ Into International Criminal Justice Cooperation. Portsmouth: Centre for European Studies Research, University of Portsmouth.

Policy Working Group on the United Nations and Terrorism (PWG) (2002) Report of the Policy Working Group on the United Nations and Terrorism. UN General Assembly /Security Council, A/57/273-S/2002/875. New York: United Nations.

Rosand, E. (2003) Security Council Resolution 1373, the Counter-Terrorism Committee, and the Fight against Terrorism. The American Journal of International Law, 97(2), 333-341.

Secretariat of the General Assembly (SGA) (2002) U.N. General Assembly 57th Session: Summaries of the work of the Sixth Committee. New York: U.N. General.

Szasz, P.C. (2002) The Security Council Starts Legislating. The American Journal of International Law, 96(4), 901-905.

U.N. General Assembly Sixth Committee (UNGA) (2000) Measures to Eliminate International Terrorism. Report of Sixth Committee, A/55/614.

United Nations Office of Legal Affairs (UNOLA) (2000) “Strategy for an Era of Application of International Law: Action Plan [Electronic version]”. Adopted by the Senior Management Group and Approved by the Secretary-General. New York: United Nations.

United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) (2004) Global Programme against Terrorism: Momentum for increased international action against terrorism. Vienna: UNODC.

Ward, C.A. (2003) Building Capacity to Combat International Terrorism: The Role of the United Nations Security Council. Journal of Conflict and Security Law, 8(2), 289-305.

Weiss, T.G (2009) Toward a Third Generation of International Institutions: Obama’s U.N. Policy. The Washington Quarterly, 32(3), 141-162

[supanova_question]

The usefulness of the concept of structural violence in analyzing and understanding international conflicts Essay college essay help online

Introduction Structural violence is a fundamental concept in the analysis and understanding of international conflicts. The contents of structural violence include disputes, where comprehension between two parties does not come to a point of consensus because of differences in their social setting. The failure of distinct entities in an ecosystem to comprehend each other acts as an instrument of causing conflicts in the international scope.

The international conflicts arise from societal setting, affecting people around the world. The comprehension of the influence of structural conflict has a rationale of enhancing the analysis, as well the comprehension of the scope of the international conflict. The understanding is also vital in the creation of a path for strategic implementation of ample methodologies that would prevent or eradicate the conflicts.

A vast theoretical literature has also been presented in regards to the importance of structural violence in comprehension enhancement, with some authors arguing that conflicts have been a major drawback to economic, social, and political triumph over the years, owing to the state of misunderstanding distinct takes of different individuals and groups (Burchill, et al, 2005, p. 291).

The recent decades have seen researchers, academicians, scholars, as well as psychologists develop enthusiasm in the area of the effects of violence on the international relations. The discussion in this paper seeks to establish the usefulness of the concept of structural violence in analyzing and understanding international conflicts.

The comprehension of this is enabled by comprehensively analyzing the concept of structural violence as well as the international conflict. The theoretical approach towards the same is critically discussed, in addition to the provision of rationale and impacts of the study at hand.

Analyzing the concept of structural violence

The form of violence whose basis is on the social structure or social institution that harms some populace and prevents them from fulfilling their essential needs encompasses structural violence. Structural violence is product of the organization of political, social, and economic settings and systems in ways that have both negative and positive effects on the immediate community.

The rationale of the impacts is portrayed when some segments of the population in existence are oppressed, intimidated, and dominated, while other segments are privileged in one way or the other.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conflicts that have their fundamentals on the societal structures deprive part of the population their peace, food, security, healthcare etc, while others still enjoy the abundance of the same in similar setting. For instance, movement of large numbers of rich people into a community may lead to the increment of housing costs, affecting people that lived originally in a similar place under low costs.

In addition, structural violence is mostly recognized at the level of a society due to life quality shortfalls that occur in certain societal groups. The accomplishment of structural violence mostly occurs via the existence of political repression in a society.

This entails the presence of many groups in power concentrating the societal resources for their personal gain in expense of people who are not in power. The most pronounced examples of structural violence are inclusive of racism, elitism, classism, sexism, adultism, ageism, and nationalism in addition to heterosexism and ethnocentrism (Lipsky, 2010, p. 31).

Structural violence is characterized by poor societal settings that allow room for existence of more than one class and clusters of individuals depending on the societal niche that they hold. An imbalanced state as well as international realm is established when structural violence takes preeminence.

This is in regards to unequal resources distribution among the existing populations. Discrimination also finds its way in such a society where some people appear more important than others do, in terms of wealth and health. The systems of structural violence are dominated by numerous justices in all realms, and unjust arguments prevail in place of justice requirement.

Oppression of high quality is experienced whenever structural violence is evident, for instance, the deprivation of widows and orphans of the inheritances by corrupt governments. Increased death rates are also associated with those that live at rung positions in any society setting as opposed to low death rates for the higher in a contemporary society with poor settings.

Most countries in the have had such structural violent systems, posing great troubles for those living in them. The rationale of these poor structural systems is experienced when considering the rate of international conflict today that has drastically increased.

We will write a custom Essay on The usefulness of the concept of structural violence in analyzing and understanding international conflicts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The understanding of these conflicts is also important in performance of the analysis of the levels of the international conflicts that thrive today. Various pronounced effects are experienced in presence of structural violence, which is inclusive of pain infliction on the victims when war and terror etc incidents occur due to structural distinctions.

It is always in the accompaniment of the deprivation of essential needs that are fundamental to the life of an organism in the ecosystem. The freedom of human is taken away for there is no room for addressing their grievances in case of the structural problems.

Moreover, the creation of non-identity society with racial, material, and all-round differences results from the cultivation for the structural violence (Mansfield and Pollins, 2003, p. 97).

An analysis of International conflicts

The recent years have seen concerted efforts directed towards international peace relations in a bid to counter the rampant international conflicts. A conflict is regarded as a level of difficulty where parties cannot understand one another, resulting into an avoidable chaotic situation. The accomplishment of a conflict is done via stage performances whose possible outcomes are undesirable, and may not be beneficial to any party.

The international conflict describes those critical incidents in which no human entity is exempted from the effect of a particular happening, and every human race is a liable object of experience. The most flabbergasting conflicts in the worldly realms are inclusive of wars, terrorism, and political clashes among others.

The causes of the international conflicts range from human to situational causative factors that become so overwhelming to an extent of causing tremendous outcomes.

The outcomes never choose a particular path to follow; rather, they affect a large number in the international realms including fresh waters, oil, other resources and so on (Westing and Stockholm International Peace Research Institute and United Nations Environment Programme., 1986, p. 10, 28 and 58).

Johan Galtung’s literature classifies conflicts into three categories, which are inclusive of direct conflicts that entail direct pain and suffering infliction on individuals or groups. The second type is indirectly imposed on a group of individuals due to poor structures in the societal set up. International conflicts are mostly caused by structural violence as a result of the instabilities and disorganizations that are caused by their rampancy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The usefulness of the concept of structural violence in analyzing and understanding international conflicts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The effects of the international conflicts are inclusive of economic inflations due to poor methodologies of spending a country’s resources. The political crises are also experienced everywhere in the international scope due to power wrangles that thrives in the hearts of many. The poor and the oppressed have a tendency to rise up against the unjust regimes and these reactions are transformed into conflicts.

Cultural conflicts are also internationally evident due to people’s take of others in regards to their background (Bercovitch, 1996, p. 6). Indeed, cultural conflicts have been known as causative factors to the structural and direct conflicts in many cases since the disregard for one another is a causal factor for promotion of jealousy, as well as the oppressive nature evident in most societies.

More over, most social structures in the world have acted as causal factors for international conflicts due to poor organizations and structural arrangements. Political and economic structures are also known to be major causes of conflicts in an international scope.

The international conflicts have often led to the prevalence of negative peace; indeed, alleviation of peace on the parties involved in disputes at a particular time is a rationale for international disagreements. The magnitude of international suffering is measured via the impacts in experience to the parties internationally.

For instance, massive deaths and concrete conflicts that are not liable for recovery are the extreme magnitudes for international conflicts. In addition, there are incidences of countries fighting against each other due to economic, structural, and cultural failures. In addition, leadership and governance structures are also considered as main causal factors of international conflicts.

Major international conflicts have long been portrayed via terrorism attacks, massacres, wars, deprivation of rights, and other methodologies that are deemed crucial in the fulfillment of such laws (Likosky, 2002, p. 393).

Usefulness of the concept of structural violence in analyzing and understanding international conflicts

Structural violence is an excellently significant tool when it comes to the analysis and understanding of international conflicts. The concept of structural violence explains the fundamentals on which international conflict emerges, as distinct groups interact with others in social setup.

The fact that structural violence entails deprivation of people’s rights and freedoms, as others enjoy privileges and honors makes this form of violence be considered vital in international violation explanations provision. Theoretical explanations of international conflicts rebuke the violation of social theory via the utilization of structural violence in available human settings.

The current world is largely affected by international conflicts that emerge repeatedly, with research findings proving that most of the happenings in the international realms are products of structural violence. This majorly entails social, cultural, political, and economical and the overall human set up within an inclusive ecological system (Ohlson and Stockholm International Peace Research Institute. 1988, p. 7).

The concept of structural violence is normally viewed as a hypothetical instrument that provides supposition that is considered tentative, with the intention of gaining comprehension of facts that are legally acceptable. Therefore, it creates a rationale for the understanding and analyzing international laws, as well as being considered a fiction.

This implies that structural violence entails making mistakes with a conscious mind in its take that armed conflicts are used in the deprivation of other people’s rights and privileges. Therefore, it gives an ample understanding of the operational international law, as well as a prediction of what just laws would mean in the society.

The understanding is also boosted in the fact that individuals or groups affected or infected by structural violence face it indirectly. They therefore advocate for close monitory and supervision in the promotion of the effectiveness of international law (Jacoby, 2008, p. 26).

Structural violence is a long-term cause of system’s instability. Instability means that no system can be subject to human trust, since it does not amply cater for the available humanity desired satisfaction. The instability-affected areas are inclusive of political social and economical stands. Normally, the state of instability in any realm leads to the creation of emotions on those affected or infected by the causal factors.

The deprivation of privileges from some people, as others enjoy, creates a rationale for the instability complement to act as a stage-setter for international conflicts.

Moreover, instability is an ultimate cause of physical, emotional, and psychological wars among people as well as states. The structural instability analysis also proves it as a ground for human suffering, rendering a lot of dissatisfaction among individuals involved (Jacoby, 2008).

Additionally, structural violence paves way for undesirable human aspects, which finally lead to conflicts. The aspect of militarily arises from international conflicts due to poor structural settings.

For instance, countries from European and American continents have to concentrate on weapon building strategies in a bid to counter any international attack, reason being that the structural setup of every country is a source of structural violence due to poor settings.

The understanding of the world wars that took place in the 19th century is enhanced by the presence of people superseded by hunger for power prosperity, in regards to territorial control and proprietorship. The wars created a structural environment that enabled some countries to be in possession of powerful arms and ammunitions, thus looking down upon others.

The perception that other countries are weak entities by the American continent, and eventually causing war is a rationale towards understanding international conflicts.

The recent rampant terrorist attacks that prevail in the international scope are also as a result of the presence of countries that are more favored in military wealth than others. Moreover, the desire to exercise military power, while ignoring human dignity is a long-term rationale for international conflicts (Lawler, 1995, p. 67).

The existence of extreme poverty cases in human life is an indication of the preeminence of structural violence. In most cases, some countries have a common trend that has rampantly taken preeminence. Every country is marked by an interaction of extremely rich persons, who adversely interact with extremely poor persons, though living in a similar environmental context.

Those people associated with the leadership of any country in the international realms are always found in possession of wealth, while those far from power are in most cases poor. A recent environmental scanning study concluded that poverty has become a major problem in the world.

Similarly, refugees that move to countries for the sake of their safety are said to suffer due to the fact that host countries do not easily recognize their presence. Those people afflicted with chronic diseases are said to live in chronic poverty due to lack of support from the neighbors as well as the government.

Thus, international conflicts are known to occur rampantly, as campaigns for such poverty controversies arise for the sake of protection of the common person (Waart, et al., 2001, p. 325).

Structural conflicts are known to have offered an ample ground for exploitation and oppression, as well as intimidation in every realm of the society. The understanding of these fundamentals is best explained via structural violence existence. The international conflicts have rampantly arisen due to the prevalence of the expletory and oppression nature in human realms.

Many countries have been recently faced by rampant pre and post-election violence and conflicts, owing to the existence of unfaithful regimes. The service to the general society by governments has been today converted to the attendance to personal needs since social structures are already paralyzed.

This is a causative factor for exploitation and intimidation to most people in a societal setup. The oppression and intimidation factors are known in history as the main causes of societal aggression and ultimately leading to international conflicts (Kent, 1993).

Structural violence is also useful as an instrument for indication of difficulties associated with change acquisition. For instance, recent years have experienced dramatic shifts in all reams, and every international entity needs adopting new ideas. However, the employment setup is already violated by poor governance and monitoring of the international structures, leading to aggression.

Land disputes have also been sources of international conflicts, where poor ruling structures are in control and denying room for dialog to maintain peace. The effects are peace alleviation and overriding international conflicts. Moreover, poor ruling methodologies that do not provide room for the weak and the oppressed in the society are factors that lead to the structural violence occurrence.

However, structural violence resulting form unequal resources distribution provides a better comprehension of international conflicts. The fact that wealthy and prosperous regimes are always entitled to privileges causes international aggression, leading to international conflicts (Kent, 1993).

Theoretical approach to international conflicts on the basis of structural violence

The recent decades have seen large numbers of theorists arise in their bid to provide explanations of the international conflicts on the ground of structural violence. The main theory that leads to the realization of denial of human satisfaction to some individuals or groups is the human needs theory by John Burton in 1915.

The frameworks of the theory advocate for meeting of human needs as an instrument of peaceful human interactions and relations. The conflict theory is also important in explanation provision of international conflicts. This relates to the incompatibility of distinct parties in their presentation as the main causal factor for conflicts.

The structural violation in any society leads to a negative interaction nature between the two theories, leading to conflicts between parties.

The structural violence is viewed in disregard for some people in the society, leading to the violation of the requirements of the human needs theory, and paving way for the preeminence of the conflict theory. The correction of situations thus requires the intervention of conflict resolution theoretical approach (Juma, et al., 2002, p. 134).

Kurt Lewis model of management plays a vital role in addressing the need for ample societal management strategies as a step towards combating the structural violence extremes. The social theory that was early developed is very crucial in addressing the importance of a good societal interaction.

It requires that all social entities in a setting recognize the importance of each other as an ample weapon for fighting societal conflicts. The social theory propositions entail the need for societal construction on the basis of the available entities’ requirements to create a satiable nature. The most recent research has also come up with international relations theory that advocates for compatibles in accordance to the international laws.

Compatibles are considered as vital in fighting the spirit of intimidation, oppression, as well as discriminatory societal rules. The international law is useful as a tool for stabilization of structural and physical systems via the application of the best possible ideologies. Therefore, international conflicts solution has long been developed via the requirements of international law.

The normative theory is very useful in assisting the execution of international law. It requires that appropriate norms be followed in the understanding and prevention of international conflicts caused by structural violence (McEvoy and Newburn, 2003, pp. 6, 7).

The rationale and impacts of Understanding international conflicts and Violence

The comprehension of international conflicts and violence creates a ground for the enactment of peaceful attributes. The understanding is especially essential to those in the peace and conflict studies, since a ground for positive peace is easy to establish. It is always considered worthy where prevention takes the first position instead of cure.

Whenever this understanding is available, government regimes and policy-makers gain a better understanding of the common structural violence problems that their immediate society is facing. It is therefore easier to address the problems in better ways that can counter international conflicts.

The laying of foundation for peace rebuilding is facilitated by the analytical understanding of influences of structural violence on international conflicts. The realization that international conflicts are rampant in the society makes many to rise up in advocating for peace in the society. The campaigns conducted play a pivotal role in societal restoration.

The interference of the undesirable human acts that sometimes take preeminence in the society is easy, with the understanding of the paths they take. It is also easy to set frameworks that are necessary in addressing diverse magnitudes of international conflicts, as well as violence that may hinder the overall international development (Keenan and McDonagh, 1996).

Combating international and local conflicts is possible when there is clear information of the impacts of the structural violence on the society. The effect of the psychological and physical systems of the people that have been deprived of their positive peace by the structural violence is eased when there is understanding.

The government systems find it easier to lay grounds for advocating for a hopeful future whenever they analyze possible causes of international conflicts. The balancing of races, and background differences is duly addressed in understanding that races distinctions are major causes of structural violence that cause international conflicts.

The comprehension of violence relationship with the international conflict acts as an ample tool for stabilization of the economy, politics, as well as the social structures. This is done via the employment of ample strategies that would enhance the compatibility of all systems. Cultural differences can be easily solved with the understanding of the problem that arises from the structural violence.

Moreover, the rampancy of issues like sexism, health facility accessibility difficulties, and other impacts of structural violence can be easily addressed in the comprehension of their causal factors. The moderation of the international law above all is enabled through the comprehension of international conflicts on the basis of structural violence (Keenan and McDonagh, 1996).

Conclusion Structural violence is a fundamental concept in the analysis and understanding of international conflicts. Structural conflicts arise from the creation of room that benefits and privileges a certain group in the society, while the rest suffer inadequacy for their desires. International conflicts occur due to incompatibility of different parties in regards to a matter of concern, and at a particular time.

The usefulness of the structural violence in the understanding of the international conflicts lies in its comprehensive nature in addressing negative issues that affect the society indirectly.

However, the understanding of this usefulness is crucial in the construction of a stable society in all realms of human interaction. Nevertheless, more empirical and theoretical studies should be conducted to enhance the importance of structural violence in understanding the international conflicts scope.

List of References Bercovitch, J., 1996. Resolving international conflicts: the theory and practice of mediation. NY: Lynne Rienner Publishers.

Burchill, R., et al. 2005. International conflict and security law: essays in memory of Hilaire McCoubrey. NY: Cambridge University Press.

Jacoby, T., 2008. Understanding conflict and violence: theoretical and interdisciplinary approaches. London: Taylor

[supanova_question]

A.A. Bronson’s Through the Looking Glass: His Personal Identity as a Canadian Artist Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

When one views and analyzes some of the specific art work of noted modern artist, A. A. Bronson, it is easy to see that his art is indeed a microcosm of an integral, unique, and discrete part of the Canadian artistic identity. The particular piece chosen here for consideration is his installation entitled, Through the Looking Glass.

This selection consists of twelve pieces, each one being a representation of the dozen chapters of the 1871 Lewis Carroll’s sequel to Alice in Wonderland. Initially, this work of art was a web project, primarily rendered for the October 2000 Vienna Secession exhibition. In 2009, the artist accompanied his work with a book, a new volume, called AA through the Looking Glass.

This itself, is a collection of twelve silver-coated frames with various Carroll quotes, published by Michele Didier. (Bronson 2009). Thus, his work Through the Looking Glass is the one of the best works that reflect the author’s vision of reality and the one that reflects the author’s sense of Canadian identity.

Most noteworthy is the first one, a very striking photograph of Bronson’s previous partner Felix, soon after his demise. In Faking Death: Canadian Art Photography and the Canadian Imagination by Penny Cousineau-Levine, this art critic spoke of the selection as well, on page 63.

She stated that “Animating the Canadian photograph, of every conceivable situation or thing, is the constant parsing as what is seen into two dimensions, here and there- and very often, life and death” (Cousineau-Levine 2003, 63).

Surely, it is no simple feat to categorize A. A Bronson’s artistic accomplishments of more than 30 years, nor is it so simple to readily and easily delineate his significant Canadian artistic contributions. Diana Nemiroff describes this on the website for the Canada Council of the Arts, in her piece, AA Bronson: Reflections on the Person.

She observes that his art has evolved in many directions, and that his identity as a Canadian artist has actually shifted, over time. This, she says, is mostly because he was expressly challenging various modes of thinking and performing, as he lived his life and published his art. (Canada Council for the Arts – The Governor General’s Awards in Visual and Media, n. d.).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This tendency of Bronson to consistently decry and challenge preconceived notions on artist identity took place during much of his 25 year tenure as one of the three individuals, within the General Idea group.

For Bronson’s work, both as a solo performer, and as a General Idea participant (1969–1994), have led the way in both a cultural and topical manner. Although Bronson is Canadian, and an artist, his reputation and performance transcend his country’s boundaries. This also, has appeared entirely intentional.

Bronson has certainly proven himself true to the idea that modern Canadian and world art is realistic, gritty, and innovative. He is solitary and personal, but also collective and universal. Also, consider that his recent work has been influenced also, through his former associations and relationships with the two other members of the General Idea.

He has experimented with the experiences of AIDS and the gay lifestyle in some of his pieces. Now, as earlier, he’s been involved in prolific and varied media, like performance, publishing, sculpture, and painting. Also, past and present, he’s been concerned with popular culture.

The works by the author revolutionized together with his personal and artistic growth. Works created in collaboration with other artists reflected his Canadian identity, however, his individual works, such as Through the Looking Glass, reflect not only the authors’ national identity and personal vision of reality, but his development as a single personality with the major focus on his inner world.

This tendency of Bronson to consistently decry and challenge preconceived notions on artist identity took place during much of his 25 year tenure as one of the three individuals, within the General Idea group.

For Bronson’s work, both as a solo performer, and as a General Idea participant (1969–1994), have led the way in both a cultural and topical manner. Although Bronson is Canadian, and an artist, his reputation and performance transcend his country’s boundaries. This also, has appeared entirely intentional.

We will write a custom Essay on A.A. Bronson’s Through the Looking Glass: His Personal Identity as a Canadian Artist specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Exploring his art as a representation of his personality, we can conclude that his works provide a great contribution to the evolution of the Canadian art. He deals with problems that “touch his heart” as a personality and Canadian. What is so significant about his works? First of all, as any contemporary artist, Bronson explores historical and social dimensions that influenced the development of the Canadian nation.

However, he did it from the perspective of his own personality. He explores subjects that are crucial for the world in which he lived and are universal for humanity. He interpreted his Canadian identity as part of the global society. Indeed, Canadian art was shaped by different traditions from around the world.

Thus, in can be considered that his Canadian identity is a mixture of different visions and cultures. At the same time, he tries to define himself as an individual.

Through the Looking Glass is a great demonstration how the artists attempts to express understanding of the Canadian identity. The work consists of twelve pieces of glass.

Each piece symbolizes different dimension of human soul which is described by citations taken from the book by Lewis Carroll, for example, one of the citations is “unless – unless we’re all part of the same dream. Only I do hope it’s MY dream…” (Caroll 2010, 73), which means that the artist associates himself and his Canadian identity with the rest of the world.

Thus, he hopes that he is a part of the world as he shares the problems of modern society and he cares about future. However, at the same time, the author tries to provide the idea that he is an individual and, as any individual, he is not going to lose his identity, he hopes that his life is in his hands. Another significant citation is, “You see, a minute goes by so fearfully quick” (Caroll 2010, 68). The issue of time is in focus in this passage.

What is time and how it changes personality is another theme considered by the author. In this piece, he provides that time is relative substance, every individual has his/her personal perception of time. Thus, this piece of art is very philosophical.

The author not only addresses cultural traditions of his country, he focuses the audience’s attention on the fact that his Canadian identity, as well as identity of all Canadians was formed under the influence of different factors, such us, culture, society, interaction with other nations. The “collectiveness” of his Canadian identity is represented through the techniques used to create the work.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A.A. Bronson’s Through the Looking Glass: His Personal Identity as a Canadian Artist by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Different pieces represent different aspects of the authors’ life and psychology. The pieces are different from each other, however, when put together, they form a single reflection of a single personality. Thus, living in a diverse society, the artist absorbs everything that happens around him and these events influence his personality, which is as a broken class stick together in a single piece.

Presently, A.A. Bronson continues to work on his own and to show internationally. He’s been the recipient of many awards, along with his deceased partners, and later, as a sole artist. Peter Gallo touches on this in his article, “The enduring ephemera of General Idea,” in Art in America, Mar. 2005, on pages 80-83. (Gallo 2005, 80-83)

However, in viewing Through The Looking Glass, the art student must not only understand the precursor General Idea movement, but also what came before. Next, although his identity was mostly one of loss when his two close associates of the General Idea passed away in 1994, he finally broke away from this tendency, to some degree.

This fact is evident in viewing his Through The Looking Glass, as an artist composing his Secession, and through his display of the photographs of his dead friend. Here and elsewhere, he thus displayed a degree of moving on, and of separateness.

Therefore, as varied as is the Canadian landscape and its peoples, so is the artistic identity of A. A. Bronson. He, too, exhibits elements of disparity and diversity.

Unconventional, gay, not afraid to touch any subject, to include decay and death, he expands his horizons well beyond the poetic and the sublime. Surely, for many who view his epic work, Through the Looking Glass, they will find the collection as concrete evidence of his artistic identity.

Works Cited Bronson, A. A. 1994. Felix, June 5, 1994. A. A. BRONSON. Web.

Bronson, A. A. 2009. AA Bronson: life and works. Brussels: mfc – michéle didier.

Bronson, A. A. 2009. Felix, June 5, 1994. Secession. Web.

Caroll, Lewis. 2010. Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland and Through the Looking-Glass. New York: Cosimo, Inc.

Gallo, Peter. 2005. The enduring ephemera of General Idea. Art in America, 2005. (March): 80-83.

Levine-Cousineau, Penny. Faking death: Canadian art photography and the Canadian imagination. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 2003.

The Canada Council for the Arts – The Governor General’s Awards in Visual and Media Arts 2002. Web.

[supanova_question]

Social Enterprise in Context Essay best college essay help

Table of Contents Social enterprise

The impact of social enterprises on the society

Major achievements of social enterprises

Challenges faced by the social enterprises

The Social economy in relation to social enterprise

Critics associated with social enterprises

Recommendations

Conclusion

References

Social enterprise According to Price (2008, pp 1), “social enterprises are businesses with primary social objectives whose surpluses are principally reinvested for that purpose in business or in the community, rather that being driven by the need to maximize profit for shareholders and owners.”

Social enterprise is mainly associated with non-profit organizations, mainly privately owned, which sell goods and services with an aim of yielding a return on investments, with the accumulated profits being ploughed back into the business or they are directed to social purposes.

The profits of these organizations are not maximized to benefit the shareholders. In addition, social enterprises may be developed with an aim of fulfilling needs that are rare, such as providing employment to the less fortunate communities and the disadvantaged individuals. Such groups of people include the disabled, low education candidates, and ex-offenders, among others.

These social enterprises also operate in the less attractive locations for other businesses; such places include locations with low level of education, rural areas, and social housing areas among others.

Social enterprise activities mainly revolve around the developing of countries, and they include recycling, renewable energy, and fair trade. Social enterprise mainly aims at the social challenges of poverty, unemployment, disablement, and underdevelopment, which may occur in some locations and communities; they address such challenges via aid and social work (Kerlin, 2009, pp xiii).

Just like other businesses, social enterprises compete in the market, but the difference comes in where profits made are reinvested in social activities. Social enterprises are also viewed as a response that is innovative and is directed into funding socio activities by the non-profit organization (Nyssens, et al, 2006, pp 4).

According to Kerlin (2006, pp 249), social enterprises are characterized by the continuity of producing goods and services, the aim to benefit the community, low amount paid in terms of work, the initiative to take up risks, and the limitation of profit distribution.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Kerlin (2009, pp 6) further explains these characteristics; first, the continuity of producing and selling of goods and services, with the social enterprises being known for their productivity of goods and services. Secondary, high degree of autonomy involves their creation by a group on individuals who govern these enterprises and they are not controlled by the government; hence, they make their own decision.

Thirdly, the important level of economic risk allows their employees to determine their financial stability by how well they secure sufficient resources. In addition, the minimum amount of work that is paid shows that most of their workers are volunteering while only a small portion of them are fully employed.

Their aim to benefit the community entails serving of specific people in a community and promoting social responsibility.

Moreover, these enterprises represent an initiative formed by a group of people with the same aims and objectives, while the decision-making process involves voting, thus incorporating all ideas of the stakeholders. Lastly, the limited issue of profit distribution requires that profits be distributed on limited basis with the aim of minimizing profit maximization motive.

The impact of social enterprises on the society Despite social enterprises playing a major role in the employment of the less-advantaged groups, in some countries like the United Kingdom, it lacks full control of this factor. According to survey, only 2% of the United Kingdom population is employed by the social enterprises. However, this could be due to the fact that the social enterprises pay less as compared to the public sectors.

Nevertheless, these enterprises contribute greatly to the marginalized communities and groups of people (Teasdale, 2010 pp. 95). Teasdale (2010, pp 101) further explains that social enterprises can be of various purposes including providing a social space for the marginalized groups of people such that they are able to develop bonds with others who have a similar situation as theirs.

An example of supported housing enterprise is in the United Kingdom whereby the enterprise accommodated those who suffered from bipolar, as one of the victim shared that he feels much safer at the center other than in the community as he is always harassed and he had no close friends.

We will write a custom Essay on Social Enterprise in Context specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When he compares his life in the supported housing enterprise, where he is able to make friends and bond, he feels much safer since there are people with similar situation as his who love and understand him. Hence, this enterprise is a perfect example of a social enterprise from the marginalized groups of people.

Individuals are excluded from activities in the community but are included socially in a group. For instance, a person who has relied on the state’s benefit for some time and then he is finally excluded from such benefits, but within a community enterprise, he is not excluded and was involved even in decision making. Such a person will feel less isolated in the community enterprise as compared to his country.

These enterprises have an aim of creating a paying employment, this is evidence in the case of community times a social enterprise in the United Kingdom that provided employment with a salary to the management team of the organization. Social enterprises involve hierarchy decision-making, tending to fill in, in terms of goods and services, where the state has failed.

Therefore, it is evident that a social enterprise is business aimed at changing the society for the common good. An evident case is that of China, where, despite the social entrepreneurs investing in two projects, they never aimed at profit maximizing, but rather, on strategies that focused on the community (Gunn and Durkin, 2010, pp67).

Social enterprises mainly focus on social responsibility; this is evident when they take up the role of rehabilitating offenders, in which they change the lives of such people for the benefit of the society, since the rate of crime will reduce.

According to Myers and Stocks (2010 pp 267), “the social economy encompasses a range of non-profit and social enterprise organizations that put people before profits, by solving social needs rather than amassing financial profits.” This statement makes it clear that social enterprises sacrifice their private aims and objectives and focus on social needs of the communities.

According to newstatesman (2002, pp ii), social enterprises are seen as organizations that are neither answerable to the government nor have an aim of profit maximization.

This article further explains that the social enterprises are mainly concerned with quality of life of the common people, which involves health, conducive environment, and opportunities for a better education among others. This is summarized by newstatesman (2002, pp. vii) by stating that, “social enterprises are hybrids mixing social values and goals with commercial practices.”

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social Enterprise in Context by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is evident as they prove to be unconstitutional, as their main driving force are social goals, which include provision of education, support to the incapable families and childcare support; however, to attain such goals, they have to participate and compete in the market through selling their goods and services.

An example can be extracted from the furniture resource centre located in Liverpool, which has a workforce of one hundred and fifty repairing and selling furniture. This business not only sells its products, but it creates a common good to the society by providing employment.

The main aim why the social enterprises make profits is to attain independence and avoid relying on government for support. They therefore focus on communities and customers who have been shunned away by the government.

According to Munoz (2010 pp 59), Tommy Hutchinson made an impact on the society and on social entrepreneurs when he implemented an online social network company named i-genius which operates in over 90 countries.

The network is involved in collaboration of social entrepreneurs and non-governmental organizations; this way, the social enterprises can make international impacts through this website. Using internet, social enterprise is deemed to grow, as the internet creates social collaboration.

According to Leadbeater (2007), the social entrepreneurs had no name ten years ago, but today they are recognized due to their effort to accommodate the written off and laid-off people from schools and workplaces. He further explains that this sector has provided over 40milion employment opportunities and 200 million volunteers worldwide.

For instance, in the United Kingdom, the government created a legal entity, which is the community interest company aimed at incorporating those enterprises that direct their profits to social activities. Social Corporation’s main role is to enhance social entrepreneurship, which entails smoothening the way for employment of the deprived groups and promote training and education (Thomas, 2004, pp 251).

It is evident that a social enterprise consists of corporate social responsibility in its operations, in which social responsibility is the commitment of an organization to improve the well-being of a deprived community via business and social practices; such practices may range from health care to education (Kotler and Lee, 2005, pp 3).

Organizations are expected to impact the society and the communities positively with their activities that are directed towards the welfare of the society and further assume responsibility (Sims, 2003 43).

Therefore, corporate social responsibility entitles one to being a steward of the society’s needs; therefore, it is clear that the social enterprises engage fully in social responsibility unlike other organization who engage partially to the community’s responsibilities.

According to Munoz (2010, pp 30), social enterprises are striving to reach out to the international communities; this is evident in regard to the green work organization which has aided countries like Sudan, Ghana and Sierra Leone among others.

This has left a positive effect worldwide and promoted social responsibility. Social entrepreneurship arise from social enterprise; its main aim being the provision of solutions and aid to social problems facing the society (OECD, 2010 pp 188).

Major achievements of social enterprises According to Kerlin (2009 pp 76), social enterprises in South Asia have been a major aid to the Asian poverty problem which affects approximately 50% of the Asian population. The corrupt government rarely focuses on eradicating poverty; rather, it enhances unequal distribution of resources.

However, social enterprises have focused on poverty eradication and creating jobs in Asia. One example of such an enterprise is the La Frutera Corporation whose operation involves a banana plantation and work with an aim of improving the quality of lives in the Philippines.

The Maireang farmer’s group involves the poor and landless farmers in Thailand and engages them in the processing of rubber, hence increasing the farmers’ income. According to Yunus (2007 pp, 3), poverty around the world is usually uneven, such that, some communities suffer more than others do.

Relying on the government can be frustrating sometimes; this is because it is slow in acting, hence leading to the emergence of non-profit organizations mainly concerned with the welfare of the needy and desperate. However, theses charitable organizations rely on donations and if the donations cease, they are incapable of assisting the needy.

The author adds that in countries like Bangladesh, where social needs are on high demand, when there are no sufficient donors, some social needs are not catered for at all.

According to Kerlin (2007, pp 77), some of the social enterprise like the entrepreneurs school of Asia promotes entrepreneurial education in which students are molded into becoming social entrepreneurs who focus on profit in business, as well as social impact to the needy communities. The mirror foundation in Thailand enhances education to the remote areas.

Challenges faced by the social enterprises According to Kerlin (2006, pp 259), social enterprises face challenges just like other organizations and businesses. For instance, in the United States, social enterprises challenges have been identified that include, “exclusion of specific groups, the weakening of civil society and lack of government involvement” (Kerlin, 2006, pp 259).

The author further explains that social enterprises may be leading to the rising rate of exclusion of the marginalized groups.

For instance, in the United States, members of the enterprise are required to pay a certain fee, however, some of the poor beneficiaries cannot afford to pay, hence being excluded from receiving any benefits. Secondly, some of the social enterprises generate a lot of profits, thus they concentrate more on their clients rather that on the social responsibility for the communities.

Thirdly, social enterprises are seen as a potential risk to the civil society in that, these organizations might abandon some programs such as the volunteer programs due to the demand in other practices. These enterprises may also stop relying on donations and volunteers, hence diminishing the aims of promoting social capital.

According to Kerlin (2006, pp259), Western Europe faces the challenge of limited number of services that are supported by the enterprises as compared to the United States, hence, these social enterprises end up being underutilized. According to Leadbeater (2007), many social entrepreneurs run small firms hence limiting the spread of such schemes. Some lack managerial skills, which are relevant in the growth of an organization.

According to Ducci et al (2002 pp 79), social enterprises faced a number of challenges in France, among them being the incapability of creating an organization with many stakeholders, the difficulty in engaging in economic activities for the social enterprises, and the impossibility of the social enterprise to acquire capital.

According to Marks and Hunter (N.d, pp 7), social firms aimed at reaching out to the needy such as education and health care face a range of queries when it comes to their stability, continuity and their sustainability due to the uncertainties that face them.

When a non-profit organization seeks to establish itself, it is faced by a major challenge of distraction from the charitable objective, such that the organization may end up operating like a normal business by loosing focus of its main mission, which is charity (Crutchfield and Grant, 2008, pp 74).

The Social economy in relation to social enterprise Social economy is referred to as a part of the economy that is not public or private; it consists of non-profitable organizations inclusive of volunteers whose activities are aimed at a community benefit, for instance, for the deprived groups in the society.

The social economy mainly consists of three sub-sectors; the voluntary sector which consists of organizations that govern themselves and do not rely on the government, operate without a profit maximization motive and involve in volunteer work mostly. Such organizations may include charities.

The second sector is the community sector in which these organizations depend on voluntary and do not pay for these efforts, as they are small support groups. Third is the social enterprise sector that involves businesses whose objectives are to support the community and not on maximizing profits for its shareholders (Social Economy, 2011).

In Northern Ireland, the social economy employs approximately 48,000 workers, while in the European Union, a total of 10 million people are employed. This sector can be differentiated from other sectors through its non-profit aim, the low wages and the voluntary services, its involvement with the community and its reinvestment in profits as opposed to sharing it out to the stakeholders.

Nevertheless, the social sector outweighs other organizations through the following advantages;

they are normally situated near their customers, and hence respond fast to their clients needs.

They have the capability of reaching out to the deprived groups in the society.

Due to their charitable work, they attract many charitable organization and volunteers who come to their aid in terms of money and labor.

Since their existence, they have contributed to social capital in the country (Social Economy, 2011).

The main aim of the social economy enterprises is to provide a quality life to individuals and the economy at large; hence, they aim at promoting mutuality, equal opportunities, worth employment opportunities, co-operation, and social benefits to the communities among others.

In addition, these social economy enterprises operate under the influence of social aims, which vary from training, job creation, and provision of services among others.

Secondly, they are involved in the production of goods and services in the competing market, hence benefiting the communities through the acquired profits. Therefore, social economy consists of the charitable sector, non-profit sector, and the voluntary sector (Uluorta, 2009, pp14).

Critics associated with social enterprises According to newstatesman (2002, pp iii), “social enterprises are seen as a government device to open avenues for local authorities to contract out services such a childcare, leisure and transport.”

However, social enterprises are a savior to many as they take up the “left overs” from the government, such as, the laid off employees, neglected citizens and the marginalized communities, thus remodeling them to being better off. According to Leadbeater (2007), social entrepreneurship is seen as a fake idea and that has developed to its capability to adapt and due to its ambiguous nature.

Recommendations Social enterprises that are successful should aim at promoting productivity and competition in the operating environment. They should also be able to create wealth socially and promote co-operation and cohesiveness in the community. Social enterprise should work towards developing a new way of operating in terms of delivering of goods and services.

Nevertheless, social entrepreneurs should ensure that their enterprise is leaving a positive impact on the community by enhancing their mode of living. A social enterprise should be aimed at developing the potential of the deprived groups, either by providing employment to them or training them into managing their own businesses.

In addition, an effective social enterprise should be competitive in order to enable its survival in the market by attracting several customers. Finally, social enterprises should enhance delivery of public services by collaborating with the government in areas such as health sector, recycling, adoption, and transportation among others; therefore, social entrepreneurship should be promoted in all countries.

Conclusion Social enterprises are key players to social responsibility worldwide; therefore, this sector should be supported by the government with no strings attached. This way, they can continue enjoying their independence and at the same time have enough funds to support the less fortunate in society. Social enterprises lead to social entrepreneurship, which aims at providing innovative solutions to unsolved problems in a society.

Hence, it is more concerned in alleviating problems other than maximizing profits. Therefore, with social entrepreneurship in place, deprived communities and marginalized groups are well catered for and have a place to call home.

The social enterprise topic seems like a narrow subject, but it has really challenged me due to its depth and content, hence leaving me thirsting for more knowledge. It is however, an important discussion with a variety of references and during my assignment, I have learnt also on matters that seemed confusing at first.

Having acquired this sufficient knowledge, I am in a better position to tackle and understand any matters related to social enterprises.

References Crutchfield, L. and Grant, H. (2008). Forces for good: the six practices of high-impact nonprofits. NJ: John Wiley and Sons Publishers.

Ducci, G. et al. (2002). The social enterprise in Europe. International journal of mental health, Vol. 31 Issue 3, p76, 16p. Web.

Gunn, R. and Durkin, C. (2010). Social Entrepreneurship: A Skills Approach. NY: The Policy Press Publisher.

Kerlin, J. (2006). Social Enterprise in the United States and Europe: Understanding and Learning from the Differences. Voluntas: International Journal of Voluntary

[supanova_question]

Critique of SRA Open Court Reading Curriculum for 3rd grade in light of Second Language Learners Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

Teachers need to understand that students, who are usually in their classrooms, come from different cultural backgrounds. Therefore, the learning process should cater for the different needs of the different students.

The SRA Open Court Reading curriculum for students in their third grades entails vocabulary, spelling, phonemic awareness, explicit phonics, writer’s craft, fluency, listening, grammar, usage and mechanics, writing process strategies, speaking and viewing skills, award-winning literature, text comprehension and penmanship.

Supplemental materials obtained online, encyclopedias and related sources are used when a theme calls for wider exploration. Science and social studies are also integrated throughout the curriculum.

This curriculum is adequately diversified but, there is need to bridge cultures by ensuring that each and every student is fully involved in the learning process. This paper aims at doing precisely that, describing how teachers can incorporate a multi-cultural approach into the SRA Open Court Reading curriculum to enhance the learning process.

The presence of students who are not within the mainstream of American culture and who speak English as their second language calls for a multi-cultural approach in learning. Those within the mainstream American culture are the Caucasians or the White who values American cultural traditions and values, and speaks English as the first language.

It is evident that the Open Court Reading Curriculum adopts the set-up of an American mainstream class. In addition, students are given the opportunity to practice what they have learned on an individual basis and this is only suitable for the American mainstream students.

The importance of integrating a multi-cultural approach in the Open Court Reading curriculum is to ensure that all students are exposed to the same educational opportunities. The OPC curriculum is associated with academic failure amongst certain ethnic minority groups hence the need to incorporate a multi-cultural approach.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is quite obvious that students from other cultures different from the American mainstream face certain kinds of learning handicaps where American mainstream values dominate. These learning handicaps prevail from the fact that students experience discordance between home and school values.

Subsequently, the learning capacity of the students is affected leading to poor performance (Gibson, 1984). The school should be a versatile place that can transform anytime in as far as the interests of the students are being catered for.

The notion of minority and majority groups with regard to cultural diversity in America is inevitable. Both educators and parents need to undergo some form of training with regard to diversity of cultures and associated values. Both the educators and parents need to understand each other’s cultural values and practices so as to avoid conflicts that may jeopardize the achievement of the concerned students.

Schools should ensure that they have training sessions to create awareness to their educators, who are mainly from the individualistic American mainstream. This helps the educators to adopt an integrated approach while teaching the students. Teachers therefore should embrace both the individualistic and collectivistic cultural approaches while teaching.

The understanding of the dominating American culture by parents leads to the development of more explicit discussions with teachers on school practices and policies, and the rationales for them in a cultural context.

The creation of awareness for both parents and teacher helps the students to acquire a dual cultural perspective, which enables them to accommodate school and home cultures. This enables the students to distinguish between the two cultures and develop a more open-minded approach to life in general (Trumbull et al. 2001).

Trumbull and others talk about bridging cultures in schools by using an individualism/ collectivism framework. Some students come from collectivistic cultures, whose values are inclined towards inter-dependence and sharing and helping one another.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Critique of SRA Open Court Reading Curriculum for 3rd grade in light of Second Language Learners specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, the American mainstream students are from individualistic cultures that values personal autonomy, self-expression, self-determination, independence and personal achievement. It should however be noted that despite the fact that there are individualistic and collectivistic cultures, the converse of these cultures are also prevalent within these cultures.

This is to say that, an individualistic culture also values collectivism and the collectivistic culture also values individualism. The difference is in the prioritization of values within the different cultures. Therefore, an integration of both cultures would augur well for both of them since none would be imposing on the other (Trumbull, Rothstein-Fisch

[supanova_question]

Critique of SRA Open Court Reading Curriculum for 3rd grade in light of Second Language Learners Essay (Critical Writing) a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Teachers need to understand that students, who are usually in their classrooms, come from different cultural backgrounds. Therefore, the learning process should cater for the different needs of the different students.

The SRA Open Court Reading curriculum for students in their third grades entails vocabulary, spelling, phonemic awareness, explicit phonics, writer’s craft, fluency, listening, grammar, usage and mechanics, writing process strategies, speaking and viewing skills, award-winning literature, text comprehension and penmanship.

Supplemental materials obtained online, encyclopedias and related sources are used when a theme calls for wider exploration. Science and social studies are also integrated throughout the curriculum.

This curriculum is adequately diversified but, there is need to bridge cultures by ensuring that each and every student is fully involved in the learning process. This paper aims at doing precisely that, describing how teachers can incorporate a multi-cultural approach into the SRA Open Court Reading curriculum to enhance the learning process.

The presence of students who are not within the mainstream of American culture and who speak English as their second language calls for a multi-cultural approach in learning. Those within the mainstream American culture are the Caucasians or the White who values American cultural traditions and values, and speaks English as the first language.

It is evident that the Open Court Reading Curriculum adopts the set-up of an American mainstream class. In addition, students are given the opportunity to practice what they have learned on an individual basis and this is only suitable for the American mainstream students.

The importance of integrating a multi-cultural approach in the Open Court Reading curriculum is to ensure that all students are exposed to the same educational opportunities. The OPC curriculum is associated with academic failure amongst certain ethnic minority groups hence the need to incorporate a multi-cultural approach.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is quite obvious that students from other cultures different from the American mainstream face certain kinds of learning handicaps where American mainstream values dominate. These learning handicaps prevail from the fact that students experience discordance between home and school values.

Subsequently, the learning capacity of the students is affected leading to poor performance (Gibson, 1984). The school should be a versatile place that can transform anytime in as far as the interests of the students are being catered for.

The notion of minority and majority groups with regard to cultural diversity in America is inevitable. Both educators and parents need to undergo some form of training with regard to diversity of cultures and associated values. Both the educators and parents need to understand each other’s cultural values and practices so as to avoid conflicts that may jeopardize the achievement of the concerned students.

Schools should ensure that they have training sessions to create awareness to their educators, who are mainly from the individualistic American mainstream. This helps the educators to adopt an integrated approach while teaching the students. Teachers therefore should embrace both the individualistic and collectivistic cultural approaches while teaching.

The understanding of the dominating American culture by parents leads to the development of more explicit discussions with teachers on school practices and policies, and the rationales for them in a cultural context.

The creation of awareness for both parents and teacher helps the students to acquire a dual cultural perspective, which enables them to accommodate school and home cultures. This enables the students to distinguish between the two cultures and develop a more open-minded approach to life in general (Trumbull et al. 2001).

Trumbull and others talk about bridging cultures in schools by using an individualism/ collectivism framework. Some students come from collectivistic cultures, whose values are inclined towards inter-dependence and sharing and helping one another.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Critique of SRA Open Court Reading Curriculum for 3rd grade in light of Second Language Learners specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, the American mainstream students are from individualistic cultures that values personal autonomy, self-expression, self-determination, independence and personal achievement. It should however be noted that despite the fact that there are individualistic and collectivistic cultures, the converse of these cultures are also prevalent within these cultures.

This is to say that, an individualistic culture also values collectivism and the collectivistic culture also values individualism. The difference is in the prioritization of values within the different cultures. Therefore, an integration of both cultures would augur well for both of them since none would be imposing on the other (Trumbull, Rothstein-Fisch

[supanova_question]

Unemployment Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Unemployment can be defined as the condition where citizens of a country are jobless and have in the recent past been involved in searching work without a success. Unemployment rate can be defined as the prevalence of unemployment opportunities in a country. The unemployment index is calculated by dividing the number of unemployed individuals by the number of individuals in the labour force (Arestis

[supanova_question]

The Confederation of Ontario University Staff Associations and Union Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Background information about COUSA

Legal issues and obstacles facing COUSA

Bargaining process

References

Background information about COUSA The Confederation of Ontario University Staff Associations and Union (COUSA) is an umbrella union that was formed in 1974 by a group of unionized employees working at Ontario University in Canada. COUSA is made up of workers from clerical jobs, administrative, technical and professional occupations. There are different types of groups under the COUSA umbrella.

They include employees from Ontario University- from independent, non-unionized groups, provincial groups and international unions- are members of COUSA.

All member unions under COUSA shared a common aspiration: that all employees of Ontario University need a common platform to collect information and work together with the government. In addition, the umbrella organization does not rival other unionized organization; on the contrary, it is willing to collaborate with them to the benefit of workers (COUSA, 2011, p.1).

There are many benefits one can get by joining COUSA. For example, members of the Confederation attend three seminars organized by the umbrella body every year to network and share valuable information about emerging issues in labor unions.

COUSA offers avenues where non-academic employees at Ontario University can share knowledge and experience about trends or activities that touch on employment issues. In addition, COUSA organizes workshops where members discuss and share knowledge on crucial topics for example: pay equity; reforms on labor laws; lobbying approaches; negotiating skills; and benefits costing.

The Confederation also lobbies and advocates on behalf of Ontario University staff to the public and government. It also offers a platform that enable member groups to collaborate on a short term basis (COUSA, 2011, p.3).

Legal issues and obstacles facing COUSA There are a number of legislative reforms in Canada that are likely to impact on the way COUSA runs its affairs. For example, in 2004, the parliament enacted Labor Relations Bill 144 that altered a number of labor relations laws in Canada. COUSA has several trade unions that are registered under the Ontario Labor Relations Act.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, the introduction of Labor Relations Bill 144 is bound to have an effect on the activities of the trade unions under COUSA. In addition, the new regulation will have a negative impact on academic workers hired on a part-time basis by the Ontario University.

For example, the Bill requires unionized organizations to submit the income disclosure requirements. This is one of the new changes introduced by the law and contradicts the public view about the objectivity of labor law (Slinn, 2003, p.367).

The effectiveness of COUSA is also constrained by lack of a strong financial base. Labor unions are denied financial aid from the government under the new law. COUSA does not have enough financial resources to mange cases related to violation of the Labor Act. A swift decree is the only viable cure to the adverse effects of the Act on the union.

Also, lack of ample financial resources has limited the ability of COUSA member unions to access reconciliation services. This has severely limited the ability of the COUSA to bargain on behalf of its member unions (Slinn, 2003, p.369).

Bargaining process COUSA has a number of elected representatives that bargain on behalf of its members. For example, the COUSA Salaries and Benefits Committee is mandated to negotiate on behalf of staff at Ontario University on matters related to compensation (David

[supanova_question]

Substitute Goods Research Paper essay help site:edu

Substitute Goods; Pens and Pencils

Substitute goods can be defined as those goods that customers views as alternative. They can also be seen as those goods that give consumers similar benefits. In other words, these goods satisfy the same needs. In most cases, the buyer takes several things into consideration before making their final decisions on the choice of the goods to buy more so in the case of substitute goods.

In this case, pens and pencils can be considered as substitute goods. This is because they yield same benefits to the consumer. For instance, both pen and pencil are used for writing. They can be used interchangeably. Consumers may either decide to write using pen or using a pencil. Therefore, pens and pencils are perfect substitutes. This is because they are both used exactly for the same purpose, which is writing.

Impacts on supply of pens of a technological breakthrough which reduces the cost of producing pens

Substitute goods usually offer a high level of competition in the market. This is because buyers can easily substitute them any time. This aspect creates competition between these products.

In this case, if a technological breakthrough reduces the cost of producing pens, then the minimum price levels which pen producers can offer in the market will fall accordingly. This will lead to a fall in prices of pens. However, the prices of pencils will remain constant.

The quantity of a product supplied in the market is directly proportional to the prices of the product in the market (Forgang and Einolf 171). In other words, the higher the prices, the higher the quantities of a specific product that producers will be willing to provide in the market.

In this case, technological advancement has led to reduction in the cost of production of pens. This implies that the producer will be willing to supply a larger quantity of pens at the prevailing price levels. Therefore, the quantity of pens supplies in the market is more likely going to increase.

As a result of reduction in the production cost of pens, producers may decide to lower the prices. As a result, pens will become cheaper compared to pencils. Since the two commodities are substitutes, some buyers will shift from using pencils to pens.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, this statement is based on the assumption that the consumers are behaving rationally. A rational consumer will tend to choose an alternative that maximizes their benefits and minimizes their costs.

Figure 1: Supply curve for pens

A technological breakthrough in pen manufacturing will cause the supply function of the pens to shift outwards. The quantity of pens supplied will increase significantly. This is as a result of increase in the quantity demanded as a result of a fall in prices.

Impacts on the price of pens and the quantity demanded for both pens and pencils after a technological breakthrough which reduces the cost of producing pens

Since substitute goods can be used interchangeably, they exert competitive pressure in case the prices or the quality of one of these products changes. In this case, a technological development has led to a significant reduction in the prices of pens. As a result, the quantity of pens demanded will increase.

Figure 2: The demand curve for pens.

From the graph above, it is clear that the quantity demanded is inversely proportional to the prices. In other words, the higher the prices, the lower the quantity of a product demanded and vice versa. From the graph above, the original price of pen was p1.

After a technological breakthrough, the production of pens falls significantly. As a result, the prices of pens fall from p1 to p2. At price p1, the buyers are willing to buy Q1 of pens. At price level p2, the buyers are willing to buy Q2 of pens. Therefore, it is clear that the quantity of pens demanded will increase significantly after a fall in prices.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Substitute Goods specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, the quantity of pencils demanded will fall significantly. Since pens and pencils are substitutes and that they serve the same purpose to the consumer, most of the buyers will turn to buy pens because they will be cheaper.

The substitute goods usually have positive cross elasticity of demand. This implies that an increase in price of one of these goods leads to an increase in prices of the other good. Consequently, the quantity of pencils demanded will fall significantly.

Figure 3: Demand curve for pencils.

From the graph above, a decrease in the prices of pens will cause the demand curve for pencils to shift in. This leads to a reduction in the quantity of pencils demanded significantly.

How managers for pen-makers and pencil-makers should decide given the above answers

From the above discussion, it is clear that the technological breakthrough in production of pens will favour pen manufacturers while it will present a big threat to the pencil manufacturers.

This is because the quantity demanded of pencils will tend to fall as more people shifts from using pencils to pens which are now cheaper than before. Therefore, there is a need for the managers of pen-makers and pencil-makers to take appropriate actions in order to retain and improve their performance respectively.

For the pencil-makers manager, it is advisable to take appropriate actions which can reverse the trends of demand for pencils arising from a fall in prices of pens. One of the actions that the managers can consider is differentiation. Differentiations play a significant role in increasing the sales of substitute goods which tends to compete in the same market (Piana par 6).

According to Forgang Einolf, differentiation will also help the pencil makers from reducing prices to unprofitable levels (170). Since pens and pencils do not have exact identical features, it will be easier to differentiate the two products.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Substitute Goods by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This can be through improvement in the quality and also introducing a wide variety of pencils. As a result, buyers will tend to buy the product to enjoy the unique features which are not present in the other substitutes. As a result, the demand for pencils will increase.

On the other hand, the managers for pen-makers need to apply appropriate measures in order to maximize their profits. Since the level of demand for the pens has increased, the managers should take necessary measures to increase their production in order to satisfy the increase in demand.

This will help in reducing shortages of peens in the markets. This may require expansion in their production capacities in order to satisfy this demand.

Works Cited Forgang, William and Einolf, Karl. Management Economics: An Accelerated Approach. New York: M.E. Sharpe, 2007.

Piana, Valentino. “Substitute Goods.” Economics Web Institute, 2005. 24th June. 2011.

[supanova_question]